Part I - Owners Technical Specification - RE - Rev L - 22dec2013 PDF

Musandam Power Project
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION DUAL FUEL

ENGINES

Rev L
December 2013

The SKM logo trade mark is a registered trade mark of Sinclair Knight Merz Pty Ltd.

Musandam Power Project
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION DUAL FUEL ENGINES
Rev L
December 2013

Sinclair Knight Merz
13th Floor, Cale Cross House
156 Pilgrim Street
Newcastle upon Tyne
NE1 6SU
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 191 211 2400
Fax: +44 191 211 2401
Web: www.globalskm.com

COPYRIGHT: The concepts and information contained in this document are the property of Sinclair
Knight Merz (Europe) Limited. Use or copying of this document in whole or in part without the
written permission of Sinclair Knight Merz constitutes an infringement of copyright.
LIMITATION: This report has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive use of Sinclair
Knight Merz (Europe) Limiteds Client, and is subject to and issued in connection with the provisions
of the agreement between Sinclair Knight Merz and its Client. Sinclair Knight Merz accepts no
liability or responsibility whatsoever for or in respect of any use of or reliance upon this report by any
third party.

Musandam Power Plant Technical Specification
SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE ii
Contents
1. Project Description 1
1.1. General 1
1.2. Role of Technical Specification 1
2. Scope of Work 2
2.1. Summary of scope 2
2.2. Terminal points 6
2.3. Provision of services during construction 10
2.4. Related Projects and excluded Work 11
2.5. Regulatory approvals 11
2.6. Codes and standards 11
3. Plant Design Criteria 13
3.1. General 13
3.2. Generating unit availability criteria 15
3.3. Site and layout 16
3.4. Site conditions 16
3.5. Fuel 19
3.6. Water management system 19
3.7. Cooling water 20
3.8. Environmental criteria 20
3.9. Noise 24
3.10. Risk assessment 26
3.11. HAZOP studies 26
3.12. Table of key dates 27
3.13. Concurrent work 27
4. General Specification 28
4.1. General requirements 28
4.2. Hardware and software 29
4.3. Access and maintenance 29
4.4. Lubrication 29
4.5. Corrosion protection 30
4.6. Insulation 30
4.7. Chemicals 31
4.8. Buildings 31
4.9. Signage 31
4.10. Degree of automation 32

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE iii
4.11. Lay-down areas 32
4.12. Design and standardisation 32
4.13. Prohibited materials 33
4.14. Classification of hazardous areas 33
4.15. Hazardous substances and dangerous goods 34
4.16. Drawings and documentation 34
4.17. Labelling 35
4.18. Operations and maintenance manuals 35
4.19. Inventory control management system 38
4.20. Construction program and progress 38
4.21. Places of manufacture and sub-orders 39
4.22. Quality assurance and quality control 39
4.23. Inspection and test plan 40
4.24. Training 42
4.25. Special tools 44
5. Site, Safety and Environmental Protection 45
5.1. The Site, access and use of Site 45
5.2. Site facilities 45
5.3. Security system 46
5.4. Safety 46
5.5. Fire protection and fire fighting 47
5.6. Environmental management, construction and commissioning 48
5.7. Construction certificates 49
5.8. Cleaning up by EPC Contractor 49
6. Mechanical Specification 50
6.1. Dual fuel engines 50
6.2. Cooling systems 54
6.3. Air starting system 56
6.4. Control/instrument air system 57
6.5. Inlet and exhaust system 58
6.6. Fuel systems 59
6.7. Water system 68
6.8. Black start and emergency diesel equipment 71
6.9. Mechanical building services 73
6.10. Maintenance facilities and equipment 74
6.11. Spare Parts 75
6.12. Fire protection and detection facilities) 75
6.13. General mechanical requirements 76

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE iv
7. Electrical Specification 80
7.1. General 80
7.2. Cable sizing calculations 81
7.3. Auxiliary supplies 81
7.4. Load flow and fault studies 82
7.5. Transient and dynamic stability studies 82
7.6. Earthing studies 82
7.7. Protection coordination studies 82
7.8. Insulation coordination studies 82
7.9. Lightning protection studies 83
7.10. Generator and excitation system 83
7.11. Generator main connections 85
7.12. Transformers 85
7.13. Metalclad Switchgear 87
7.14. Medium voltage (MV) switchgear 88
7.15. Generator voltage switchgear 88
7.16. Low voltage switchgear 89
7.17. Battery systems 89
7.18. Black Start / Emergency Generator 90
7.19. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systems 90
7.20. Protective system 91
7.21. Motors 93
7.22. Earthing 94
7.23. Alarm equipment 95
7.24. Cabling 95
7.25. Lighting and small power installation 99
8. Control System Requirements 101
8.1. General requirements 101
8.2. Codes and standards 101
8.3. Design and operational requirements 101
8.4. Plant control structure 102
8.5. Safety instrumented shutdown systems 103
8.6. Distributed Control System (DCS) 104
8.7. Station clock system 111
8.8. Instrumentation 112
8.9. Valves 114
8.10. Installation requirements 115
8.11. Plant information management system database (PIMS) 116

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE v
8.12. Plant instrumentation and wiring system database 116
8.13. Communication and security systems 116
9. Civil Requirements 120
9.1. General requirements for civil works 120
9.2. Scope of civil works 125
9.3. Design of the works 128
9.4. Specific building and architectural requirements 137
9.5. Materials and workmanship 141
9.6. Auxiliary transformer compounds 146
10. Provisional Acceptance 148
10.1. General 148
10.2. Commissioning plans, procedures and programme 148
10.3. Commissioning coordinating group 149
10.4. Commissioning 150
10.5. Testing 150
10.6. Tests on completion 151
10.7. Acceptance Tests 152
10.8. Test records 165
10.9. Changes after completion of Acceptance Tests 165
Appendix A Fuel Specifications 167
Appendix B Data Sheets Guaranteed Data, Performance Data, Design Data
and Inputs into the Bid Evaluation Tool 170
Appendix C Drawings and Documentation 248
Appendix D Specification for Metering System 260
Appendix E Plant System Categories for Spare Parts 289


SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE vi
Document history and status
Revision Date issued Reviewed by Approved by Date approved Revision type
1 8
th
Jan 2012 M Arnold G Taylor 8
th
Jan 2012 Draft
A 23
rd
Jan 2012 M Arnold G Taylor 23
rd
Jan 2012 Client review comments
incorporated
B 8
th
Feb 2012 M Arnold G Taylor 8
th
Feb 2012 Modifications to reflect RFP
requirements
C 4
th
April 2012 M Arnold G Taylor 4
th
April 2012 Further modifications to
reflect MFS, OPWP
clarifications and client
feedback
D 1
st
Feb 2013 G Taylor A Green Updated with revised project
requirements
E 20
th
Feb 2013 A Green B Ging Revised with OPWP
comments
F 15
th
March
2013
G Cox A Green 15
th
March
2013
Updated following
Consortium/OPWP
comments
G 31
st
March
2013
William Booker/
OOC
OOC 31
st
March
2013
Updated following
Consortium/OPWP
comments
H 13 April 2013 William Booker/
OOC
OOC 13 April 2013 Updated following
RAECo/OPWP comments
I 26 April 2013 William Booker/
OOC
William Booker/
OOC
26 April 2013 Updated following
Ashurst/OPWP comments
J 05 December
2013
William
Booker/OOC
OOC 05 December
2013
OOC Update
K 12 December
2013
William
Booker/OOC
OOC 12 December
2013
OOC Update
L 22 December
2013
William
Booker/OOC
OOC 22 December
2013
OOC Update
Distribution of copies
Revision Copy no Quantity Issued to
1 Electronic 1 Oman Oil + LGI
A Electronic 1 Oman Oil + LGI
B Electronic 1 Oman Oil + LGI
C Electronic 1 Oman Oil + LGI
D Electronic 1 Oman Oil + LGI
E Electronic 1 Oman Oil + LGI
F Electronic 1 Oman Oil +LGI+OPWP
G Electronic 1 Oman Oil +LGI+OPWP
H Electronic 1 Oman Oil +LGI+OPWP
I Electronic 1 Oman Oil +LGI+OPWP
J Electronic 1 Oman Oil +LGI
L Electronic 1 Oman Oil +LGI+OPWP

Author: G Taylor / B Rose / B Littlewood / K Zachariah / I Gillan / D Hackwell
Project Manager: A Green
Name of organisation: Oman Oil Company and LGI
Name of project: Musandam Power Plant
Name of document: Technical Specification
Document version: Rev L

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE vii
Project number: VP01278


SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE viii
Nomenclature
Abbreviations and symbols
AC Alternating current
ACI American Concrete Institute
AG Available generation
AGC Automatic generation control
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
ALARP As low as reasonably practical
ANSI American Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
AQG Air Quality Guidelines
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AVR Automatic voltage regulator
BS British Standard
CAD Computer aided drafting
CCR Central control room
CCTV Closed circuit television
CD ROM Compact disc read only memory
CEMP Construction environmental management plan
CFC Chlorofluorocarbon
C&I Control and instrumentation
COD Commercial operation date
CO2 Carbon dioxide
CPF Central processing facility
CTs Current transformers
CV Calorific value
DA Degraded airshed
dB(A) decibels (absolute)
DC Direct current
DCS Distributed control system
DF Dual fuel
DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung
e.g. for example
EAF Equivalent availability factor
EIA Environmental impact assessment
EN EuroNorm
ENMP Environmental noise management plan
EPC Engineer procure and construct
FMS Fuel Metering Skid
FOF Forced outage factor
FOH Forced outage hours
GCF Gas connection facilities
GCPC Guaranteed Contract Power Capacity running on Natural Gas
GCPFC Guaranteed Contract Power Capacity running on Fuel Oil
GCPUC Guaranteed Gross Contract Power Capacity of each Power Unit running on Natural Gas
GCPUFC Guaranteed Gross Contract Power Capacity of each Power Unit running on Fuel Oil
GIP Good industrial practice
GIS Gas insulated substation
GPRS Gas pressure regulating station
H2 Hydrogen
HAZOP Hazard and operability
HHV Higher heating value
HMI Human machine interface
HSEC Health safety environmental and community
HV High voltage (132kV)

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE ix
HVAC Heating ventilation and air conditioning
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IFC International Finance Corporation
IGEM Institute of Gas Engineers and Managers
I/O Input / output
IP Ingress protection
ISDN Integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
L Length
LED Light emitting diode
LFO Light Fuel Oil
LHV Lower heating value
LMT Local mean time
LOLH loss of load hours
LOLP Loss of load probability
LNTP Limited notice to proceed
LV Low voltage (below 1kV)
MECA Ministry of the Environment and Climate Affairs
MCC Motor control centre
MDQ Maximum Daily Quantity
MGP Musandam Gas Plant
MFS Minimum Functional Specification
MN Methane number
MSL Mean sea level
MV Medium Voltage (11-15kV)
N Quantity
NDA Non-degraded airshed
NDIR Non dispersive infrared indicator
NDT Non destructive testing
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NG Natural Gas
NGSA Natural Gas Supply Agreement
NOx Oxides of Nitrogen
NPSH Net positive suction head
NTP Notice to proceed
OLTC On-load tap changer
OOCEP Oman Oil Exploration and Production Company
OEM Original equipment manufacturer
O&M Operation and maintenance
OPC Open connectivity
O2 Oxygen
PABX Private automatic branch exchange
PC Personal computer
PCB Poly chlorinated biphenyl
PD Published document
PFD Process flow diagram
PDF Portable document format
PH Period hours
PIMS Plant information management system
P&ID Process and instrumentation diagram
PLC Programmable logic controller
PM Particle matter
RAEC Rural Areas Electricity Company SAOC
RCD Residual current device
RDC RAEC load dispatch
RH Relative humidity

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE x
S Sulphur
SF6 Sulphur hexafluoride
SI Systeme International
SKM Sinclair Knight Merz
SOE Sequence of events
SWG Standard wire gauge
SWMP Soil and water management plan
UBC Uniform Building Code
UHC Unburnt hydrocarbons
UL Underwriters laboratories
UPS Uninterruptible power supply
UPVC Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride
VDU Visual display unit
VT Voltage transformer
WHO World Health Organisation
WB World Bank
WTP Water treatment plant
XLPE Cross linked polyethylene
Units
C Degree Celsius
dB(A) Decibel (A weighted scale)
Euro
GWh Gigawatt hours
kg kilogram
kJ/kWh kilojoules per kilowatt hour
kN kilonewton
kPa kilopascal
kt kilotonnes
kV kilovolts
kW, kWe Power, Power electrical
Lux Illuminance
m metre
mm millimetres
m
2
metre squared
mg milligram
ms millisecond
mg/L milligram per litre
MMBTU Million British thermal units
MJ/Nm
3
Megajoule per normal cubic metre
MV Megavolt
MVA Megavolt ampere
MVAr Megavolt ampere reactive
MW, MWe Power, Power electrical
MWth Heat flow
pH acidity / basicity
RH Relative humidity
rpm revolutions per minute
Scf/SCF Standard cubic foot
$, USD United States dollar
t tonnes
%, % vol percentage, percentage volume

SINCLAIR KNIGHT MERZ PAGE 1
1. Project Description
1.1. General
It is the intention of Musandam Power Company S.A.O.C. (hereinafter referred to as The Owner); to install
a Natural Gas fuelled, dual fuel reciprocating engine based Plant with a minimum net firm capacity of 100
MW and with Fuel Oil as the alternative fuel. The plant shall supply electricity to the Musandam Electricity
Grid owned by the Rural Areas Electricity Company (RAECo).
The Site is located approximately 40 km to the south-west of Khasab and approximately 500 metres north of
the Ad Darah border between the Sultanate of Oman and the United Arab Emirates in Wilayat Bukha. The
closest settlements within a 2 km radius to the Site are Ad Darah, Tibat and Sall Dawrah.
The Plant will be deemed phase 1 of a possible two phase development. An area has been identified for the
plant layout and provision has been made for future construction of phase 2.
The contract shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this OTS (hereinafter referred to as
"Specification"), which provides for the design, manufacture, factory testing, supply, delivery, off loading at
site, erection, painting, site testing, setting to work and attention to defects, compliance with local and
national consents, regulations, standards and legislation on a turnkey lump sum contract basis, including all
related civil works, and such other works as the Owner may require, for a 100 MW minimum net firm
capacity Plant at the Musandam site (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract referred to as the Site).
The plant shall be optimised to offer a competitive least cost solution and the EPC Contractor shall offer a
unit size that takes due regard of all specified functional and operational requirements. The EPC Contractor
shall support the Owner in the provision of such supporting information as may be required to demonstrate
that the life cycle costs of the plant have been optimised.
1.2. Role of Technical Specification
The role of this Specification is to define the minimum functional requirements of the Works and to provide
site-specific data to the EPC Contractor. The Specification also serves to define the environmental and
regulatory constraints within which the plant must operate and with which the Works shall comply.
It is the intention of this Specification to provide the EPC Contractor the maximum freedom to provide the
most competitive offer based on the EPC Contractors standard plant and equipment though with the design
optimised for the particular scope of the project and taking the Owners requirements into account.
The Works shall be new, modern, proven, and safe and shall be designed for the highest availability factor,
start reliability, efficiency and flexibility of starting within an offer that is commercially attractive.


2. Scope of Work
2.1. Summary of scope
The scope of work includes the design, manufacture, supply, factory testing, transporting, installation,
commissioning, acceptance testing, and repair during the defects liability period and all work incidental
thereto whether specified in detail or not, necessary for the safe and efficient operation of the plant.
Generally, the main supply shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Dual fuel reciprocating engines providing a total plant with a minimum net firm capacity of 100 MW at
all site ambient conditions on an [N+1] basis where N is the number of engines required to provide
the 100 MW net firm capacity. The minimum net firm capacity of 100 MW must be achieved across
the gas composition range provided under Appendix A of this OTS. The definition of the number of
additional units required may be dependent upon the plant configuration, if engines of different
capacities are offered.
2. Synchronous, 3phase, 50 Hz generators driven by the dual fuel engines and complete with all
auxiliaries.
3. Induced draft radiator cooling water system for main and auxiliary plant cooling.
4. All necessary auxiliary systems including, but not limited to, the following:
Gas Connection Facilities, Gas Metering Facilities and Metering Systems;
Gas conditioning equipment;
Fuel Oil unloading facilities, storage tanks, forwarding pumps and metering systems
Heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment and systems;
Gas detection systems;
Fire detection and protection systems;
Compressed air system;
Cathodic protection;
Painting;
Tools and tackle for maintenance including special tools;
Workshop and store;
Water supply systems;
Water treatment plant;
Water sampling and dosing systems; and
Connections to off-site services.
5. Step up transformers from the generator voltage to the transmission system voltage; the EPC
Contractor shall offer a solution which meets the requirements of the RAECo security standards and
takes into account the requirement to maintain load in the event of the sudden loss of one
generating unit. The transformers and associated connections shall be selected to support two
operating conditions as follows:
a) The maximum net output of the generating plant when operating at the Reference Conditions;
and
b) The maximum net output of the generation plant when operating at ISO reference conditions.

6. Auxiliary transformers to allow the plant to supply its own auxiliaries.
7. Two auxiliary supply transformers, Aux V / 11kV, rated at 1MVA for connection to Tibat Grid 11kV
board.
8. HV cabling in concrete trenches from HV terminals of step-up transformer to the Tibat grid
substation GIS terminations
9. MV cabling in concrete trenches
10. All necessary auxiliary electrical systems including, but not limited to, the following:
Switchgear;
LV and DC auxiliary supplies systems;
Batteries, chargers and uninterruptible power supplies (UPS);
Emergency/black start diesel generator system;
Auxiliary transformers connected to the medium voltage switchboard, and sized to match the
requirements of the Plant LV AC supplies;
Earthing and lightning protection system;
Surge arrestors;
Plant auxiliaries supply, including auxiliary transformers, HV/LV transformers, MV switchgear,
LV switchgear, MV/LV busducts and cables, DC and UPS systems, lighting, earthing and
lightning protection systems; and
Protective systems covering all equipment included under this specification
11. An integrated distributed control system including all necessary control and protection
instrumentation, site telecommunications and connections to off-site services including, but not
limited to the following:
interfacing facilities for interchanging data, including Operating Parameters required as inputs to
the Plant model between the Plant and the RDC;
I&C, including Plant control and monitoring system, telecommunication, protection systems,
environmental monitoring equipment and system , field testing equipment, instrument workshop
equipment, metering etc.;
control, indication, protection and telephone cables from the Plant to the new Tibat grid
substation and associated marshalling cubicles; and
security systems including perimeter fence monitoring, CCTV system, access control to site and
buildings, building intruder detection, gate intercom.
12. All civil and structural works associated with the above equipment including
- Site development which includes removal of material from the mountain on the site, filling and
compacting the Site to foundation level and then layering and compacting the site to 15 metres
above mean sea level, with suitable fill material. . Slope protection between the original ground
level to +15m MSL is included by using either rip rap, shotcrete, reinforced concrete retaining
walls or a combination of the methods;
- Approximately 1.5 million cubic metres (the Bidder
1
to confirm volume) of excess material from
the Site levelling work shall be used for coastal reclamation. The Base Case shall be the
reclamation of land in the area demarcated by the Royal Oman Police and extended area
towards sea side, on the western side of the Khasab highway, southern side of the existing jetty,

1
References to Bidder to be amended to Contractor prior to execution of final form EPC Contract

opposite the Plant site. The Option Case shall be area demarcated on the western side of the
Khasab highway and the northern side of the existing jetty, . The Bidder shall also be
responsible for the relocation of any coral inhabiting the seabed affected by the land
reclamation. The size of the coral beds are approximately 0.3 ha in area for the Base Case and
30 ha for the Option Case. The Bidder shall be responsible for the monitoring of the coral during
the construction period and shall undertake mathematical modeling to predict any erosion of the
coastal strip and topography caused by the land reclamation. The relocation recipient site could
be up to 3000 metres from the coral donor site, MECA to decide final area. Monitoring will
include daily inspections by divers and bi weekly water sampling. The bidder should include
provision for necessary boat rentals & laboratory costs and execution plan. The reclamation
areas and the Royal Oman Police requirements, in terms of the Base and Option Cases are
detailed in Appendix 6 PART I (g) of the EPC RFP. The Royal Oman Police, the Owner and/or
OPWP shall provide the necessary in-principle clearances, including the no objection certificate
from the Ministry of Environment and Climate Affairs to the Owner, and/or OPWP for the same,
prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Owners environmental impact statement
shall include the coastal reclamation works as defined in the Base and Option Cases. The
Bidder is responsible for all construction related permits for the reclamation works. On
completion of the reclamation works, the reclaimed area shall be handed over to the Owner
and/or the Royal Oman Police. The Base Case and Option Case should each be quoted for
separately and both are identified in Appendix 6.
- The design of the rock armour revetment and land reclamation is included in the scope of
services, as is the relocation of any coral inhabiting the reclamation area seabed and monitoring
of the coral during the construction period, adhering to any conditions imposed by MECA. The
coral habitat to be translocated is identified in Appendix 6.
The Bidder should provide include for the cost of Monitoring Process to the translocate Corals
during reclamation phase periodic and till the COD. Monitoring process includes marine water
sampling for analysis of TSS;
Any confirmatory Site investigations required (geotechnical, topographical, seismic,
hydrogeological, hydrological, contaminated land, meteorological, soil resistivity, bathymetric,
etc). Initial surveys by the Owner are provided in Appendix 6 of the RFP for information. The
Bidder is to carry out their own surveys;
Any confirmatory Site topographical surveys required;
Data collection (including verification of design data provided in the Specification including
transmission system technical data);
Site preparation, including preparation of Phase 1 and 2 areas, Phase 2 laydown area, common
gas facilities, RAECo substation area, site drainage and sewage systems. Diversion and
permanent drainage of the mountain side rainwater run-off to storm water drains is included in
the scope of services. The RAECO substation site area is to be prepared to the same
specification as Phase 1 & 2 in section 9.1.1, the location and the dimensions are indicated on
PDF Krookie of MIPP in Appendix 6 of the RFP;
Modifications to, or the relocation or removal of, existing pipelines, cables, drainage systems or
any other facilities, which may be present on the Site;
Bunding around Fuel Oil storage tanks;
Engine foundations and associated work including power house building housing engines,
generators and auxiliary equipment;
Auxiliary transformer foundations, steelwork, ground works, slabs, firewalls and finishing works

Central control room (Control Room);
Electrical equipment building;
Administration, workshop and stores building(s);
Water treatment plant and building;
Other ancillary buildings as a specific requirement of the EPC Contractors plant;
Miscellaneous plant foundations;
Pipe and cable bridges/racks, service ways, ducts and trenches;
Oil and water tank foundations, bunds etc.;
Fuel unloading facility
Fire protection building;
Gas reception area and gas pipeline reticulation including the MOG requirement for separate
access to Natural Gas fiscal metering system and Natural Gas fiscal metering system building /
enclosure from the perimeter road;
Galleries, staircases and landings for access to the Plant;
Ancillary and temporary buildings (including offices for the EPC Contractor, OPWP and the
Owner) and temporary housing camp (as required);
Roads and paved areas including construction of permanent access roads on-Site,
construction of the primary access road to have a slope of not greater than 5% and connection
to the secondary access road and perimeter roads. All roads to include lighting and barriers.
Site services including fresh water, general station use water, and fire services water
reticulation;
Storm water drainage, reject water and chemical process water systems;
Site wide effluent collection and reticulation system;
Fencing and gates;
Any additional site boundary wall/fencing with lighting;
Site finishing works trimming, grading, protection, hard landscaping; and
Construction of seawater intakes or beach wells (as required) and a water discharge system
13. Temporary fencing, lighting and guarding and all other materials and services necessary for the
safety and security of persons and property at the Site or such other areas used for storage during
construction;
14. Initial fill of lubricant, greases and other consumables (including initial fill of water treatment
chemicals) except fuels (Natural Gas and Fuel Oil) up to handover by the EPC Contractor.
15. Spares as described in this Specification
16. Special Tools as described in this Specification at paragraph 4.25;
17. Factory testing, commissioning and Acceptance Tests
18. Design, procurement, transportation, engineering and project management services
19. HAZOP, safety studies, location risk assessment for air intakes and exhaust stacks in the event of
gas release from MGP, etc
20. All plans, approvals, permits, authorisations, licenses etc in order to complete the Works and any
costs associated with such approvals, etc. The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all
construction and building work permits.

21. The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for submitting all statutory and design code calculations for
third party verification, and obtaining such approvals as are required.
22. Comprehensive training of Owners operations and maintenance (O&M) personnel.
23. As-built drawings and comprehensive, fully cross referenced O&M manuals in hard copy and
suitable electronic form with suitable software program to allow ease of use.
24. Warranty as described in the Contract.
2.2. Terminal points
The Plant shall operate as a stand-alone Plant with its own independent systems to ensure security of
supply.
The Plant shall have the following interfaces:
2.2.1. Interfaces with the Licensed Transmission System Operator
The 132kV interface to the transmission connection shall be the 132 kV GIS cable box(es) located in the
LTSO GIS substation.
Interconnection of the Plant earthing system and the Tibat grid substation earthing ring
Terminals in interface marshalling cubicles in interface room in the new Tibat grid substation for the
following hardwired signals interchange:
VTs and CTs secondary connections (for step-up transformer protection);
inter-tripping signals (for Plant protection);
interlocking signals;
VT secondary connections (for synchronizing);
paralleling device signals for synchronising of the Licensed Transmission System Operators
132 kV circuit breakers at Tibat grid substation;
protection signals;
control signals;
monitoring signals;
measurements;
metering signals;
signals via IEC 60870-5-101 (serial) or IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP) data communication links
(protocol to be finalised at the design stage) to multiplex interface provided by the Licensed
Transmission System Operator in the interface room of Tibat grid substation (according to the
RAEC Code and the Consolidated SCADA List). This should include the signals required by the
Licensed Transmission System Operator and the signals required by the Owner from the
Licensed Transmission System Operator; and
voice communication.
Two cable connections up to the circuit breakers of the 11 kV switchboard in the Tibat grid substation to
supply auxiliary power with a capacity up to 1 MVA at 11kV (with (n-1) level of security) to the Tibat grid
substation
Control and protection terminals at 11 kV switchgear in Tibat grid substation

11 kV cable differential protections. The EPC Contractor shall provide the necessary fibre optic cable
and ensure that his relay will be able to co-ordinate with the relay being provided by the Licensed
Transmission System Operator procured for the purpose; and
Direct dial and hotline interface.
2.2.2. Control, metering and protection
Plant synchronisation shall be controlled from the Plant. 132 kV circuit breakers at the Tibat grid
substation shall synchronise using the paralleling device.
In the Tibat grid substation control building, a separate room will be provided for the accommodation of
interface and tariff metering equipment. The room will have direct access from outside the building for
access to the interface and metering equipment. All SCADA and metering interfaces from the Plant
shall be installed and connected at the interface cubicles / marshalling panels by the EPC Contractor.
The hardwired signals interchanged to and from the Licensed Transmission system Operator, at the
interface marshalling cubicle shall be exchanged as follows:
4 to 20 mA signals for analogue; and
volt-free change over contacts for digital signals.
There shall be a common signal interface panel, to be supplied, installed and connected by the EPC
Contractor, located in the new 132 kV Tibat grid substation.
For all signals from/to the RDC, the Licensed Transmission System Operator will connect them to the
RDC.
Bi-directional tariff quality meters shall be supplied and installed by the EPC Contractor in a metering
panel located in the Tibat grid substation interface room. (Two (2) sets of meters will be supplied the
main tariff metering equipment and back-up tariff metering equipment).
All generator transformer protection shall be supplied by the EPC Contractor and shall be located in the
Plant area.
All connection cable protection shall be supplied by the EPC Contractor and shall be located in the Plant
area.
2.2.3. Interfaces with RDC:
The Plant shall be incorporated into the Licensed Transmission System Operators SCADA/energy
monitoring system (EMS) at the RDC. Necessary multiplexing equipment will be provided by the
Licensed Transmission System Operator and located at the Tibat grid substation.
The SCADA/EMS interface between the RDC and Plant shall be achieved using two independent
gateways for conversion to IEC protocol 60870-5-101 (serial) or IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP), protocol to
be finalised during the design stage. Interoperability between the RDC and Plant shall be ensured. The
interface shall be communication ports on the multiplexing equipment provided by the Licensed
Transmission System Operator. The EPC Contractor shall provide all materials required to establish
redundant communication links to the multiplexing equipment, including patch cords, network switches,
fibre optic patch panels and fibre optic cable with accessories.
The data exchange between the RDC and the Plant as given in the RFP Appendix 6, Part I (f) shall be
provided and contain general requirements for different signal categories (measurements, production
metering, status indications, controls, indications/ alarms).
The Consolidated SCADA List as given in the RFP Appendix 6 Part I (e) contains all signals to be
exchanged with the RDC, from/to the Plant as well as from/to the Tibat grid substation:
Section A, substations.

Section B, Plants: The signals are mainly related to the Plant and shall be exchanged with the DCS
supplied by the Owner. However, there are some signals related to the HV side of the step-up
transformers, which shall be measured within the substation and they will be exchanged as above.
2.2.4. Interfaces to Natural Gas supply
The interfaces to the Natural Gas supply system will be in accordance with Section 6 of this
Specification.
Natural Gas shall be supplied by pipeline from the adjacent gas processing plant to an agreed, metered
terminal point at the gas conditioning facilities at the Plant boundary.
Remote monitoring interface to adjacent gas processing facility terminal point at a signal terminal
cabinet located at the gas pipeline terminal point.
2.2.5. Other service interfaces
The following service interfaces shall also be considered by the EPC Contractor:
Lube oil and Fuel Oil shall be delivered by road tanker. Loading points shall be provided by the EPC
Contractor in close proximity to the inlet to the storage tanks at site
Clean water supply from dedicated sea water connection and water treatment plant
Clean water drains to seas outfall, after treatment, via site drainage system
Sewage connection fitting for trucking offsite
Chemicals will be delivered by road tankers and be unloaded at a dedicated unloading station adjacent
to the chemical storage tanks within the Plant. The terminal point shall be the inlet flanges on the
respective chemical unloading manifolds;
Waste oil will be pumped to the waste oil storage tank, where it will be removed by road tanker;
Plant access road will be from the existing adjacent public highway.
2.2.6. Metering and settlement equipment/measurement
The responsibility for the supply and installation of metering shall be as tabled below:

Location Supply Installation
Energy
Input/Output
(132 kV level)
Main (Pay)
Metering
Facilities
CT /
VT
Tibat grid
substation

Licensed Transmission System
Operator (Owner to co-ordinate
his requirements)
Licensed Transmission
System Operator
Meter
Tibat grid
substation
metering Room
EPC Contractor EPC Contractor
Gas Metering Facilities
Main (Pay) Metering
Facilities
Plant metering
room
Fuel Oil Metering
Facilities
Plant metering
room
Location Supply Installation
Energy
Input/Output
(132 kV level)
Back-up (Check)
Metering
Facilities
CT /
VT
Tibat grid
substation
Licensed Transmission System
Operator
(Generator to co-ordinate his
requirements)
Licensed Transmission
System Operator
Meter
Tibat grid
substation
metering room
Gas Metering Facilities
Back-up (Check)
Metering Facilities
Plant metering
room
Fuel Oil Metering
Facilities
Plant metering
room

2.2.6.1. Metering of Electrical Energy Delivered
Electrical Energy Delivered from the Plant will be measured at the Electrical Delivery Point on the 132 kV
system. The metering equipment for the above mentioned supply locations shall be provided installed,
maintained, owned and operated by the EPC Contractor according to the Metering and Data Exchange Code
(RAEC Code, RMDEC.5 Electricity Meters). The metering equipment will give, for each direction of flow, the
following quantities:
a continuous automatic record of both MW and MVAr;
an automatic record of the MWh and MVArh according to RMDEC.7.4.1 (RAEC Code); and
a continuous integrating record of the MWh and MVArh.
The system shall have history recording and reporting features. The metering panel shall have a security
sealing arrangement.

One (1) set of the meters shall be used to separately measure the Electrical Energy imported and exported
by the Plant. The second set of the meters measuring in the same manner as the first set, will be used for
verification purposes. Each set of meters shall be connected to a separate set of current transformers.
Provisions shall be made for signalling the above data to the RDC.
The accuracy of meters, current transformers and voltage transformers shall each be within zero point two
per cent (0.2%). All meters shall be sealed.
2.2.6.2. Metering of Natural Gas
The EPC Contractor shall supply and install the gas energy metering equipment at the GCF, including an
independent access to the metering compound. Independent access provisions shall be provided in the
Plant Metering Room supplied for the Ministry of Gas (MOG) to access the fuel gas metering system.
2.2.6.3. Metering of Fuel Oil
The EPC Contractor shall provide and install all necessary Fuel Oil metering equipment including:
flow indication, registration and metering;
automatic record of Fuel Oil quantity consumed over time interval; and
continuous integration record of Fuel Oil consumed.
2.2.6.4. Measurement of Site ambient conditions
The EPC Contractor shall provide and install Ambient Conditions Measurement Facilities for monitoring the
ambient conditions at the Site which shall include instrumentation for measuring ambient air temperature (dry
bulb), ambient barometric pressure and relative humidity.
2.2.7. Terminal point design, management and coordination
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all its terminal points and the full management of
all its interfaces.
To ensure adequate coordination, the EPC Contractor shall arrange a dedicated interface meeting with the
two other project related contractors (switchyard and gas supply) as soon as possible after the contract is
awarded, but not later than 1 month after Limited Notice to Proceed (LNTP) or Notice to Proceed (NTP)
whichever occurs earlier.. At this meeting all terminal point locations, design parameters and physical tie-in
responsibilities shall be determined and agreed in writing.
A point of contact from each contractor shall be nominated to liaise and manage the interfaces between the
parties, and the Owner shall be copied on all correspondence.
2.3. Provision of services during construction
The Owner shall provide the following services during construction:
a. Operators and maintenance personnel shall work under the supervision and direction of the EPC
Contractor during Plant commissioning.
b. Permits, Licenses and Approvals as outlined herein
The EPC Contractor shall provide the following services during construction:

a. All electricity supplies
b. All construction and potable water
It shall be the EPC Contractors responsibility to obtain and treat all water required to ensure it is suitable for
concrete production and for use as potable water.
2.4. Related Projects and excluded Work
The following items are excluded from the scope of the EPC Contractor:
2.4.1. 132 kV Tibat Grid Substation
The construction, operation and maintenance of the Tibat grid substation is outside the scope of the Project
with the exception of connection of four (4) connection lines and associated equipment to connect the new
Plant incoming circuits to the new 132kV substation. The grid substation equipment installed by the Licensed
Transmission System Operator shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50 Hz, 132 kV nominal voltage, and the system
shall be a solid neutral earthed system complying with the following:
highest system voltage 145 kV rms
3 phase symmetrical short circuit current 40 kA rms / 3 seconds.
3 phase asymmetrical short circuit 128 kA peak
full wave impulse voltage (BIL) phase to earth 650 kV peak
circuit breaker insulating and interrupting medium SF6
isolation 1050 kV
2.5. Regulatory approvals
The Owner has undertaken a pre-feed environmental assessment and obtained a Preliminary Environmental
Permit (PEP) from Ministry of Environment and Climate Affairs (MECA). The Owner is following a
comprehensive approval process involving planning and environmental issues. The Owner will complete an
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) to secure approval for the development based on the selected
technology, design and plant configurations. The copy of the pre-feed environmental assessment report will
be provided to the EPC Contractor for information.
The EPC Contractor shall be required to support the Owner by providing necessary information in the EIA
and shall comply with the relevant requirements of the EIA. On completion a copy of the EIA will be provided
to the EPC Contractor for information.
2.6. Codes and standards
The codes and standards for the Plant shall be in the following order of precedence:
1. Omani standards e.g. Oman Electrical Standards as defined in the RAEC Code as may be approved by
the relevant Competent Authority from time to time;
2. the standards and recommendations of the International Organisation for Standardisation (ISO) and the
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC); and
3. other standards and codes which are internationally accepted.

The codes, standards and specifications referenced in this Specification shall include addenda and
amendments in force at Notice to Proceed (NTP) and shall govern in all cases where references to them are
made. Other equivalent international standards may only be used with the written agreement of the Owner.
Where specified otherwise, mechanical systems may also be designed, manufactured, constructed and
installed according to the following standards, amongst others:
Engine ISO 3046
Vibrations ISO 8528 part 9
Mechanical design EN-ISO 12100
Stair and platforms ISO
Dimensional standards for installation materials (pipes, beams, etc.) DIN, ISO, SFS and EN
Pipe design calculations EN 13480 and DIN 2413
Tanks API 650 for Design only
Typical material standards DIN, SFS and EN
The EPC Contractor shall comply with all laws and regulations of Oman. All apparatus and material
supplied, and all work carried out and matters arising in fulfilment of the Contract shall conform, at the EPC
Contractor's expense, in all respects to all the laws and regulations, by-laws and requirements of
national/local or other authorities which are applicable to the Works.
The Works shall be designed, constructed, and commissioned in accordance with the Contract and
International Standards. Where no appropriate Standard exists, an alternative Standard may be used,
subject to the agreement of the Owner.
In the event that a conflict arises between codes and standards of practice nominated in the Contract the
more stringent criteria shall govern. Should the difference not be resolved on the criteria of stringency the
Owner shall decide which provision shall apply. The EPC Contractor shall be obliged to comply with all such
decisions without any variation to the Contract.
The EPC Contractor shall not depart from the agreed Standards without the written acceptance of the
Owner. The EPC Contractor shall provide information regarding their proposed standards in response to this
requirement.
All units of measurement and symbols shall conform to the Systeme International dUnites (SI units) for
basic and derived units or names of units, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner.
SI units shall be used in all correspondence, documentation, calculations, drawings, measurements etc. If
reference has to be made to non-standard items, the SI units shall be quoted followed by the non-standard
units in brackets.

3. Plant Design Criteria
3.1. General
a) The Plant shall be designed to provide a minimum net firm capacity of 100 MW at Site Reference
Conditions across the gas composition range provided under Appendix A of this OTS. Firm capacity
shall be established by providing surplus capacity to a minimum generation security standard
equivalent to an N+1, where N is the number of installed units required to meet a demand of 100 MW.
b) The total installed capacity of the Plant and the number of generating units will vary according to the
size and type of units deployed within the plant to meet the net firm capacity requirement. Plant
configurations may comprise a large number of small units, a small number of large units or a hybrid
arrangement with a combination of large and small units, where an N+1 redundancy is based upon the
larger of the installed units.
c) Generating units may be grouped in blocks, where each block or bus-section is connected via a step-
up transformer to the 132 kV RAEC substation. The number of 132 kV breakers available at the
RAECo substation is 3 (three), and this can be increased up to a maximum of 5 (five).

d) The Plant is required to operate over the entire load range in accordance with RAEC System
requirements and shall be dispatched at all times with spinning reserve sufficient to cover the forced
outage of the largest power infeed loss . The Bidder should demonstrate by way of a single line
diagram showing the generating unit , transformer and switchgear arrangements that the Plant can be
operated to ensure that in the event of a Main Equipment failure leading to the loss of power infeed:

the largest power loss is limited to the greater of the output of the largest operating generating
unit or the sum of the outputs of generating units connected to the same busbar section;
that at all times the maximum step load available from the generating units that remain in
service after the largest power loss does not exceed the maximum permissible step loading
available.
e) The Plant is required to operate over the entire load range and emissions to air must remain within
controlled limits :
for the Plant operating above [22 MW], each generating unit shall not be operated at a load less
than fifty (50) per cent of its MCR rating within the guaranteed emission limits.
for the Plant operating below [22MW], each generating unit shall not be operated at a load less
than thirty (30) per cent MCR rating within the guaranteed emission limits.
f) Each Reciprocating Engine power unit shall be capable of independently operating on either Natural
Gas or Fuel Oil. Individual Power Units or Power Unit Blocks should be able to operate on Fuel Oil
with the remaining Power Units or Power Unit Blocks operating on Natural Gas;

g) Fuel Oil operation is permissible to meet primary response requirements provided the generating units
change back to gas once stable operation is achieved. The maximum recovery time for a step load
increase shall be 5 seconds. Change to Fuel Oil operation shall be automatic, immediate and with no
interruption to load.

h) The primary response of generating units governor system shall increase power output to restore the
generation/demand power balance without the system frequency falling below 45.0Hz.
i) Generating units shall not be dispatched at levels below the minimum output necessary for stable
operation and with no restrictions on subsequent loadings within the permissible step loading.
j) Bidder is required to provide evidence that the primary response capability is acceptable taking into
account prime mover speed controllers, air/fuel system dynamics, prime mover dynamics and
generating unit rotating mass inertia.
k) Tenderers may optimise the design of generating units to enhance their ability to accept larger step
load increases in order to meet primary response requirements.
l) The Plant shall have the ability to deliver the minimum net firm power capacity of 100 MW at the
Reference Conditions within the Natural Gas Maximum Daily Quantity of 21,125 MMBTUs (equivalent
to 25 million standard cubic foot per day at a minimum LHV of 845 BTU/scf) across the gas
composition range provided in Appendix A of this OTS. Normal operation shall be on Natural Gas with
Fuel Oil providing the alternative fuel.
m) Generating unit switchboards shall be provided such that following a forced outage of any single
generation circuit or single section of busbar, the loss of power In-feed shall not exceed the largest
power in-feed loss. A "single section of busbar" is defined as a section of the switchboard that is
either stand alone or connected via busbar section circuit breakers.
n) Generating unit switchboards shall be provided with step-up transformers to the RAECo 132kV
transmission system. The number and ratings of step up transformer shall be such that with the
forced outage of a transformer the loss of generation in-feed shall not be greater than the largest
power in-feed loss and all remaining transformers shall not be overloaded.
o) Generating unit switchboards shall be equipped with switchgear with short circuit ratings capable
withstanding short circuit levels with all generating units synchronised when operating at rated power
output at lagging power factor. To meet this requirement tenderers can provide more than one power
block connected to the RAECo 132kV system in which case the contribution to short circuit levels from
the other power blocks shall be taken into account. An allowance shall also be made for increased
short circuit contributions from the RAECo 132kV network when further power plants are connected to
the 132kV network to the extent that the 132kV switchgear short circuit level is 40kA.
p) The RAEC System load growth over the Contract Years as defined in the LTSA together with the
seasonal requirements, the daily load cycling and the spinning reserve requirements shall be taken
into consideration when selecting the Power Unit capacity for the Plant. The Bidder shall select the
Power Unit capacity for the Plant such that the selected Power Units result in the lowest Plant life
cycle and security of supply requirements of RAEC are complied with. Bidder shall use the bid
evaluation tool ((herein referred to as BET) as a basis to select a Power Unit configuration which is
considered optimum.
q) It is envisaged that the Plant will be required to operate at a high load factor during the Summer
Period as defined in the LTSA and is likely to run at a lower load factor during the Winter Period as
defined in the LTSA. The Plant shall have the flexibility to run with part of the Plant shutdown.
r) The Plant must be designed, manufactured, installed and be suitable in every respect for continuous
operation at the GCPC, as well as at part loads and cyclic duty to meet daily peak loads. The Plant
shall be designed for an operating life of at least 25 years.
s) The Plant shall be designed to permit unconstrained operation over the full range of ambient
conditions.

t) The Plant shall, as a minimum, meet the following technical criteria:
All equipment offered shall be of proven design and new manufacture which can meet the
requirements of performance, reliability and availability specified in this document.
The Plant shall be designed such that the impact of a failure of any single piece of auxiliary
equipment will cause no reduction in the output of the Plant.
The Plant shall be designed such that the impact of a failure of any single piece of Main Equipment
will result in a loss of output of not more than the largest single power loss.

u) The control system shall be designed and set up to ensure that one generating unit shall remain on-
load in the event of the loss of the 132 kV transmission grid. This is to ensure that a supply is
maintained for house loads and local loads.
v) The electrical generators shall be capable of supplying their rated real output power at rated frequency
and rated power factor over the range 0.8 power factor lag to 0.95 lead for a voltage range of plus or
minus 10 per cent from rated voltage at the generator transformer HV terminals. Each generator shall
also be capable of supplying its rated output at rated voltage and rated power factor at a frequency
which may vary between 48 Hz and 51 Hz.
w) The electrical generators shall be capable of continuous operation without injurious effects with an
output over the range 0.8 power factor lag to 0.95 power factor lead and capable of generating rated
active power over the above power factor range.
x) The plant shall be designed for automatic, immediate switchover to alternative fuel with no interruption
to load in the event of a disruption to the primary Natural Gas fuel supply and the Bidder shall carry
out and provide a design study to ensure that a successful fuel changeover may be achieved together
with a changeover back to Fuel Oil.
3.2. Generating unit availability criteria
Each Power Unit in the Plant shall be designed for an average equivalent availability factor (EAF) of at least
92% and a forced outage factor (FOF) of not more than 3% (as defined by IEEE 762-1987, Standard
Definitions for Use in Reporting Electric Generating Unit Reliability, Availability, and Productivity).
Where:
=

, and =

and,
AG = Available generation
MG = maximum theoretical generation
FOH = forced outage hours
PH = period hours.
The design shall incorporate sufficient redundancy to achieve these goals and where necessary incorporate
automatic start-up of the standby plant in the event of failure of the duty item.

The Bidder shall provide details and references of the recorded operational reliability of the main equipment
and systems to be provided.
3.3. Site and layout
The Site area, location and coordinates of the Site including temporary areas that may be used for
construction laydown and area allocated for the future, Phase 2, expansion of the facility are shown
diagrammatically in the RfP. The entire site, as defined by the krookie, shall be levelled and compacted to
the final elevation of +15m MSL with the exception of access roads. The EPC Contractor may propose a
different site elevation provided that it is able to present solutions to retention of the site surface area, road
slope and spoil removal.
The EPC Contractor shall note that OOCEP is constructing the Musandam Gas Plant (MGP) in very close
proximity to this Plant. MGP will process 20,000 bpd of crude oil and 45 MMSCFD of associated gas from
the West Bukha field. MGP will include process units for separation of the well fluids, gas compression, gas
dehydration, dew pointing, desalting, crude stabilisation, gas sweetening, a sulphur recovery unit, LPG
bottling area, nitrogen plant, flares, produced water treatment, fuel and chemical storages, etc. The MGP
off-plot facilities include a jetty, well fluid import pipelines, seawater intake pipelines, outfall systems, crude
and gas export pipeline and a single buoy mooring for crude export. The MGP industrial facility presents
potential operational safety hazards that the EPC Contractor must understand and consider in its proposal
and its site arrangement.
The EPC Contractor shall offer its optimised standard design taking into account the conceptual layout and
the parameters detailed below:
the Owners requirement to allow space for expansion of the Plant in the future;
the topographical nature of the Site;
the adjacent MGP, switchyard and incoming gas supply pipeline.
The final layout shall allow sufficient space for equipment accessibility and laydown during maintenance
activities such that outages can be completed within the times allowed in the overhaul schedule.
The EPC Contractor shall demonstrate in the layout plan and the design of systems how these goals have
been achieved, to the Owner's satisfaction and agreement.
The final layout shall be to the approval of the Owner.
3.4. Site conditions
The Plant item shall be designed to withstand the most extreme ambient conditions to which it may be
subjected and to continue to function normally whilst operated at its maximum rating.
The Site elevation is approximately 15 m above sea level and the following ambient conditions are provided
for guidance:




Temperatures
maximum ambient temperature in the
shade, to be taken as air inlet
temperature for air-conditioning and
ventilation
C
(dry bulb)
50
minimum ambient temperature C
(dry bulb)
5
average annual ambient air
temperature
C 30
maximum metal temperature in the sun C 85
Barometric pressure
maximum barometric pressure Mbar 1030
minimum barometric pressure Mbar 970
Humidity
maximum ambient relative humidity % 100
average annual ambient relative
humidity
% 70
minimum ambient relative humidity % 10
Annual rainfall
maximum annual rainfall mm 1000
minimum annual rainfall mm 5
maximum rate of rainfall mm/min 0.8
average annual rainfall mm 50
Wind
maximum wind velocity km/h 160
design wind velocity km/h 200
Dust concentration
dust concentration in the air under mg/m3 1.02.0

normal conditions
dust concentration in the air approx.
under sandstorm conditions
mg/m3 100
The environment shall also be considered as coastal with a salt laden atmosphere. Materials used shall be
suitably selected to resist the environment.
The EPC Contractor shall carry out any air sampling necessary to determine the quality of the ambient air
and use this information in the design of the filtration system for the dual fuel engines and elsewhere in the
design of the plant as required.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for confirming the accuracy of all data on climatic conditions at the
site.
Attention is drawn to prevailing severe climatic conditions, such as high ambient humidity at high air
temperatures. A considerable amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere, giving rise to severe corrosion
attack. Protection against dust and sand for outdoor equipment requires special attention. Rainfall is very
erratic but attention must be paid to the fact that sudden heavy downpours can occur. Strong winds are
common. Sand and dust storms are frequent. Sandstorms can be severe and can continue for days with the
atmosphere heavily laden with dust particles. Fine dust in these sandstorms can be as small as 2 microns.
Extreme wind and rainfall conditions have been experienced on a number of occasions in recent years,
cyclone Gonu (2007) and cyclone Phet (2010) being the most notable extreme weather events.
If the EPC Contractor requires seawater, it shall conduct its own investigations to verify the composition of
the seawater and also determine additional water quality parameters such as sulphate, suspended solids (or
turbidity) and boron at the Site for its design purposes. If seawater is required, the Plant must be capable of
operation at a seawater temperature of 36
o
C.
3.5. Fuel
Information regarding the Natural Gas and Fuel Oil to be consumed on site is included in Appendix A.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for providing the complete installation of Gas Connection Facilities
and Metering Facilities to conform to the specifications and connection arrangements as detailed in
Appendix D and shall provide appropriate fuel conditioning equipment consistent with the engine
manufacturers requirements.
The EPC Contractor will also be responsible for providing the complete installation on the Plant side of the
Gas Delivery Point, downstream of the Gas Connection Facilities, Gas Metering Facilities and the Metering
Systems, including but not limited to, the emergency shutdown system, equipment for the provision of
Natural Gas pressure, conditioning and quality control as required by the reciprocating dual fuel gas engine
generators.
3.6. Water management system
The EPC Contractor shall design the Works to minimise the use of water. Effluent streams shall be reused
wherever practical. Maximum emission levels of effluent discharges from the works shall not exceed the
limits stated by the MECA Ministerial Decisions and/or the IFC 2008 Environmental Health and Safety
Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants. The EPC Contractor shall provide a preliminary water balance for
various operating conditions in its tender.

3.6.1. Water supply
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the complete water treatment and
reticulation system for the Works.
3.6.2. Clean storm water
Clean, non-contaminated storm water shall be discharged to an agreed nearby location outside the plant
boundary (likely to be the sea) as per the environmental permit.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the complete storm water system
for the Works.
3.6.3. Reject water
The EPC Contractor shall design and install a complete reject water system for the Works, including a
collection pit system to collect the reject water runoff. The design shall be complete with an interception
system capable of separating any oil contained in the reject water prior to the water being discharged off-
site. The collection pit system shall also be sized to capture, retain and process a total oil spill from the
largest oil containing vessel from within the Plant facility and any associated fire protection or storm water
captured with the oil.
3.6.4. Sewage
All sewage from the Works shall be directed by underground pipe work to an on-site sewage treatment
system.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the complete sewage system for
the Works and shall provide any additional sewage handling and/or treatment necessary during construction.
3.6.5. Potable water quality
Potable water produced for the Works shall meet current World Health Organisation (WHO), PAEW and the
Musandam Govenorate Drinking Water Guidelines.
3.7. Cooling water
The plant shall be cooled using fin fan radiators and water for make-up purposes shall be supplied from the
treatment plant designed and installed by the EPC Contractor.
3.8. Environmental criteria
3.8.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall design and construct the Works such that it complies with all applicable
environmental laws and regulations and meets the requirements of the Ministry of Environment and Climate
Affairs (MECA). All practicable measures shall be taken to prevent harm to the environment as a result of
the construction and operation of the Works. This shall include all relevant Omani standards and guidelines.
An illustrative, non-exhaustive list of regulations is listed below:
Ministerial Decision 17/93 Regulations for the Management of Solid Non-Hazardous Waste;
Ministerial Decision 18/93 Regulations for the Management of Hazardous Waste;
Ministerial Decision 79/94 Issuing Regulations for Noise Pollution Control in Public Environment;

Ministerial Decision 80/94 Issuing Regulations for Noise Pollution Control in Working Environment;
Ministerial Decision 145/93 Regulations for Wastewater Re-use and Discharge (under Review);
Ministerial Decision 140/93 Regulations for Chemical Materials Registration and Related Permits;
Ministerial Decision 248/97 Regulations for Handling of Toxic Substances;
Ministerial Decision 421/98 Regulations for Design of Septic Tanks
Ministerial Decision 281/2003 Regulation for the Control and Management of Radioactive Materials;
Ministerial Decision 118/2004 Regulations for Air Pollution;
Ministerial Decision 316/2001 Barring of Circulation and Usage of Some Hazardous Chemical
Substances including Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs);
Ministerial Decision 286/2008 Occupational Health and Safety Precautions;
Ministerial Decision 243/2005 Regulation for the Control and management of Ozone Depleting
Substances;
Ministerial Decision 187/2001 Regulation Organising Issuance of Environmental Approvals and the Final
Environmental Permit;
Ministerial Decision 18/2012 Regulations on Management of the Climate Affairs;
Ministerial Decision 68/2004 Amendment to Articles of Regulation Organising Issuance of
Environmental Approvals and the Final Environmental Permit; and
Royal Decision114/2001 - Law on Conservation of the Environment and Prevention of Pollution.
The EPC Contractor shall design the plant and provide all environmental monitoring plant, equipment and
systems such that, when operational, it shall be possible to confirm that the Works meet the requirements of
this Specification
Specific requirements are identified below.
3.8.2. Emissions to air
a. Reciprocating Engines (REs) specified for the Plant shall employ the best available technology
(BAT) not entailing excessive cost to minimise air emissions including lean burn technology.
b. A Preliminary Environmental Approval has been obtained from MECA for the Plant subject to the
approval/ detailed findings of the Owners EIA. With respect to air emissions, the Preliminary
Environmental Approval is contingent on the Plant design meeting/ Owners EIA demonstrating that
resulting ground level concentrations of pollutants do not exceed the provisional Omani Ambient
Air Quality Standards (OAAQS). An Air Dispersion Modelling Study provided to MECA has
demonstrated the OAAQS are achieved, provided the requirements (c) to (e) are fulfilled.
c. The Bidder shall ensure stacks are designed to aid efficient plume rise. Stacks from individual
engines are to be collected into two clusters (segmented stacks). The stacks are to be located as
close to each other as practically possible and in essence form one-a single stack cluster for the
purposes of plume rise.
d. Stacks shall be not less than 50 meters above ground level.
e. Bidder shall provide an online flue gas monitoring system (Continuous Emissions Monitoring
System (CEMS)) to MECA requirements
f. The Bidder shall provide guarantees with respect to emissions to air from each engine stack after
the engine. Table A provides data derived from the Air Dispersion Modelling Study that ensures the
OAAQS are achieved
Table A: Emissions Concentrations meeting OAAQS using Natural Gas with Reciprocating Engines:
30% MCR 50% MCR 100% MCR

Nitrogen dioxide

mg/Nm
3
150 150 150
Unburned hydrocarbons (NMNEHC as
C3H8)
1

mg/Nm
3
715 365 220
Particulates (PM10) mg/Nm
3
50 50 50
1
For Natural Gas the concentration of propane may be assumed at max 3.03 mol %, butane & higher hydrocarbons at
max 0.11 mol% and silicon and aromatic hydrocarbons absent.
Note: all emissions concentrations are expressed as Nm
3
@15% O2, dry, 0 deg C, 1 atm
The Bidder shall provide manufacturers information on all emissions details at given site reference conditions
and fuel specification from the stacks so that the Owner may complete any further air dispersion modelling
required. Such information may include typical VOC (NMNEHC)/NMHC emission concentrations and mass
flow rates such that the Owner may confirm that the stack height is adequate.

3.8.3. Other emissions to air
All other emissions to air shall be minimised if it is not possible to contain them completely.
The following minor air emissions are permissible:
Natural Gas combustion products from gas heating units;
Combustion products from the emergency/black start diesel generator
The use of ozone depleting substances shall only be permitted with the agreement of the Owner, again
subject to any required regulatory approval.
The emission of greenhouse gases shall be minimised.
No offensive odours shall be emitted from the Works.
A Project Surrounding Air Quality Monitoring Station shall be provided in order to monitor the components of
carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, Nitrogen dioxides (Nitrogen dioxide and Nitrogen dioxide), hydrocarbons
(methane and non-methane hydrocarbons) and suspended particles (PM 10 & PM 2.5) in addition to weather
forecasting elements (i.e. wind speed, wind direction, air temperature and humidity ratio); The information
obtained including the results of such monitoring shall be submitted monthly to the Ministry.
Selective catalytic reduction (SCR) (Option)
The Contractor shall review the project requirement to comply with the Oman regulatory requirements and
IFC guidance limits for emissions of pollutants to air, as outlined in section 3.8.2 of this specification, and if
appropriate provide a selective catalytic reduction (SCR) system to reduce NOx emissions below the
applicable limits. The Contractor shall also take into consideration the range of main and pilot fuel
compositions, engine loads, and operating conditions when considering the requirement for such SCR
equipment. The Bidder shall supply an optional price for the provision of the SCR system.
The SCR equipment shall include the complete operating system, including the covered storage for dry
materials, all materials handling requirements, mixing tanks (if required), forwarding and dosing pumps,
reagent bulk tank, catalyst, controls, instrumentation, air compressor plant (if required), interconnecting
pipework and safety related equipment.

The contractor shall include for a 90 days supply of all reagents in his offer, based on the continuous
operation of all reciprocating engines station at full load.
3.8.4. Emissions of dust
The EPC Contractor shall control and monitor the emissions of dust during construction activities.
The EPC Contractor shall provide a plan detailing the measures it intends to implement in order to achieve
zero visible dust emissions from the Site. The Work shall be undertaken in such a way as to prevent the
release of dust from the Site and shall be monitored using an agreed localised dust monitoring program, and
the dust concentrations shall be compared with OAAQS.
The area of disturbance shall be minimised. Mobile water carts shall be used to dampen any areas of
exposed soil.
3.8.5. Emissions to water
The Works shall be designed such that they comply with the recommendations of the EIA and IFC 2008
Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants.
Reject water shall be free of oils and solids and drainage systems shall be designed such that no flooding of
the Project or adjacent facilities will result from Construction or operation of the Project.
Oily wastes shall be led to a treatment system prior to discharge. Contaminated, or potentially contaminated,
waste streams shall be collected and treated prior to discharge. Contaminated waste water shall be treated
so that the effluent emissions do not exceed the limits specified by the IFC 2008 Environmental Health and
Safety Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants, as listed: are met
Parameter Maximum concentration mg/L
pH 6-9
Total Suspended Solids 50
Oil and grease 10
Total residual chlorine 0.2
Chromium (Total) 0.5
Copper 0.5
Iron 1.0
Zinc 1.0
Lead 0.5
Cadmium 0.1
Mercury 0.005
Arsenic 0.5
Temperature increase Not more than 1C within 300 meters
of the discharge(as per MECA
requirement 159/2005)
The EPC Contractor shall provide a suitable testing kit which will allow the Owner to regularly take samples
and test the quality of all discharges. Facilities shall be provided where necessary to prevent the discharge of
liquid effluents not meeting the requirements of this specification.

3.8.6. Hazardous and industrial waste
The entire Plant must be designed, operated and maintained in such a way to prevent any soil
contamination. Hazardous or industrial waste shall be stored and disposed of in a manner to minimize its
impact on the environment including appropriate segregation for storage and separate disposal by a waste
transporter agreed by the Owner.
Hazardous or industrial waste shall not be buried on site.
A comprehensive plan shall be prepared and submitted to Hazardous and Non-Hazardous Waste
Department of Different Types (i.e. liquid and solid wastes) of the Ministry, including full details about
procedures taken in order to decrease, recycle and treat such wastes, compliance with the correct
environmental management with regard to the storage and handling of raw material, The plan shall include
non-storage of raw material and wastes in open places or on grounds that are not lined with leakage-
prevention materials. Environmental license applications related to the same shall be submitted to the
component departments of the Ministry.
3.9. Noise
3.9.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall design the Works such that the specified noise criteria are met under all operating
conditions including start-up, shutdown, and normal operation and unit trips.
The sound levels shall be measured according to ISO standards and warning notices shall be provided at all
entrances to rooms or areas where the noise level may exceed 75 dB (A). The wording of these notices
shall be subject to the agreement of the Owner.
All single frequencies generated may be significant and require abatement. Noise shall be free of tones,
special audible characteristics or impulsiveness. Subjective assessment of such characteristics shall be
supported by objective evidence (e.g. frequency analyses), where appropriate. When any noise has such
special audible characteristics a minimum 5 dB penalty shall be applied.
To meet the noise level requirements, the Plant is required to be equipped with standard noise attenuation
features. All machinery which exceeds the permissible noise limits shall be equipped with silencers or with
lagging or specially designed acoustic enclosures.
3.9.2. Noise impact
The limits of noise emitted from the Plant shall not exceed the relevant limits of the Oman regulation MD
79/94; Regulations for the control of noise pollution control in public environment:
Article 2(b): industrial plants and public works - power plants:
type of district
Leq, T, dB(A)
Over time period
A B C
Rural residential recreational 60 55 50
Suburban residential 65 60 55
Urban residential 65 60 55
Urban residential with some workshops or business; city hub 65 60 55

type of district Leq, T, dB(A)
Industrial and commercial 70 65 60
The applicable time periods are defined in the regulations as;
A - workdays - daytime; after seven a.m. up to six p.m. LMT
B - evenings - evenings; after six p.m. up to eleven p.m. LMT
C - holidays and nights; after eleven p.m. up to seven a.m. LMT
For noise of tonal or impulse character, an adjustment shall be made to the measured or calculated value of
the equivalent continuous A -Weighted sound pressure level of the noise.
This shall be as follows:
For tonal noise, the adjustment shall be 5 dB (A).
For impulse noise, the adjustment shall be 5dB (A).
For the noise of combined tonal and impulse character the adjustment shall be 7 dB (A).
3.9.3. Noise in working environments
The noise levels in the following rooms shall not exceed:
Offices, cafeteria, rest rooms, and any other area of common personnel use - 60 dB(A);
Control room - 55dB(A);
Workshops, maintenance garages, and inside all other buildings with extended occupancy by operation
and maintenance staff - 55 dB(A).
3.9.4. Noise design and reporting
The EPC Contractor shall submit to the Owner interim noise design reports within three months of Notice to
Proceed (NTP) demonstrating compliance with the MECA requirements and as to how the specified noise
limits shall be met. Reporting shall include equipment noise levels, details of noise control measures and
preliminary calculations for environmental and on-site noise. The use of engineering controls to reduce
workplace noise shall be used as the primary control mechanism wherever it reasonably possible to do so.
A final noise design report shall be submitted to the Owner within 6 months of Notice to Proceed. This report
shall include but not be limited to the following:
All equipment suppliers noise guarantees and supporting data.
Details of all noise control measures.
Calculations of in-plant and environmental noise level to demonstrate compliance with the specified
limits.
Provision shall be made in the Plant facilities for monitoring and control over the noise resulting from the
operation of the different units and facilities of the Plant subject to regulations regulating Noise Pollution
issued as per Ministerial Decrees Nos. (79 and 80 / 94) on the Control of Noise Pollution Existing in the
Public and Workplace Environments.

3.10. Risk assessment
The EPC Contractor shall note that a Location Risk Assessment (LRA) has been undertaken for the Site and
this assessment has identified potential risks arising from the proximity of this site to the nearby Musandam
Gas Plant and most specifically the risks associated with releases of potentially flammable or toxic gases.
The EPC Contractor must be able to demonstrate compliance with all safety requirements to address
possible hazards. The potential safety hazards may include, but not necessarily be limited to, release of
explosive gases, release of toxic gases and proximity risk in case of explosion from MGP. The EPC
Contractor shall demonstrate that its designs take due account of these and any other identified Site specific
hazards and shall include risk assessments and provisions for avoidance of unnecessary evacuation of
essential facilities such as control rooms following an unplanned event on the neighbouring site.
The design shall ensure safety of personnel and plant is paramount and shall include appropriate gas
detection and protection facilities. To the maximum extent practical, and without comprising safety, the plant
shall be designed also to avoid unnecessary and spurious shutdowns.
3.11. HAZOP studies
The EPC Contractor shall run HAZOP studies once the preliminary designs (including P&IDs, PFDs and
SLDs) for all systems are complete.
These studies shall examine the design of the Works and determine whether the design during operation,
including abnormal modes of Works operation, complies with this Specification and GIP in terms of hazards
and operability.
Drawings and documents for HAZOPs shall be issued no later than six weeks prior to the date of the
HAZOP.
The scope of the studies shall include the configuration of the control system and the provision of adequate
safeguards to permit safe operation.
The EPC Contractor shall give due consideration also to MGP requirements during the construction and
operation of the Plant. The design of the seawater intake/outfall, if required by Owner, must take into
consideration potential marine movements, the off-shore gas export pipeline from MGP as well as any
impact on the seawater intake of the MGP facility.
The layout of plant and equipment within the Site boundary will be an important factor in ensuring
compliance with safety hazard management. The EPC Contractor must satisfy itself that adequate
information is gathered to address any potential land and marine exclusion zone requirements.
3.11.1. Main power train and proprietary auxiliaries
For the engine generators and their immediate proprietary auxiliaries, the EPC Contractor may satisfy this
requirement by providing details of the process followed to demonstrate that this has been done in the past
and that the design incorporates the outcomes of that process.
The Owner need not have been involved in this process.
3.11.2. Remaining Plant
For the remaining plant, the scope of the studies shall include the Works and its integration with off-site
services.

The Owner may participate in these remaining plant HAZOP studies and the designs shall be modified at
the EPC Contractors cost to incorporate the recommendations of the studies.
The EPC Contractor shall track and report on progress associated with resolving actions raised during the
HAZOP studies and present the Owner with a complete dossier showing the original minutes and the actions
taken to resolve issues raised.
3.12. Table of key dates
The key dates for the submission of plans, drawings, O&M manuals, general information, training etc are set
out in Schedule B.
3.13. Concurrent work
The EPC Contractor shall acknowledge that in parallel with the Works, the Owner has, or shall have,
engaged third parties to perform other work, including, for example, work associated with the switchyard
(RAECo) and gas processing facility (MGP).
The EPC Contractor shall allow the Owner such access to the Site as may be necessary to perform all such
other work and shall agree a coordination and construction protocol with the Owner, RAECo, MGP and other
owner-engaged third parties for the performance of such Works
.

4. General Specification
4.1. General requirements
All equipment supplied shall meet the Specification and shall conform to current prudent industry power plant
practice. Notwithstanding any requirement specified herein with regard to material, design or other matters, it
shall be the EPC Contractors responsibility to supply equipment which shall be fit for the purpose and
entirely satisfactory for all operating conditions.
The design and materials of major Plant items must be proven by evidence of the 3 years operational
experience of 2 units in base load generating service in comparable ambient/climatic conditions, seawater
temperature and salinity:
The Works shall be capable of withstanding without damage, undue heat, strain, vibration, noise, corrosion
or other operating difficulties, all stresses which may be experienced during normal operation, cyclic load
operation, part loading, overspeed, sudden load swings and under all specified test conditions.
All materials, plant and other supplies to be incorporated in the works shall be new and of a standard proven
design. The EPC Contractor shall not propose nor provide equipment from any manufacturer, which the
manufacturer proposes, for the duration of this Contract, to be superseded or outdated by a later generation
of equipment. The EPC Contractor shall provide equipment which is proven and in regular commercial use
and service in installations of scope and magnitude similar to this contract and for which local support and/or
services in the Middle East are currently available. The Power Unit Block and all other components of the
Plant, including (but not limited to) the step-up transformers, shall be selected and sized such that, in the
case of failure (trip) of any Power Unit or component of the Plant or a step-up transformer, there is no loss of
net output of the Plant while continuing to supply the RAEC System within the RAEC Code limits without
resorting to any load shedding of the RAEC system. The design needs to take into account the step-load
limits of the Power Units when operating with adequate spinning reserve.
Bypasses shall be installed so that instrumentation, equipment and critical control valves can be repaired on-
line.
All equipment and systems shall have sufficient margin to cater for equipment and system wear and tear and
deterioration. The EPC Contractor shall identify and justify all margins during engineering submission
including margins for sizing/design of cooling water pumps, heat exchangers, HVAC systems, fire protection
systems, transformer ratings, safety features, isolated phase bus rating, generator breaker rating, battery
and UPS systems and the emergency/black start diesel generator.
All electrical and control and instrumentation (C&I) equipment (e.g. the 400V power centre, motor control
centre, UPS and DC systems, DCS, wiring cabinets, balance of plant MCCs and PLCs etc) shall be housed
in air-conditioned rooms or cubicles.
The Works shall be designed so that, in the event of a trip, it and its associated systems shall shutdown in a
safe manner without damage to equipment. All equipment shall be designed to permit safe shutdown on loss
of electrical power supply or on loss of control system.
The detailed design of all buildings shall include consideration of energy efficiency. The architectural
treatment shall be consistent with the overall site landscape plan.

4.2. Hardware and software
All hardware, software and firmware supplied including any embedded systems shall be insensitive to any
date change such that no value for current date shall cause any interruption in operation. The EPC
Contractor shall certify that the complete Works are compliant. The EPC Contractor shall provide any
standard software, firmware, and operating system developed for and applicable to the control and
monitoring systems being provided by the EPC Contractor on this project. Such software shall be provided
without any reservations as to its use by the Owner, except, if applicable that it be used in systems provided
for this project. The EPC Contractor shall provide two sets of software backup, as applicable, in the form of
CDs, ROM modules or other means of replacing or repairing damaged software. The software shall be
completely documented by the EPC Contractor.
The EPC Contractor shall develop and provide any custom software needed to adapt or customise the
control and monitoring systems being provided by the EPC Contractor to perform the various tasks and
provide the various functions required by this Specification. It is the intent of this Specification that such
software development utilises routines developed by the systems manufacturers to serve as a framework for
such custom software development. Customised software shall be menu driven with multi-window
capabilities to the maximum extent possible, and shall utilise other guidance routines to permit personnel not
trained as programmers to conveniently alter or supplement the contents of the various routines. The
reservations as to the use of custom software, and the backup and documentation for such software shall be
described for standard software.
4.3. Access and maintenance
The Works shall be designed with provision for good maintenance access and for ease of operation and
maintenance. All routine operation and maintenance activities shall be achievable from permanent work
platforms with suitable access and safety devices (such as handrails, thermal insulation from hot parts, etc).
Where it is safe to do so, it shall be possible to complete maintenance of redundant plant items, or items not
essential for maintaining continuous operation of the Plant, (e.g. pumps, thermocouples, sensors) without
reducing output from full load. All such maintenance activities must be planned by the EPC Contractor to be
in accordance with safety requirements and applicable laws and standards, and described in the
maintenance manuals.
Access ways, walkways etc shall be free from cable ways, conduits, pipework etc which could cause tripping
hazards or impede the normal progress of operations and maintenance staff around the Works.
The EPC Contractor shall provide also a computerised maintenance management system for use by the
plant operators and information shall be provided with the proposal on how the O&M of the Plant is to be
supported by computerised business management tools for operation, maintenance (predictive, preventive
and corrective maintenance) and plant history and inventory management.
4.4. Lubrication
Any components requiring manual lubrication shall be provided with easily accessible greasing nipples such
that lubrication can be achieved without the disassembly of any covers, guards or any other equipment.
A remotely mounted electrically operated lubricator of agreed type shall be provided to serve components, if
any, requiring continuous lubrication by external mechanical means.

4.5. Corrosion protection
All materials shall be selected to minimise the potential for corrosion under their service conditions.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact or close proximity and corrosion may occur through electrolytic action
or differences in electric potential, protection shall be afforded by electroplating, suitable gaskets, cathodic
protection or other means.
All surfaces shall be adequately protected in transit and any damage shall be renovated immediately on off-
loading and on completion of erection.
Materials subject to corrosion, including all exterior equipment surfaces and structural steelwork, shall be
protected with coatings systems which are suitable for exposure to a marine coastal environment. Corrosion
protection for steelwork shall generally be in accordance with ISO 12944 standard, with atmospheric
corrosivity classed as high and a medium design durability of 5-15 years as indicated in ISO 12944-5.
4.6. Insulation
Thermal insulation shall be applied to all pipes having a surface temperature exceeding 60C, which are
accessible to plant personnel and within 2 metres of any floor or access way.
The surfaces shall be insulated with an agreed material covered by stainless steel cladding or provided with
stand-off protection so that the temperature of the outside of the cladding or protection does not exceed
60C when the ambient temperature is 28C and, assum ing a wind speed of no more than 0.25 m/s and, the
surface in question is not in direct sunlight.
Where regular inspection of the equipment is required, the insulation and/or protection shall be readily
removable. Where access across pipework or insulation is required, the insulation shall be protected by
checker-plating or other suitable protection.
All thermal insulation shall meet the requirements of one or more of the following Standards or its
international equivalent if agreed by the Owner:
BS 3708 - Thermal Insulating Materials between 230C - 650C;
BS 3958 - Thermal Insulating Materials
Part 2 - Calcium Silicate Preformed Insulation
Part 3 - Metal Mesh Faced Mineral Wool Mats and Mattresses
Part 4 - Bonded Preformed mineral Wool Pipe Sections
Part 5 - Bonded Mineral Wool Slabs (for use above 50C);
BS 5422 - Thermal Insulation in the Range 95C - 230 C
No asbestos - containing insulation shall be used.
Cladding shall be not less than 0.7mm (22 SWG) in thickness and shall be adequately supported to prevent
sagging or excessive deflection. In the case of exterior surfaces, it shall be designed to resist wind loadings.
Due allowance shall be made in the design and fixing of the cladding for thermal expansion of the lagged
surface. Where necessary, expansion joints shall be provided in insulating materials. All joints in cladding
shall be waterproof.

Insulation of large flat or curved surfaces shall be by means of blankets or preformed slabs retained by pins
and wired into position as necessary. The insulation for piping systems shall be of the moulded pre-formed
type.
Pipework insulation shall be terminated at a distance equal to the length of the flange bolts from the flange in
the case of flanged joints or at point which permits preparation of the pipe end for welding without disturbing
the insulation in the case of welded-in valves. The joint or valve shall be insulated independently of the pipe
by preformed blocks or blanket type material of thickness at least equal to that of the adjacent pipe
insulation. Valves shall be insulated up to and including the bonnet but not the bonnet joints.
Insulation and lagging over all flanges and valves shall be easily removable and replaceable without
disturbing the surrounding insulation. The separate portion of the lagging shall extend sufficiently far along
the pipe to allow the joint bolts and nuts to be withdrawn without disturbing the lagging on the pipe. The
casing over flanges shall have a drain hole to indicate the presence of a leak.
Insulation shall be continuous through floors, walls, pipe supports, anchors, guides and hangers. The
insulation shall be sealed at all interruptions due to hangers etc. and the cladding shall be flashed and
sealed to make it weather tight.
Insulation shall be installed only after the completion of any hydrostatic or NDT testing or examination of the
pipework system or equipment has been completed.
4.7. Chemicals
Chemical storage areas and facilities shall be sized to store up to three months supply of chemicals
assuming the Works operates at full load.
All such storage facilities shall comply with statutory requirements and relevant Codes and Standards.
Eyewashes and emergency showers using potable water shall be provided wherever chemicals are to be
handled.
The flooring in areas where chemicals are in use, handled or stored shall be suitably prepared/coated to
protection them in the event of a spill. Where any supporting slab or platform may be subject to
contamination by any corrosive agent or wetness due to liquid spillage, the EPC Contractor shall provide
appropriate surface protection by means of chemical resisting coating/tiles or anti-slip coating/tiles, to be
agreed by the Owner.
Road tanker unloading areas shall be lowered relative to the surrounding areas and shall be designed to
contain spills and direct drainage from these areas to the reject water system.
4.8. Buildings
The dual fuel engines, generators and associated auxiliary equipment shall be located indoors and shall
include an overhead crane system. The arrangement of the major equipment within the building shall allow
access for the overhead crane for maintenance. The major outdoor equipment and facilities shall include the
inlet filter house, radiators, exhaust stack and bulk liquid storage area(s).
4.9. Signage
Wall mounted signs shall be provided at all floors, platforms, etc. to indicate reduced headroom clearance,
hazardous areas, hearing protection zones, warning signs and others as required by the design review,
HAZOP, and applicable codes and standards.

4.10. Degree of automation
The plant shall be automated as far as possible and require minimum operator intervention for normal
operation. Local control facilities shall be provided for each gas engine and associated auxiliary equipment
at their local control panels. The controls provided at the panels shall allow starting, stopping and
emergency tripping of the dual fuel engines and auxiliaries.
All motors, valves etc. which must be operated during start-up, shutdown, normal, emergency or special
operations of the plant and auxiliaries shall be automatically operable from the central control room.
Notwithstanding this, it shall also be possible for the operator to interrupt the automatic, programmed
sequences and control the plant manually.
The degree of automation provided shall ensure the plant can be safely and reliably started, shut down,
controlled and monitored from a remote control room location.
4.11. Lay-down areas
The engine building design shall provide the necessary access and lay-down area to operate and maintain
the Works. A truck access aisle into the area shall provide free passage of a trailer loaded with the largest
component or sub-assembly to be handled.
The lay-down areas shall be large enough to accommodate the full disassembly of the complete power train
at one time. Space shall also be provided for free access to components by maintenance personnel, in
order to perform required service operations and accommodate use of appropriate tools.
The lay-down areas shall be arranged and located to permit X and Y horizontal movement, in addition to
vertical access by the overhead crane hooks. The need to pass major components over operating units
shall be minimised.
4.12. Design and standardisation
The EPC Contractor and subcontractors shall make every effort to standardise mechanical and electrical
equipment as well as instrumentation.
Consumable items such as indicating lamps, recorder charts, printer papers, ink cartridges and ribbons etc.
shall be standardised so as to reduce to a minimum the types and sizes to be held in stock.
The Works shall be designed to permit interchange ability of parts and ease of access during inspection,
maintenance and repair.
A KKS (Kraftwerk Kennzeichnungs System) or agreed equivalent Plant Identification System comprising of
alphanumerical characters shall be used to identify all equipment and components of the Works. The Plant
Identification System shall be integrated into the DCS, main plant and all auxiliaries.
The EPC Contractor shall provide detailed training sessions and full documentation for the supplied Plant
Identification System prior to commissioning work. The EPC Contractor shall supply soft and hard copies of
the KKS (or equivalent) component list for the plant and for all components on which maintenance must be
carried out. The list shall include: KKS, Plant Item, Reference Drawings, O&M Manual Reference and
Spares Reference.
The EPC Contractor shall provide details of the proposed Plant Identification System in its tender.

4.13. Prohibited materials
The Works shall not incorporate:
Asbestos or asbestos-containing materials;
naturally occurring aggregates for use in reinforced concrete and/or naturally occurring aggregates for
use in concrete which do not comply with the appropriate Standards;
cast iron piping materials for any oil service;
PCBs;
Askerals;
CFCs or other ozone depleting substances except (with Owners consent in writing) in applications
where their use cannot reasonably be avoided, and is generally accepted for the specific application;
carcinogenic materials; and
any other materials generally known in the construction industry at the time of use to be deleterious to
health or the environment if used or incorporated in such Works.
4.14. Classification of hazardous areas
The Plant is located adjacent to hazardous installation, MGP. The Owner is required to demonstrate via a
Quantitative Risk Analysis (QRA) that the proposed plant does not present unacceptable risks to the public
or to the operation of adjacent facilities. The QRA is also to address the risks from adjacent facilities to the
Plant and demonstrate that the risks to both the workforce and operation and reliability of the Plant are
acceptable. The EPC Contractor shall prepare his own QRA in consideration of these requirements and
support the Owner by providing mitigation measures in the Plant design in accordance with the 'as low as
reasonably practical' (ALARP) principle.
The EPC Contractor shall carry out a thorough, comprehensive plant-wide assessment of all areas which
could be deemed hazardous in accordance with IEC 60079 and shall complete the Works to meet all the
requirements of the Codes and Standards.
The assessment shall consider the fuel supply systems, power house building and any other area where an
explosion risk may occur.
The EPC Contractor shall take all practical steps to eliminate, by design, all potential leak points and all gas
traps and this shall be supplemented by adequate and appropriate ventilation. The EPC Contractor will be
required also to demonstrate adequate segregation of electrical equipment from hazardous areas and that
no hazardous area extends beyond the Plant boundary fencing
The EPC Contractor shall assess and define the areas of the installation where dangerous concentrations of
flammable gas or vapour are likely to occur, and shall incorporate all necessary controls to prevent the risk of
explosions, in accordance with IEC 60079.
The EPC Contractor shall submit the relevant information to show that the ventilation system design and gas
detection system meets the requirements of the applicable standard.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that potential sources of ignition within the above areas are eliminated or
suitably protected to the relevant International Standard. Notwithstanding any of the above, the EPC
Contractor shall be ultimately responsible for ensuring the zoning classifications as defined by the
requirements of IEC 60079 are met and that the final installation complies with all personal safety and plant
protection requirements.

The EPC Contractor shall prepare a dossier providing complete installation, operations and maintenance
information for all equipment installed in hazardous areas and any circuitry designed to provide protection to
that equipment. The dossier shall incorporate a test and maintenance plan to ensure the integrity of the
installed protective systems can be monitored, recorded and maintained over the life of the plant. It shall
also include details of the certification of all equipment supplied.
4.15. Hazardous substances and dangerous goods
The EPC Contractor shall minimise wherever possible the use of:
Hazardous substances; and
Dangerous goods
The Works shall incorporate all safety precautions such that the transport, storage, care and use of these
hazardous substances or dangerous goods shall comply with any relevant Acts and Regulations.
4.16. Drawings and documentation
All legends and notes on drawings provided by the EPC Contractor shall be in the English language. All
drawings shall be dimensioned in millimetres (or metres) and drawn to one of the preferred scales quoted in
ISO 5457 and on paper of the appropriate size from the International series of A sizes.
A list of the drawings and documents to be submitted by the EPC Contractor is included in the Schedules.
The EPC Contractor shall submit any additional drawings and/or documentation necessary to meet the
requirements of the Specification. Also, the EPC Contractor shall provide a copy of any documentation
submitted to third parties to satisfy any regulatory or legal requirements.
Drawings showing the physical location of all devices and a plot plan showing the location of all equipment
shall be provided. Plans shall be oriented so that North is at the top of the page.
All drawings and lists, schedules etc., generated in conjunction with the plant, e.g. instrument lists, circuit
lists, alarm lists, valve schedules etc., shall be provided in electronic as well as hard copy format.
Drawings shall not be typical but shall actually represent the equipment provided. All drawings shall be
corrected to as built. Proprietary drawings may be generated in PDF if they are not available in AutoCAD.
The scope of potential drawings not in AutoCAD shall be limited to general arrangements, proprietary
drawings and some standard drawings from sub-suppliers and shall be subject to the acceptance of the
Owner.
Notwithstanding this, all submittals shall include a PDF copy of each drawing, report or document.
A logic diagram and a detailed list of all switches, contacts, and relays used in a normal start-up shall be
provided. The logic diagram shall show the sequence of operation and typical allowance windows in which a
device should operate.
Before Plant Provisional Acceptance, the EPC Contractor shall provide a complete set of hand marked as-
built drawings including all P&IDs, wiring diagrams, lists of set points and calibration data.
On Plant Provisional Acceptance the EPC Contractor shall furnish to the Owner for record purposes, two
sets of as-built drawings and documentation on CD Rom (one set in AutoCAD release 14 or higher format
and one set as PDF) and five sets of as-built drawings and documentation in hard copy format. A minimum

of five copies of O & M manuals shall be provided extent of Arabic language translation to be agreed
between the Owner and EPC Contractor.
4.17. Labelling
Each item of plant including, field devices and drives shall be durably and legibly labelled, indicating the
purpose, plant identification number and where necessary any operating position functions. Each shall have
its unique plant identification system number. Equipment descriptions shall be agreed with the Owner. All
labels shall be in English but safety related labels and notices shall be in English and Arabic.
The description and number of each item of plant shall be consistently applied throughout all drawings,
manuals, documents and labels.
The labels shall facilitate effective operation and maintenance of equipment.
Labels shall be conspicuous without being obtrusive and should be capable of being read by the user when
viewed from a normal working position.
All labels shall be firmly fixed by means of suitable attachments to non-detachable parts of equipment,
wherever possible, by using not less than two fastenings. Label fixings shall be such as to allow ready
replacement without damage to the label or the fixing.
All interconnecting pipes including those in trenches and all pipes carrying potentially hazardous substances
shall be colour coded and have pipe markings on the outer surfaces, in accordance with an internationally
recognised standard.
Where pipe work and/or cables are installed underground the EPC Contractor shall supply and install
reinforced concrete marker posts at each change of direction point and at intervals of no greater than 30m
along the route. These marker posts shall indicate the directions and functions of the services involved.
Labels shall be provided on front and rear access doors of all cubicles. Labels shall also be provided inside
cubicles to assist the identification of apparatus and terminals.
Labels in outdoor areas shall be metallic and corrosion resistant.
4.18. Operations and maintenance manuals
4.18.1. General
Plant manuals shall be in the form of A4 sized books with loose leafed pages to permit the insertion of
additional information or revised pages as necessary. Drawings and diagrams shall, where practicable, be
reduced to no greater than A3 size to be bound into the manual as fold-out sheets. However, in the
reduced size they must be completely legible and suitable for reproduction. Where a drawing cannot be
reduced to a suitable size for the manual, it shall be folded to A4 size and inserted into a pocket which is to
be bound into the rear of the relevant section of the manual.
It is a condition of the Contract that the Owner shall be free to reproduce any part of the manuals without
restriction for the purposes of the business.
4.18.2. Operating and maintenance manuals
The EPC Contractor shall provide complete and detailed instruction manuals covering the description,
operation and maintenance of the plant including all ancillary equipment. Manufacturer's standard brochures

may be appended to the text provided they are specific to the as installed equipment and free of matter
applicable to other equipment or operating circumstances.
Two copies of the manuals in draft form shall be submitted to the Owner for agreement.
The manuals shall have the following format:
i. Index
The index shall provide rapid and easy access to particular subjects, drawings and illustrations. It
should consist of a master index plus a sub-index to each section.
ii. Description
The manual shall provide descriptive information on both the major plant systems and on the
components of those systems. It shall include:
Drawings sufficient for understanding the descriptive information;
Flow sheets or single line block diagrams which explain the function or logic of the system;
Schedules such as valve schedules, materials schedules, operational limits schedules etc.;
Data sheets which provide in a concise format all relevant technical details of a plant system or
an individual item. (The purpose of a data sheet is to provide a quick reference to the essential
details, omitting all general descriptive information.)
iii. Operation
This section shall include basic step by step instructions on how to operate the plant, beginning
with the plant system and then proceeding to the individual items of equipment within that
system. The instructions shall include references to relevant safe operating procedures and
operational limits for that system or item.
Details of appropriate shut-down and plant preservation procedures for extended outage
periods shall also be provided.
iv. Maintenance
This section shall include all information necessary for the safe and effective maintenance of the
plant.
It shall include:
A schedule of routine maintenance requirements including details of limited-life components;
Details of plant checking procedures, including the allowable tolerances;
Step by step maintenance procedures for the equipment, including details of the spares and
special tools required to carry out the work;
Fault diagnosis guidelines;
Drawings sufficient to illustrate the maintenance procedures;
Schedule of lubricants with details of approved suppliers and trade names;
Schedule of ball and roller bearings
v. Spare Parts
This section shall provide information about the Spare Parts required for the plant including
details of their dimensions, manufacturing standards and materials as well as ordering details
for both OEM and vendor-supplied items. It shall consist of:

The Recommended Spare Parts List and Consumables List together with referenced sectional
drawings from which the descriptive name and part number can be identified for ordering
purposes;
Contact details for Spare Parts and Consumables suppliers including address, e-mail address,
telephone and fax numbers. (In this context, spare parts suppliers are to be the original
component or equipment manufacturer. It shall not be acceptable for the EPC Contractor to
nominate himself as the supplier of bought in items unless they are manufactured by a third
party in accordance with the EPC Contractor's own manufacturing drawings.);
A list of spare/replacement parts required for each type of inspection/overhaul nominated in the
Maintenance Section of the manual.
All descriptive information and part numbers given in the manual shall be consistent with the
corresponding information provided in the spare parts recommendations submitted with the
Tender.
4.18.3. Instrumentation and control system documentation
The EPC Contractor shall provide detailed instruction manuals covering all instruments and other hardware
together with copies of all software to enable the Owner to maintain the plant instrumentation and control
systems and in particular to:
Identify faults;
Make adjustments ;
Reconfigure;
Reprogram;
Alter control programming, logic, algorithms or settings;
Retrieve plant historical data from system storage media
The documentation shall include as a minimum, but not be limited to:
A Plant Operating Philosophy; (the EPC Contractor shall submit a copy at the design stage for Owner
review).
Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs);
Control System Architecture Diagrams;
Control System Arrangement Drawings;
Control System Interface Description;
Cubicle Arrangement drawings;
Explanation of Overall Plant nomenclature instrumentation and signal tagging system;
Functional Descriptions for all control systems including:
Logic Block Diagrams;
Logic Flow Diagrams;
SAMA Drawings of Modulating Control Configuration;
Written Text description of control functions, including algorithms
Field Instrument location drawings and tapping point details;
Instrument Arrangement Drawings;
Safety Shutdown Systems Documentation;
Instrumentation and wiring system database;

DCS Software Register;
DCS Hardware Register;
The Recommended Spare Parts List;
Consumables List
4.19. Inventory control management system
The EPC Contractor shall provide an electronic system to facilitate:
Spare part inventory control and ordering
Access to parts catalogues and manuals
Overhaul and maintenance scheduling
Access to OEM service bulletins, notices etc
The EPC Contractor shall provide full training on the use of the system to the Owners personnel.
4.20. Construction program and progress
The EPC Contractor shall prepare a Construction Program using critical path network analysis. The work
shall be broken down into sufficient detail to enable a correct logical sequence of activities to be established.
The issue of drawings shall be covered in detail with appropriate check points to cover design information
interface events.
With the exception of procurement activities, activity durations shall not exceed four working weeks.
Activities shall cover all aspects for which the EPC Contractor and his subcontractors are responsible.
Following the initial submission the Construction Program shall be analysed monthly or at such intervals as
may be determined by the Owner. The Construction Program shall not be altered without the Owners
agreement.
All programmes and progress reports shall be in Microsoft Project format. Hard and electronic copies shall
be supplied; monthly progress reports shall be submitted.
Erection schedules shall be submitted on the Monday morning of every week. The schedules shall indicate
activities actually completed the previous week in relation to those scheduled, activities proposed for the
current week and activities proposed for the following week. The schedules shall differentiate between the
major equipment and auxiliary systems and indicate details of activities e.g. position equipment, grout anchor
bolts, coupling alignment, journal and shaft levels and inspection works etc.
The overall commissioning schedule showing the commencement and completion of commissioning
activities including tests of each systems and plant shall be submitted to the Owner for agreement before
commencement of commissioning activities.
The EPC Contractor shall submit weekly commissioning schedules to the Owner on every Monday morning.
These shall include details of expected fuel use and generation. In addition, daily commissioning schedules
and reports shall be submitted to the Owner. These shall detail all activities carried out the previous day and
all activities programmed for that day and the day after, along with updated fuel use and generation
schedules.

4.21. Places of manufacture and sub-orders
The EPC Contractor shall identify the manufacturers and places of manufacture, testing and inspection
before despatch to Site for the various portions of the Works. There shall be no departures from this list
without the prior written agreement of the Owner.
Selected subcontractors shall not further subcontract any section of the Works without the prior written
agreement of the Owner.
The Owner shall have access to the EPC Contractor's and subcontractor's Works to verify the status of
design and manufacture.
4.22. Quality assurance and quality control
The EPC Contractor, all subcontractors and testing companies shall have Quality Systems that meet the
requirements of the ISO 9001 standard or equivalent.
Within the time specified, the EPC Contractor shall prepare a preliminary version of the Quality Plan
containing or referencing the applicable procedures, design verification plans and inspection and test plans
required for the Work. After incorporation of the Owners comments, the preliminary version of the Quality
Plan shall be updated and compliance with the Quality Plan shall be considered a requirement of the
Contract.
The Quality Plan shall set out, or reference, all quality practices and policies to be applied to the project so
as to comply with the intent of ISO 9001. It shall form the base reference document for all project specific
procedures and policies as required under the Contract. Supporting procedures need not physically form
part of the Quality Plan, but shall be referenced from it.
The Quality Plan shall address all quality issues including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
a) Responsibilities and authorities
b) Document control
c) Design verifications
d) Subcontractor assessment and control
e) Calibration requirements
f) Traceability
g) Non-conformance control
h) Construction method statements
i) Inspection and test plans
j) Internal audits
k) Records
l) References to supporting project manuals (e.g. safety manual, start-up manual)
m) Storage and maintenance of equipment
n) Reference to project specific procedures encompassing but not limited to;
i. Compliance programme for Applicable Permits and Applicable Laws
ii. Public relation programme and procedures
iii. Emergency preparedness & contingency plans
iv. Environmental programmes (e.g. oil interception)

v. Hazardous material handling
vi. Waste disposal
vii. Reporting of accidents, including environmental accidents, and incidents
viii. Safety tagging, lockout and release procedures
ix. Foundation acceptance criteria
x. Tool certification programme
xi. Instrument calibration programme and procedures
Two copies of the final Quality Plan for the Contract shall be submitted to the Owner for review and comment
within the time specified. Prior to the start of any work affected by the procedures, the EPC Contractor shall
revise all or any portion of the documentation not yet agreed to by the Owner as required by the Owner and
shall submit the amended documents for review. In all cases detailed procedures and plans identified shall
be produced before the relevant work commences.
The Owner reserves the right to examine any procedures, records, or results of audits referred to in the
Quality Plan and to audit the EPC Contractor and/or subcontractors against the requirements of the Quality
Plan at any time.
The Quality Plan shall include the measures to be taken for storage and maintenance for the Works and
EPC Contractor's equipment prior to installation, as well as for the period between the completion of the
installation and Handover.
The EPC Contractor shall provide within the Quality Plan a Site Quality Control program including
requirements for Site Quality Control surveillance.
In addition the EPC Contractor shall provide to the Owner such assistance as may be required by the Owner in
developing a Quality System to allow the Owner to acquire ISO 14001 Certificate as related to the environmental
management of the Plant facilities. The EPC Contractor shall also provide assistance to the Owner in
cooperation with environmental consulting companies registered in the Ministry for the purposes of compliance
with environmental audits being undertaken by certified auditors related to environmental management
pursuant to ISO 14001 certification

4.23. Inspection and test plan
Within the time specified in the Table of Key Dates in Schedule B, the EPC Contractor shall submit to the
Owner a plan (an Inspection and Test Plan) which shall include pertinent manufacture and inspection
operations including test and inspection procedures. The scope of the Inspection and Test Plan shall
generally follow the sample plans described below. The Owner shall select from these the nominated
mandatory hold points for surveillance. Notwithstanding this, the Owner shall have access at all times to all
places where materials or equipment are being prepared or manufactured for the Works, including the works
of the EPC Contractor, subcontractors or suppliers of raw materials.
The Inspection and Test Plan shall include specific criteria for acceptance or rejection, including criteria for
any non-destructive testing inspections.
The Inspection and Test Plan may be of any form to suit the EPC Contractor's system, but it shall as a
minimum:

Indicate each inspection and test point and its relative location in the production cycle including
incoming, packing and site inspections;
Indicate where subcontractors' services shall be employed (e.g. subcontractor NDT or heat treatment);
Identify the characteristics to be inspected, examined, and tested at each point and specify procedures
and acceptance criteria to be used;
Indicate mandatory hold points established by the Owner which require his verification of selected
characteristics of an item or process before this work can proceed;
Define or refer to sampling plans if proposed and where they shall be used;
Where applicable, specify where lots or batches shall be used.
The EPC Contractor shall provide to the Owner at least 10 working days notice in advance of reaching a
nominated witness or hold point. Work shall not proceed beyond a hold point without the written agreement
of the Owner.
Works inspections by the Owner may include the following activities:
Monitoring to confirm the effectiveness of and the EPC Contractor's compliance with the established
system procedures, quality plan and inspection of test instructions;
Witnessing of inspections and tests and/or verification of inspection records to be carried out at the
Owner's discretion covering:
Compliance of raw material with specified requirements.
Compliance of manufactured parts, assemblies and final items with the Specification, drawings,
standards and good engineering practice.
Inspection of EPC Contractor's design, manufacturing, installation work and the production of
progress reports.
Witnessing of inspections and tests.
Packing for shipment including check for completeness of shipment, handling requirements, and
case markings and identification.
The Owner shall endeavour to schedule the performance of inspection and tests so as to avoid undue risk of
delaying the work. In the event of postponement, by the EPC Contractor, of tests previously scheduled or of
the necessity to make tests due to unsatisfactory results of the original tests, or other reasons attributable to
the EPC Contractor, the EPC Contractor shall bear all costs for new tests and the costs incurred by the
Owner in re-inspecting the nonconforming item or its replacement.
Acceptance or rejection of the equipment and/or components shall be made as promptly as practicable
following any inspection or test involvement by the Owner. However, failure to inspect and accept or reject
equipment and/or components shall neither relieve the EPC Contractor from responsibility for such items
which may not be in accordance with the specified requirements, nor impose liability for them on the Owner.
Three hard copies and an electronic copy of all appropriate quality records, as specified in this Specification
and/or as required by applicable codes and standards, shall be submitted to the Owner for review and
acceptability prior to, or concurrent with, shipment or as otherwise agreed to by special arrangement with the
Owner.
The EPC Contractor shall implement a system to be accepted by the Owner which ensures traceability of
all critical parts and components of the supplied plant and equipment and the associated quality records.

4.24. Training
The Owners plant operators and engineers are unfamiliar with dual fuel engine plants and a comprehensive
training program shall therefore be provided by the EPC Contractor.
The EPC Contractor shall provide all operations and maintenance training necessary to instruct the Owners
staff on the safe, reliable, and efficient operation of the Works.
All operators training for major plant systems (dual fuel engines, generators, MV systems) shall be complete
to support commissioning. The EPC Contractor shall certify that the trainees have accomplished the goals
of the training programme.
Training shall address at least the following topics:
Gas engine package;
Generator;
Transformer;
Cooling system;
Control system;
Fuel supply systems;
Hazardous areas;
High voltage systems;
Water treatment systems;
All auxiliary systems;
Electrical system and utility interface;
Interfaces;
Routine operational checks;
Preventive maintenance;
Major Plant Outages;
Environmental Protection;
Power Plant Safety;
Plant Control System;
Metering power, fuel, water etc;
Spares control/inventory;
Safety;
Management
Reverse Osmosis Desalination
Natural Gas Facilities connection system
The training course shall include detailed instruction on maintenance and system administration of the plant
control system. Training for all major mechanical, electrical and control equipment shall be performed by
representatives of the OEM.

Training shall include classroom and hands-on sessions. The classroom phase shall consist of at least two
consecutive weeks of instruction in the project design, capabilities, component operation and procedures,
and shall include a program for certifying operating personnel training.
The EPC Contractor shall complete the start-up/testing/operational portion of the training program so the
daily operation and control of the Plant can be assumed by the Owners operators in good time to support
the testing and commissioning program. Each trainee shall receive a full set of all training materials prepared
by the EPC Contractor.
The EPC Contractor shall provide informal, hands on operations and maintenance training during the
classroom training and the construction and commissioning phase. In addition, a minimum of one days
hands-on training shall be provided for each system as it is being commissioned.
Where plant or equipment is supplied by a sub-contractor, then training on that equipment shall be provided
by the sub-contractors staff.
Operators, maintenance personnel, instrument technicians and supervisors shall attend the training program.
Trainees will have relevant background knowledge in power generation processes.
All training shall be conducted in English and by instructors fluent in the English language who are
experienced instructors on equipment identical to the systems supplied, using materials (including video
presentation) prepared by the EPC Contractor that specifically have been prepared for the Works.
The EPC Contractor shall allow for each trainee to receive a full set of all material used in the classroom as
personal equipment to be used by the trainee. Five additional sets shall be provided. All manuals and
training materials shall be in English.
The various courses required shall be staggered (or repeated) in order to allow one person to attend all of
them.
Training manuals and supplies shall consist of four-ring binders to which material can be added as course
material is presented. For each lecture or presentation, each trainee shall receive a copy of the applicable
operations procedures, a lesson plan, and copies of any drawings, overhead projections, etc. used in the
training session.
Lesson plans shall describe the objective of the lecture and tell trainees what they are expected to do or be
able to do after applicable technical references and training aids to be used and include a detailed
breakdown of the points of discussion to be addressed in the training presentation. Each presentation on a
plant system shall be accompanied by an in-plant inspection of the applicable system. Lesson plans shall be
prepared for each system inspection that detail the key components to be viewed and the inter-system
relationships to be emphasised during the inspection. Lesson content shall be based on the actual plant and
equipment being supplied.
The Owner shall be allowed to record the classroom training presentations.
Within four weeks of the conclusion of the classroom training, the EPC Contractor shall provide the Owner a
course summary manual that includes the schedule employed in the conduct of the training, copies of the
training materials (lesson plans, drawing, overheads, etc.) used in each session, and copies of the
examinations (with answer keys) used to evaluate student performance during and after the training.

In general, training shall be conducted at a location in Musandam, to be determined by the Owner. Specific
training courses for the dual fuel engine and control systems may be conducted at the OEMs premises. The
EPC Contractor shall provide full details of its training program with the tender.
The EPC Contractor shall arrange for the hiring of suitable training rooms, to the satisfaction of the Owner.
The EPC Contractor shall furnish the training rooms with all equipment necessary to complete the training.
All transport, meal and accommodation costs for the trainees will be paid by the Owner.
4.25. Special tools
The EPC Contractor shall supply a complete set of any special tools and other equipment necessary for the
dismantling, inspection re-erection and adjustment of the plant.
This shall include any special lift jigs, frames and stands necessary to remove and support the major items of
plant.
All interrogation and testing software required to maintain plant and software shall be provided. If these
special tools include application software, the EPC Contractor shall provide an unrestricted license to the
Owner for the use of such software in relation to the Works. These special tools shall include special
interface equipment and/or special interface cabling. Wherever hardware or software keys are necessary to
perform maintenance for electrical and control and instrumentation equipment the EPC Contractor shall
provide the software password and two sets of hardware keys.
Where any of the control system is microprocessor-based, all hardware and software for monitoring, setting,
tuning, testing, trouble-shooting, graphic displays, simulation and modification shall be provided.
The tools provided shall be in new condition, adequately labelled as to their use and contained in stout and
suitable padlocked boxes. Any special slings required shall be provided and clearly marked by embossed
labels to show safe working loads.
Test certificates shall be provided where applicable.

5. Site, Safety and Environmental Protection
5.1. The Site, access and use of Site
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for undertaking all survey work required to determine existing site
levels and features to establish a site bench mark, to set out the works to be constructed and to determine
the as-constructed location of the work.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for surveying all routes to ensure that abnormal loads can be
transported to their required destination. The Owner will accept no responsibility for damage, congestion or
delays which may result due to inadequate route surveys or to the common use of available road
connections and entrances by other vehicles using the Site.
The EPC Contractor shall confine his labour, material plant and equipment to within the designated areas of
the Site to which he has been given possession.
Certain areas of the Site have been designated for given purposes. The EPC Contractor may use these
areas for other purposes only after receiving the agreement of the Owner.
5.2. Site facilities
The EPC Contractor shall provide, in the area(s) allocated by the Owner, any necessary temporary
structures and all sanitary and other accommodation for the personnel employed by the EPC Contractor and
subcontractors. The use of other areas requires special agreement.
The EPC Contractor shall provide portable site offices for his own and subcontractors staff, for the Owner
and operations staff. The Owners site accommodation shall be complete with furnishings which shall include
four desks and chairs, filing cabinets, one photocopier, four telephones, one fax machine, shelving, toilet
facilities, kitchen facilities, air conditioning and lighting. All facilities shall be regularly and systematically
maintained and cleaned throughout the Works to ensure proper and efficient operation. The office shall be
equipped with a sufficient number of fire extinguishers of suitable size and type.
The EPC Contractor shall provide a phone and e-mail system for which it shall be responsible for all
associated charges and costs.
A desktop computer and colour printer shall be provided to a specification which is acceptable to the Owner.
The EPC Contractor shall supply, erect, maintain and remove any and all temporary structures such as the
EPC Contractor's and Owners site offices, storage sheds, workshops, tool sheds and employees' amenities
sheds, change room and sanitary accommodation, etc. The buildings and associated services shall be
maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. All shall be subject to the agreement of the Owner. On
completion of the works the EPC Contractor shall remove from Site all temporary structures including
sanitary arrangements from the Site.
No residential accommodation shall be allowed on the Site or in the vicinity of the Site (unless located in a
commercially run development.)
The EPC Contractor shall provide all drainage and surface preparation required in the area allocated. The
EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the allocated area, road access and other
installed services.

Should the storage facilities or area allocated for Site accommodation and storage be inadequate, then the
EPC Contractor shall make whatever arrangements are necessary to provide additional storage space.
5.3. Security system
The EPC Contractor shall establish and operate a Site security system. All staff employed at Site shall be
issued with security passes by the EPC Contractor to permit access to and from the Site. The EPC
Contractor shall ensure that security rules are complied with.
Access to the Site shall be via a single, controlled security gate which shall be manned at all times once
work has begun on Site. A register shall be maintained to record the names of all personnel on Site at any
given time.
Each of the EPC Contractors or subcontractors employees working on or visiting the Site shall be identified
as being employed by or responsible to the EPC Contractor by displaying suitable identification. The EPC
Contractor, the EPC Contractors subcontractors and their employees shall comply with the requirements of
the Owner as regards entry to and exit from the Site.
No vehicles shall be allowed on Site except those carrying materials or equipment necessary for execution of
the Works. Each vehicle entering or leaving the Site may be subject to inspection of both the vehicle and its
contents. Private vehicles, except for permit holders, may be barred from entering the Site.
Each container, including personal bags, cases and the like being brought onto or taken from the Site may
be subject to inspection.
The EPC Contractor shall supply, erect and maintain temporary fencing, lighting and guarding and all other
materials and services necessary for the safety and security of persons and property at the Site or such
other areas used for storage or accommodations. The temporary fencing shall be removed when the EPC
Contractor removes all other temporary facilities.
5.4. Safety
The complete Works shall be undertaken and be operable and maintainable in full compliance with all
relevant international and local standards, acts, regulations, codes and statutory instructions with respect to
Health and Safety. The EPC Contractor shall also comply with the HSEC procedures of the Owner.
The Laws of Oman shall apply to all aspects of Health and Safety.
Halon, Freon, hydrazine, asbestos and PCBs shall not be used in any part of the Works.
The consumption of intoxicating substances on Site is strictly prohibited.
Safety management is of primary importance. The EPC Contractor shall be deemed to have made itself
aware of all current safety legislation and the Specifications.
The EPC Contractor shall provide qualified first aid cover for minor treatment and shall ensure that at least
two persons amongst the site staff are trained in first aid. A suitable facility shall be maintained to cater for
first aid requirements. The first aid equipment shall include a defibrillator, and two members of site staff shall
be trained in its correct use.
The EPC Contractor shall submit a detailed health and safety plan relating specifically to this project in due
course before any construction activity starts on Site. Start of construction at Site shall not be permitted

unless this document is in place and agreed by the Owner and no consideration shall be given to any claim
that may devolve from this Plan not being in place.
Method statements shall support the health and safety plan and systems of work to be employed during the
contract works. These shall be provided before any Site construction work begins. The EPC Contractor
shall input to this plan all relevant health and safety documentation and shall:
a. Ensure that contractors and workers comply with the health and safety plan;
b. Monitor health and safety performance of contractors and give directions as appropriate;
c. Arrange for competent and adequately resourced contractors to carry out the work where it is
subcontracted;
d. Ensure the co-ordination and co-operation of contractors;
e. Obtain from contractors the main findings of their risk assessments, the steps to be taken to control and
manage the risks, including method statements for all aspects of the work;
f. Ensure that contractors and workers have information about risks on site and that there are co-ordinated
arrangements for workers to discuss health and safety and offer advice to the EPC Contractor;
g. Ensure that all workers are properly informed, consulted and trained on health and safety issues, and
adequately protected against all prevalent diseases;
h. Incident reporting scheme to include incident investigation and the publication of statistics including near
misses, injuries by category with frequency rate and lost time accidents; and
i. Ensure only authorized people are allowed onto the Site.
For the control of substances hazardous to health, no dangerous or noxious waste products, chemicals or
materials shall be disposed of, on or off the Site, without the agreement of the appropriate authorities. The
EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all normal, hazardous or controlled waste in a
manner strictly in accordance with current legislation and any consent given to the Owner or EPC Contractor
by the relevant authority.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that scaffolding conforms to internationally acceptable standards of
construction and safety.
5.5. Fire protection and fire fighting
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the fire protection on Site. The method of complying with this
requirement shall be detailed in the project health and safety plan.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure adequate fire fighting equipment is appropriately positioned whilst carrying
out work at the Site. This shall include the positioning of portable fire fighting equipment close by to where
hot cutting or welding work is being carried out.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure its supervisors, employees and subcontractors employees, who may be
required to carry out or be involved with hot cutting or weld work, are trained in the use of fire fighting
equipment.
The EPC Contractor shall maintain and regularly service its fire fighting equipment in a condition satisfactory
to the Owner and shall recharge its extinguishers after use regardless of how they were discharged.
Provision for the maintenance and servicing of the EPC Contractors fire fighting equipment shall be included
in the Site fire protection and fire fighting procedures of the health and safety plan.

5.6. Environmental management, construction and commissioning
The EPC Contractor shall be environmentally conscious and minimise where possible and economically
acceptable the impact of the Works on the environment. As a minimum the EPC Contractor shall comply
with the requirements of this Specification and all relevant environmental legislation and community
expectations.
The EPC Contractor shall prepare and implement the following plans:
A Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP);
A soil and water management plan (SWMP), including details of a dust management plan;
An environmental noise management plan for construction and commissioning
Specific requirements for some of the plans are included below:
The Construction CEMP shall be subject to acceptance of the Owner and the environmental aspects of the
construction work shall be managed in accordance with the plan. The principal items to be addressed in the
plan shall include:
Management roles
EPC Contractors induction
Emergency procedures
Noise control
Earthworks
Dust control
Groundwater management
Erosion and sediment control
Waste management and disposal (including spoil)
Dangerous goods
Heritage management
Clearing
Management of fuels, oils and chemicals, including bunding
Management of contaminated and potentially contaminated material
Traffic management
Legislative compliance
Compliance with approvals and licences.
The EPC Contractor shall prepare and implement a SWMP. The SWMP shall describe the measures to be
employed to minimise soil erosion and the discharge of sediment and other pollutants to lands and/or waters
during construction activities. The environmental objective for the SWMP shall be to prevent any adverse
environmental impact from the construction of the Works and shall include an accidental spill contingency
plan. The SWMP shall be submitted to the Owner for agreement 30 days prior to the commencement of
construction on Site.
Work shall be undertaken in such a way as to prevent the release of dust from the site. The plan shall
include an agreed localised dust monitoring program to be carried out by the EPC Contractor.

The EPC Contractor shall prepare and implement an Environmental Noise Management Plan (ENMP) that
addresses all construction noise impacts. This plan shall identify:
compliance standards;
community consultations;
complaints handling monitoring system;
site contact person to follow up complaints;
mitigation measures;
the design/orientation of the proposed mitigation methods demonstrating best practice;
construction times;
monitoring methods and program;
management strategies for construction activities that might produce high level intermittent noise such
as pile driving or blasting;
management strategies for any impulsive or tonal noise sources;
a clearly described construction schedule for all construction works with the aim of achieving an
environmental objective of no offensive noise being transmitted past the premises boundary.
In addition, to cover the period of commissioning, the ENMP shall include
contingency measures where noise complaints are received;
monitoring methods and program including a noise audit to verify noise levels produced by the Plant.
As regards traffic management, insofar as possible:
The transport of construction materials shall be restricted to daylight hours and via major roads;
The EPC Contractor shall provide a wheel wash facility to ensure the tracks of all vehicles leaving the
Site are clean, if required
Compliance with all of the above shall be subject to audit by the Owner.
5.7. Construction certificates
The EPC Contractor shall obtain Construction Certificates from the Owner prior to work commencing on Site.
No temporary buildings may be placed on the site and no site excavation, filling, removal of trees or other
site preparation may be carried out prior to the issue of an appropriate Construction Certificate.
5.8. Cleaning up by EPC Contractor
During construction, the EPC Contractor shall keep the Site clean and tidy and remove and dispose off Site
all waste material as it accumulates and as directed, to the satisfaction of the Owner. On completion of the
work the Site shall be left clean and tidy and surface areas shall be restored to the satisfaction of the Owner.
The burning of waste shall not be permitted. All costs for the disposal and transport of waste shall be to the
EPC Contractors account. The EPC Contractor shall provide to the Owner details of where any wastes are
to be disposed. The waste disposal facilities used by the EPC Contractor shall be suitably licensed to receive
the type(s) of waste generated by the Site. The EPC Contractor shall on request provide copies of waste
disposal operators licences and waste disposal chain of custody records to the Owner.

6. Mechanical Specification
6.1. Dual fuel engines
6.1.1. General
Dual fuel engines, plant and equipment shall be provided to supply power to meet the Specifications.
The dual fuel reciprocating engine generator sets shall have sufficient capacity to fulfil the specified
requirements, taking into account all mechanical and electrical losses and power needed for station
auxiliaries, running on full load conditions, and be suitable for the combustion of Natural Gas and Fuel Oil.
The dual fuel engines shall conform to the relevant parts of ISO 8528 and ISO 3046. In the case of any
conflicting requirements between the two standards, those of ISO 8528 shall take precedence.
The engine fuel system shall be such that leakage from any part of the system cannot contaminate the
engine lubricating oil. The engine mounted pilot fuel injector pipes shall be twin wall construction, complete
with collection tank and leak detection instrument to provide an alarm signal.
6.1.2. Dual fuel engines - design
The dual fuel engines shall be of the turbo-charged, charge-air cooled four-stroke compression ignition and
heavy-duty type.
The total net continuous power of the generating sets as installed shall be measured at the Electrical
Delivery Point.
The Plant capacity must be clearly stated in the EPC Contractors preliminary technical details, taking into
consideration:
The pressure drop in the inlet air system with filter and inlet silencer;
The overall resistance in the exhaust gas system, including ducting, silencer, and stack.
The engines shall be from the manufacturer's existing range, of proven design and ample operating
experience under similar ambient conditions and of a similar environment to that specified. Evidence shall
be required to show that the engines offered are capable of performing the duty specified in a reliable
manner and with a minimum of routine or periodic maintenance.
Proven design and ample operating experience is defined as an engine which has been in base load
generating service for a minimum of 3 years in two different utilities or companies in similar climatic
conditions
Each engine shall be continuously rated to give the stated generator output throughout the range of ambient
conditions specified.
Each engine shall be capable of stable operation from 10% load on Natural Gas and 20% load on Fuel Oil.

The engine shall be capable of producing 110 per cent of the continuous power rating when operating in
liquid fuel mode. . This capability shall be demonstrated during the factory acceptance tests operating on
diesel, but thereafter will be electronically blocked for 100% load during normal operation.

The Plant is to be capable of high availability under both base and peak load operating conditions. Reliability
will be of prime importance.
The engines shall be capable of being started multiple times per day and be regulated from no load to full
load. Start-up of the engines shall be possible locally and from the control room. Synchronization of each
generator set shall be carried out in the control room. During this operation the set is brought up to nominal
speed and nominal voltage first and if necessary, connected in parallel to the network. Subsequently, the
load will be connected. The set shall operate satisfactorily over the full load range in Natural Gas mode or
Fuel Oil mode operation.
In case of loss of the Natural Gas supply, the engine shall automatically switch over to operation on Fuel Oil.
The transition must be executed without any noticeable load, frequency or voltage drop, even during part
load operation. A description of the changeover process shall be supplied, detailing the process and time
taken to implement a complete switchover,
The step load characteristic of the engines shall be provided for operation on Natural Gas and Fuel Oil.
All galleries, stairways, handrails and guards to give access to all parts of the units shall be provided.
The reciprocating dual fuel engines shall be designed for a life of 25 years and for an operation time as
specified.
Sufficient measures shall be taken to prevent or minimize corrosion of the exhaust valves. Exhaust valve
rotating design is strongly preferred.
The engine and connected apparatus shall be mechanically designed for an overspeed of 18 per cent. The
engine speed under operating conditions shall be outside of the critical speed of the engine and connected
apparatus.
Attention shall be paid to a vibration-free assembly of the generator sets and the design shall be such that
the transmission of vibration to other parts of the installation is minimised, (e.g. the surrounding building,
installations erected in the vicinity). Vibration severity of the generating sets when in operation shall not
exceed the limit values stated in ISO 8528-9.
In order to minimize ring and liner wear fully oil cooled pistons shall be included.
Fastening of the engine on the foundation shall be such that all parts can expand freely and alignment is
maintained.
Internal connecting pipes shall be provided with expansion bends, wherever necessary, so that considerable
stress in and deformation of parts of the engine, due to reaction forces (such as temperature effects), are
prevented. Expansion bellows shall be avoided as much as possible.
The coupling between engine flywheel and generator, as well as the structure to which both machines will be
assembled shall be designed such that the generator may be dismantled, assembled and aligned easily and
rapidly without disturbing the alignment of the engine.
Piping connections shall be welded as much as possible insofar as this will not hamper maintenance.
Pumps, valves and other fittings, removable parts of heat exchangers and the like, shall be fastened by
means of flanges.

Flanged connections shall not show any leaks, under any circumstances. Gasket materials shall be selected
for fluids compatibility and optimum service life at the operating conditions.
A crankcase oil mist detector shall be provided for each engine, to give early warning of hot spots within the
engine crankcase. The unit shall be of proven design, arranged to sample each crankcase compartment.
The unit shall give alarm and shutdown signals in the event of high oil mist concentrations. The power
supply to the unit shall be such that dips on the electrical system do not give rise to inadvertent alarms/trips
as a result of the light source dimming.
A turbocharger washing system, utilizing demineralised water, shall be installed complete with all necessary
tanks, pipework, valves and controls.
6.1.3. Flywheel
The flywheel and flywheel coupling shall be designed to ensure that torsional vibration is damped to a
minimum and in any case to less than the limits laid down in ISO 3046 or other agreed standard. The
flywheel and all moving parts shall be suitably guarded.
6.1.4. Crankcase
Crankcase explosion relief valves shall be fitted. They shall open automatically in the event of abnormal
pressure rise inside the crankcase space, and shall comply with Lloyd's Register of Shipping Rules and
Regulations.
Large oil-tight doors shall provide access to both sides of the crankcase. All crankcase and other breathers
shall operate under negative pressure and all oil mist shall be removed by coalescing separator and returned
to the drain tank. Vents to atmosphere shall be via filters.
6.1.5. Bearings
The main bearings on the engine and generator shall be split horizontally and so arranged that the bottom
halves may be removed without appreciably raising the shaft. Any thrust bearing requiring periodic
adjustment shall be so arranged as to facilitate such adjustment.
Bearings should be provide with oil temperature monitoring and protection systems)
In order to avoid damage to the main bearings due to induced currents, the bearings of the generator and
associated oil pipes shall be insulated from the bedplate.
6.1.6. Governing
The set shall be equipped with all necessary governing systems, protective devices, control and other
instruments for reliable and efficient functioning under all operating conditions.
The set shall be provided with all instruments and sensors required for local control.
The engine shall be fitted with a governor capable of satisfying the limits laid down in ISO 8528,
Performance Class G3 for steady state operation and G2 for transient operation. Speed excursions, within
accepted limits, shall not operate the overspeed trip mechanism.
Means shall be provided so that adjustment of speed, synchronizing and load control may be made by hand
and managed only from the Control Room. The governor shall be equipped with a device to permit the
engine speed to be adjusted over the range given in ISO 8528-2 at any load.

The governor shall be arranged to shut down the engine by cutting off all fuel to the fuel pumps automatically
in the event of the operation of a mechanical or electrical shut down device.
The system shall be able to control the speed and the power, in a stable way, between zero and maximum
load, when operating parallel to other generators and in island operation.
Dynamic stability of the entire governing system shall be ensured and shall be guaranteed by the EPC
Contractor.
The speed under zero load shall also be adequately adjustable by a device, operated by hand, for testing the
overspeed protection.
The speed droop shall automatically balance the load between the parallel operating engines. The function
of the speed droop shall be continuous over the entire power range. Any required disproportionate load
distribution must be possible.
Variations in speed under constant load and during island operation shall be as low as possible.
Behaviour of the engine during a sudden change in load shall be in accordance with class A2 governing
system.
In case of a loss of the load, the governing system shall prevent response of the overspeed protection trip.
The governor shall be fitted with a motor operated speed gear. A Woodward governor is preferred.
6.1.7. Overspeed protection
An overspeed protection device, independent of the governor control, shall be provided in accordance with
ISO 3046-6, with shutdown latching and manual reset. The trip device shall act directly upon the fuel supply
to the engine, and shall contain electrical contacts for the tripping of the generator and initiating of overspeed
alarms in the control room.
Both mechanical and electrical overspeed protection devices shall be provided.
6.1.8. Turning gear
Electric motor driven barring gear shall be included and provision will be made to prevent starting of the
engine with the barring gear engaged. A manual barring facility shall be incorporated into the barring gear.
Means shall be provided to indicate the angular position of the crankshaft relative to each cylinder.
6.1.9. Torsional vibration damper
A vibration damper shall be fitted to the free end of the crankshaft if found necessary.
6.1.10. Foundations
The engine foundations shall consist of a substantial concrete block of sufficient stiffness and strength to
support the weight of the engine and the generator, and to withstand external moments and couples from the
engine. The design of the engine foundations shall comply with the applicable Eurocode for foundations for
reciprocating machines.

6.1.11. Piping and ducting
The engine shall be complete with all necessary integral piping, ducting and manifolds for exhaust gas,
charge air, starting air, control air, fuel, lubricating oil, injector cooling water and jacket cooling water. The
exhaust pipes shall be lagged and enclosed in light sheet metal coverings.
Interfacing systems piping shall be prevented from transmitting vibrations by agreed means.
The engine shall be manufactured in accordance with the suppliers manufacturing quality system. The
supplier shall provide the Owner with the specifications for the manufacturing quality system.
Tube, ducts and valves shall be welded where possible. Only butt weld techniques are allowed. Where,
contrary to the conditions above, flanges are used, weld-neck-flanges shall be applied.
Test pressures shall be 1.5 x design pressures or in accordance with BS EN 13480-5 standard, whichever is
the more onerous.
Welding procedures and welding/welder qualifications shall be presented for review by the Owner prior to
commencement of any hot work. The Owner may also request and witness NDT testing of weld specimens.
Material certificates shall be supplied in accordance with BS EN 10204 or equivalent international standard.
A percentage sample of the piping welds shall be subjected to radiographic examination, where relevant,
and to the requirements of BS EN 13480-5.
Tube materials shall be pickled and passivated.
Suitable terminal connections shall be provided on each engine system for connecting with the various off-
engine fluid systems pipework.
6.2. Cooling systems
It shall be possible to drain and de-aerate the cooling systems completely. De-aeration shall take place via a
high-positioned expansion vessel.
The radiators shall be constructed such that accumulation of dust is prevented as much as possible. The
cooling air fan configuration shall be induced draft type, with low noise fans. It shall be possible to clean the
air and watersides of the radiators easily and thoroughly.
Cooling radiators shall be designed with sufficient margin to compensate for fouling, and engine heat
rejection tolerances, in accordance with good industry practice. Additionally, each radiator module shall be
designed with sufficient margin such that a single fan failure will not result in reduced generation capacity.
Plastics are not allowed as material for the radiators for components such as cooling fins and fans.
Radiators shall comply with the suppliers technical specification, but shall preferably be of the once through
type with straight tubes which are easy accessible for cleaning.
Materials used in the radiator construction shall withstand the operating environment and operating
conditions specified. The design of the radiators shall be such as to facilitate ease of maintenance, and a
lifting hoist shall be provided for removal and installation of the radiator fans.

6.2.1. Jacket cooling system
The jacket cooling water shall be circulated through a jacket water cooler by an engine driven or electrically
driven centrifugal pump. If electric motor driven pumps are utilized, two pumps shall be installed per engine,
arranged for one duty and one standby. The standby pump shall automatically start on fall in system
pressure. A thermostatic control valve and cooler by-pass arrangement shall be installed to maintain the
desired constant engine outlet temperature throughout the range of operating loads.
An electric heater to pre-heat the jacket water during shutdown periods shall be included in the system.
A header tank with supporting steelwork shall be provided to allow for thermal volumetric changes in the
engine cooling systems. The EPC Contractor shall supply a manual water make-up facility for the cooling
system. . For manual operation, the operator will prepare the treated water and add to the water system.
The treatment of the internal and external surfaces of the header tanks shall be to the Owners agreement.
The outlet from each tank shall be connected to the respective cooling water system on the suction side of
the circulating water pumps. A small bore air release pipe shall be taken from a suitable high point on each
circulating water pipework system and led back to the head tank.
Two 10m
3
maintenance water storage tanks shall be provided to store engine cooling water during
maintenance, complete with interconnecting pipework, pump and associated accessories.
6.2.2. Lubricating oil system
Lubricating oil shall be kept warm, if necessary, during engine shutdown periods to enable ready start up.
The capacity of the engine sump shall be sufficient to enable the engine to run continuously for 24 hours at
any load without replenishment.
The engine sets shall be provided with a self-contained and independent pressurized lubrication system
operated by a positive displacement pump and serving all the lubrication requirements of the engine and
generator, including generator bearings, crankshaft and connecting rod bearings, shaft gears, camshafts,
pistons, valve gear, fuel injection pumps and turbocharger. The oil shall be circulated from the sump via
cooler and filters to the engine by an engine driven pump. A coarse filter shall be installed at the suction of
each lubricating oil pump. Manual lubrication of any part of the engine will not be acceptable.
The system shall incorporate automatic a water-cooled oil cooler and shall be complete with pipework, relief
valves, valves and instrumentation. The automatic oil filter shall be placed close to the engine so as to
minimize the length of pipe between the filter and the engine. Carbon steel piping shall be utilized between
the oil filter and the engine, which will be pre-manufactured, tested and cleaned in accordance with the
manufacturers quality assurance procedures.
The automatic full flow duplex filters, which shall be provided with a manual changeover facility, shall be
rated at 30 microns, or as required by the engine manufacturer. The design shall be such that the lubricating
oil supply to the engine is not interrupted during any automatic change-over operation. It shall not be
possible for both sides of the filter to be shut-off at the same time. Each filter shall be suitable for the
discharge pressure of the pumps and shall be capable of dealing with the full lubricating oil flow
requirements of the engine. The filter units shall be complete with connections for differential pressure
gauges and shall be arranged so that the filter may be cleaned whilst the engine is running.

A thermostatic control valve and oil cooler by pass arrangement shall be installed in the lubricating oil circuit
to maintain the lubricating oil within the desired temperature range throughout the range of operating loads.
The dual fuel generator sets must always be available for starting with the minimum of delay. If periodic
flushing of the oil system is required to meet this condition then the flushing shall be automatically controlled,
and the pump, pipework, controls, timers and associated equipment shall be provided under this contract.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for flushing the lube oil system prior to engine start-up, to the
satisfaction of the engine manufacturer.
Lubrication oil make up shall be from a lubricating oil storage tank.
Lubricating oil meters shall be installed (a) in the oil unloading line and (b) in the common line from the
engine filling pumps to the engines. The meters shall have local readout and also pulsed output connected
to the DCS to give remote indication of metered quantities. Accuracy of the lube oil meters shall be 0.5% or
better.
The EPC Contractor shall recommend the type and grade of the lubricating oil to be used and identify those
that are available in Oman.
A portable lubricating oil centrifuge shall be provided for the Plant - common for all engines. The capacity of
the centrifuge shall be capable of treating the contents of the engine sump four times in 24 hours. A
lubricating oil storage tank of capacity of not less than the larger of one months storage or two engines
worth of oil shall be installed in the tank farm complete with transfer pump. The pump shall be arranged to
supply each engine sump. All lube oil delivery pipework shall be permanent. The storage shall be capable
of being replenished from 200 litre oil drums and by road tanker. A drum unloading pump shall be installed
at the road tanker unloading bay.
A service tank, complete with transfer pump and interconnecting pipework, shall be provided for intermediate
storage of lube oil during maintenance of the engine.
A waste oil tank of capacity of not less than one months storage shall be installed in the tank farm, complete
with mobile transfer pump. The mobile transfer pump shall be arranged to take suction from each engine
sump and each lube oil sludge tank. A road tanker loading system shall be provided for sludge/oil waste
disposal from the waste oil tank.
6.3. Air starting system
The engines shall be started by compressed air. For this purpose two ac motor-driven air compressors, one
duty and one stand-by, plus one diesel engine driven standby air compressor, shall be supplied.
Each air compressor shall be capable of charging an air receiver from atmospheric pressure to full working
pressure in a period not exceeding one hour, and from minimum starting pressure to full working pressure in
a period not exceeding thirty minutes. The capacity of each air receiver shall be sufficient to enable six
engine starts to be carried out without the need for recharging. The compressor shall be fitted with an
unloading device operating at the design operating pressure for the air receiver. Each compressor and its
driving unit shall be mounted on a common bedplate and shall be complete with all necessary equipment
including intercooler and aftercooler, relief valves and discharge pressure gauges. Large capacity heavy
duty air intake filters shall be provided for the main air compressors.
It shall be possible to isolate any compressor for maintenance, with the adjacent compressor(s) running.
Lockable manual isolating valves shall be provided for this purpose, downstream of the compressor

discharge non-return valves. The pipe section between the non-return and isolating valve shall have the
means to be decompressed. The valves supplied shall be to the engine manufacturers standards.
The air receiver shall be of the cylindrical type, designed constructed and tested to Class 1 in accordance
with a recognised pressure vessel standards such as BS 5169, EN13445, PD 5500 and including the
standards referred to in this specification.
The air receivers shall be complete with the following connections and fittings:
air inlet from compressors
air outlet to diesel engine
drain
safety/relief valve, directed to a safe area
fusible plug, with discharge vented outside the Diesel Generator House
automatic water drain trap with manual bypass line
pressure gauge and isolation valve
inspection cover.
Nameplate.
After manufacture the external and internal surfaces shall be shot blasted to BS 4232 second quality. The
external surfaces shall be primed with a 2 pack epoxy zinc phosphate primer to a thickness of 80 microns,
followed by painting in the manufacturer's works with a 2 pack epoxy paint to a thickness of 40 microns, and
a final coat at site to a thickness of 100 microns. Alternatively, the manufacturers corrosion protection
system may be considered, subject to the approval of the Owner.
The air starting system for the diesel generator set shall include all interconnecting pipework, valves and
drain traps between compressor and receiver, receiver and engine. Two isolating valves shall be provided in
the line to the engine, the valve nearest to the engine shall be lockable. An additional valve shall be
provided, between this lockable isolation valve and the engine, to depressurize this part of the system. Drain
traps shall be provided at all low points.
The control system for the compressors shall be arranged so that the receiver is automatically maintained at
the set pressure by the electric motor driven air compressor. The compressor stop pressure switch setting
shall be such as to prevent excessive cycling of the compressor.
A pressure reducing station, including drier and filters shall be installed to provide the correct pressure and
quality of instrument air to each engine air system. The starting and instrument air systems shall be
interconnected to provide control air supply in the event of a failure of the control/instrument air system.
A percentage sample of the piping welds shall be subjected to radiographic examination, where relevant,
and to the requirements of BS EN 13480-5.
6.4. Control/instrument air system
A separate system shall be provided to compress and deliver oil-free air of a quantity and quality suitable for
all service, instrument and control purposes at all necessary points in the station. The system shall be
entirely self-contained, arranged for predominantly automatic operation, complete with after and inter
coolers, oil coolers, moisture separators, filters, dryers, silencers and air receivers. All appropriate pipework,
valves, controls, gauges and other instruments shall be provided.

6.5. Inlet and exhaust system
Combustion air shall be drawn from outside the building through desert condition air cleaners comprising of
self-cleaning oil bath type filters with inertial pre-cleaner. Consideration shall be given to the fact that the
Plant is located close to the sea. They shall be mounted above the ground and air cleaners shall be suitably
sized for the combustion air flow requirements of the gas engine, with a suitable margin to allow for an
increase in pressure drop during the service life of the filters.
As a gas processing facility will be located in close proximity to the power plant the air intakes shall be fitted
with flammable gas detectors which shall trip the Plant in the event of flammable gas detection. The EPC
Contractor shall design the air filtration system to minimise the impact of any hydrocarbon release from the
gas processing facility. The set point of the detectors shall be decided in conjunction with the Owner and
owners of the gas processing facility but is expected to be in the order of 30% of the Lower Flammability
Limit (LFL) for a gas cloud.
Erection of inlet and exhaust pipes, noise silencers and filters shall be chosen such that maintenance of the
engine is not hindered. Charge air ducting shall be suitably coated internally to prevent the ingress of pipe
scale and weld debris into the engine. Wherever necessary, parts will be provided with provisions that will
expedite dismantling and reassembly.
Exhaust ducting shall be preferably installed with a constant upward slope to prevent accumulation of gases
and to facilitate drainage of condensate. Drains and traps shall be installed at appropriate points to prevent
run-back of condensate into the engine. Silencers shall be designed to prevent accumulation of trapped gas.
Wherever necessary, corrosion resistant materials shall be applied.
Gaseous emissions shall discharge to atmosphere through stack arrangements. The stack height shall be
not less than 2 times the height of the largest building, or less than the minimum height as determined by
an approved dispersion modelling program or EIA whichever is the greater.
One flue gas stack shall be supplied for each engine, within a common steel structure which shall be
designed to withstand all imposed loads, including wind and vibration loads. The common steel structure
shall be fitted with access ladder(s)
Suitable long life aircraft warning lighting shall be provided which meets all relevant authorities
requirements. The lights and power supply shall be easily accessible for maintenance.
The exhaust system shall include a system of explosion relief vents which is designed constructed and
installed in accordance with NFPA 68 or equivalent international standard. The explosion relief vents shall be
fitted with a device which will initiate engine shutdown upon detection of an explosion venting occurrence.
Explosion products shall be vented to a safe area.
6.5.1. Exhaust emissions monitoring system
A continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) shall be provided, in accordance with the IFC 2008
Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants; [table 7, Natural Gas reciprocating
engine technology, (Plant 50 to <300 MWth input)].
The emission monitoring system to be provided shall be extractive type using time-sharing principles to
enable monitoring of multiple engines with a single analyzer. The system shall consist of sample probe for
each engine stack, heated sampling lines, one sample selection and conditioning system and one NOx and
O
2
analyser for not more than four groups of engines, and a data acquisition and reporting system. The

measurement of concentration of NOx and O
2
in the flue gas shall be based on NDIR-infrared type analyzers
for NOx, and electrochemical cell or paramagnetic for O
2
. The emissions shall be visualized in the plant
operator interface and a separate reporting system to enables preparation of emissions reports (such as for
example monthly reports). A cycling time of not less than 7.5 minutes per engine shall be provided.
Suitable sampling ports with permanent means of access shall be provided to enable periodic testing to be
undertaken.
6.5.2. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) - Option
In order to comply with the Oman regulatory requirements and IFC guidance limits for emissions of pollutants
to air, as outlined in section 3.8.2 of this specification, it may be necessary to provide a selective catalytic
reduction (SCR) system as an option to reduce NOx emissions below the applicable limits.
The SCR system should ideally use dry urea as the reagent although other reagents can be considered,
depending upon availability
The SCR equipment shall include the complete operating system, including the covered storage for dry
materials, all materials handling requirements, mixing tanks (if required), forwarding and dosing pumps,
reagent bulk tank sized for 14 days operation, catalyst, controls, instrumentation, air compressor plant (if
required), interconnecting pipework and safety related equipment.
The contractor shall include for a 90 days supply of all reagents in his offer, based on the continuous
operation of all reciprocating engines at full load.
6.6. Fuel systems
6.6.1. Fuel gas system
The EPC Contractor shall provide the complete fuel gas system, including installation of Gas Connection
Facilities and Metering Facilities and complete installation on the Plant side of the Gas Delivery Point.
Downstream of the Gas Connection Facilities and the Metering Instrumentation shall conform to the
specifications as detailed in Appendix D. The system shall comply with the following requirements:
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that the Natural Gas system downstream of the Gas Delivery Point:
i) is of sufficient size and design to ensure GCPC is achievable at the minimum gas pressure at
the Gas Delivery Point; and
ii) shall provide, downstream of the GCF within the Plant boundary, all the necessary facilities,
including sufficient Natural Gas buffer to provide automatic and immediate on-load change-over
from Natural Gas to Fuel Oil, to ensure GCPFC is achievable without interruption in the event of
a Gas Operation Failure, trip of Gas Connection Facilities or the pressure of Natural Gas at the
Gas Delivery Point falling below the minimum gas pressure specified in the documents.
The fuel gas system shall be provided complete with all necessary plant including but not limited to, the
emergency shutdown system, equipment for the provision of Natural Gas pressure, conditioning and quality
control, valves and pipework to provide fuel to the engines and any ancillary plant. The system shall be
suitable for continuous unattended operation, and allow full operation in accordance with the design and
operating philosophy of this Specification.

Gas detection systems shall be supplied within the engine rooms and the engine intake systems to provide a
warning at low levels of detection and eventually trip the unit or the plant upon reaching a prescribed level.
The EPC Contractor shall design and incorporate into the plant reasonable measures and equipment to
prevent damage or loss in the event non-conforming Natural Gas is delivered.
The flow measurement system must be designed, manufactured and installed in compliance with the
standards outlined in Appendix D.
At the terminal point on the site boundary adjacent to the MGP, the EPC Contractor shall provide for
electrical insulation of its pipework and equipment from the pipeline upstream. The EPC Contractor shall be
responsible for liaising during the detailed design with the gas supply contractor, through the Owner, to
ensure compatibility at the terminal point.
6.6.1.1. Emergency shutdown
The EPC Contractor shall provide an emergency shutdown valve as close as possible to the fuel gas
terminal point to isolate the fuel gas supply to the site in case of emergency. The valve shall be quick acting
and hard-wired and be able to be activated from the Control Room. The operation of the valve shall not
cause over or under pressure on the main gas pipeline upstream of the terminal point.
6.6.1.2. Gas Connection Facilities (GCF) and Metering Facilities.
Within the GCF, a dual stream (2 x 100% streams) gas pressure regulating station (GPRS) shall be provided
to accept the incoming fuel gas and to condition it to make it suitable for combustion within the dual fuel
engines. The GPRS shall include all necessary equipment including, but not limited to, safety shutdown
valves, pressure regulating valves, purge vents and piping, filter separators, leak detection, and associated
controls and instrumentation to ensure gas flow, pressure, temperature and quality is maintained across the
full range of plant operating scenarios. Provision shall be made for future expansion of the system by way of
leaving sufficient space and blank flanges etc.
The gas conditioning equipment shall be located in a secure compound within the Site. The compound shall
include a perimeter fence, sun-shade and locked access gate. The EPC Contractor shall provide separate
housing for the Metering Facilities with an independent access from outside the plant battery limit.
Each stream of the GPRS shall include duplex gas-liquid filter separators so that maintenance activities can
be conducted without impacting on the supply of gas to the Plant, in accordance with the availability criteria
as described herein.
The EPC Contractor shall provide an appropriate electrically operated fuel gas heating system and/or
thermal insulation, for proper operation of the gas engines, as required.
All emergency shut down operations and normal monitoring shall be possible from the central control room.
The GCF and Metering Facilities shall be designed in accordance with the standards below, which are listed
in order of decreasing priority:
a) The Specification for Metering Instrumentation as attached to this specification as Appendix D;
b) Design Basis for Government Gas Pressure Reduction Terminals in the Oman STD 85904/35 Rev 0,
January 1987, Addendum '99 PRT Improvement Review; and Oman Gas Company Design Basis
Manual Rev A, June 2003;
c) Petroleum Development Company Oman (PDO) specifications and Engineering Reference Documents;

d) Shell Design and Engineering Practices;
e) national standards; and
f) international standards.
The design of the GCF and the Metering Facilities shall meet the requirements of the NGSA and shall be
based upon the following criteria:
a) flow rate: The Natural Gas system downstream of the Gas Delivery Point shall be of sufficient size and
design to ensure GCPC is achievable based on minimum Lower Heating Value of 845 BTU/scf at the
minimum gas pressure at the Gas Delivery Point
b) minimum flow rate: 1.75 million scf per day/1479 MMBTU per day
c) receiving pressure: The GCF shall be capable of receiving Natural Gas at a maximum Delivery Pressure
of 30 barg and a minimum Delivery Pressure of not less than 20 barg. The normal Plant operating range
is expected to be between 23barg and 27barg. An alarm shall be activated at the Plant when the
Delivery Pressure reaches 32 barg. The Plant shall be capable of operating safely at Delivery Pressures
of up to 50 barg.
d) In the event the generating units equipment require a higher gas pressure than the delivery pressure
specified then the EPC Contractor shall ensure that all necessary compression equipment and control
systems are provided.
e) temperature: The EPC Contractor shall ensure the minimum delivery temperature shall at all times
(under both static and transient operating conditions) be at least 10 deg C above the hydrocarbon dew
point temperature
The GCF and Metering Facilities shall consist of:
a) an over pressurisation safeguarding system (an Instrumented Protective Function (IPF));
b) an inlet Emergency Shut Down system (ESD Valve(s));
c) filter separator(s);
d) gas heating system (electrically heated as per MOG requirement);
e) vent and drain system;
f) metering units including gas chromatograph; and
g) pressure reduction trains each with:
independent inlet Process Shut Down (PSD) valve providing high pressure trip; and
two-stage pressure reduction valve(s) and associated monitor override controllers.
Instrument Natural Gas sourced from upstream of the Metering Facilities shall be used as the medium for
instrument actuation.
Process control shall be based upon a modern field bus technology. The design of the instrumentation and
control system shall be based on a philosophy of unattended operation. Appropriate operational safety
factors along with battery back-up and necessary fail safe actions shall be considered.
All equipment installed shall be suitable for the Hazardous Area classification.
The safeguarding system (SGS) shall be programmable logic control based and hard-wired, and the system
interface shall be compatible with the control system on the field bus system chosen. The SGS shall be

designed as per the requirements of IPF classifications and TUV certification shall be considered on an as
required basis. The SGS shall be in accordance with PDO specifications and DEP 32.80.10.10 - Gen.
The necessary smoke/fire detectors shall be selected in accordance with SP-1084 and DEP 32.30.20.11-
Gen and shall be interfaced with the SGS. The SGS shall have a separate file (DIN rack) for FGS. The FGS
shall be an integral part of the SGS. No separate cabinet shall be provided for the FGS.
All the major equipment and/or cabinets related to the GCF and Metering Facilities shall be installed in a
suitable plant building.
The GCF and Metering Facilities shall have an appropriate communication gateway/node for interfacing with
SCADA infrastructure or the GCF pipeline monitoring system. The details of the interface shall be finalised
during the project execution phase.
The GCF shall be operated and maintained by the Owner. The Metering Facilities shall be operated by or on
behalf of the supplier of the Natural Gas. All GCFs and Metering Facilities in the Government gas system
are operated un-manned with occasional visits for valve maintenance, meter checking etc. Maintenance is
carried out on an annual basis with relief valves being tested every two (2) years and vessels and heaters
being inspected every five (5) to six (6) years.
A dual power supply from two independent power sources, including any necessary step down transformers
capable of delivering auxiliary power to the GCF and the Metering Facilities as per the GCF's and Metering
Facilities design requirement shall be provided. Separate battery back-up for GCF and Metering Facilities
shall be provided to ensure that essential instrumentation is maintained in an operable state for not less than
eight (8) hours. Area lighting for the GCF and Metering Facilities shall be provided. Electrical distribution
boards shall be installed in switch rooms for the GCF and separately for Metering Facilities. Control rooms
will be dedicated to instrumentation only.
6.6.1.3. Interface with the plant
The following interfaces will exist between the Metering Facilities and the Plant.
Piping: Natural Gas will be supplied at the Gas Delivery Point, on the plant boundary, with a [-] inch 300
Pound Class raised face flange.
Alarm to Plant:
The following alarms/signals shall be sent to the Plant from the Metering Facilities:
a) Common alarms.
b) 24V DC system fault
c) 240V AC UPS (uninterrupted power supply) system fault
d) Smoke detection in control building
e) Smoke detection system fault
f) Flow computer watchdog failure alarm; and
g) Telemetry shutdown override.
h) Power supply voltage and current.
i) FGS detected alarm.
j) Flow computer watchdog failure alarm (for both flow computers).
k) Gas flow rate hourly and daily.
l) Gas supply pressure.
m) Gas supply temperature.
n) Gas LHV.
The mode of communication between the Plant and the Metering Facilities shall be as follows:

a) All communication between the Plant and the Metering Facilities shall be through fiber optic cable (FOC)
of minimum of 12 cores. If no power cable trench is available to be used to lay the FOC between the
Plant and the Metering Facilities, a trench (not a duct) specifically for the purpose shall be provided by
the EPC Contractor.
b) All data transfer between the Plant and the Metering Facilities shall use a modern data communication
protocol which can support time stamping information to be transmitted.
Alarms/signals to the Metering Facilities:
The following alarms/signals shall be sent to the Metering Facilities:
a) trip of any Power Unit;
b) total Plant trip;
c) Gas Operation Failure;
d) Non-Conforming Natural Gas;
e) time of Natural Gas to Fuel Oil change over on Gas Operation Failure;
f) time of Fuel Oil to Natural Gas changeover on Gas Operation Failure;
g) Fuel Oil meter reading data; and
h) hazardous gas at Plant boundary;
The following alarms will be made available by the Natural Gas supplier to the EPC Contractor as potential
free contacts at the Metering Facilities:
a) gas supply system shutdown;
b) MGP fire and safety event; and
c) conforming gas supply available.
Telecom/SCADA hot line system shall be provided. The hot line telephone system shall be of the point to
point type. The EPC Contractor shall provide the system and handsets for the Metering Facilities and the
control room. Hot line system beyond Metering Facilities shall be the responsibility of the Natural Gas
supplier.
6.6.2. Metering
The Metering Facilities shall be provided by the EPC Contractor and measure the quantity of Natural Gas
delivered at the Gas Delivery Point on a volumetric basis and calorific value basis. Only ultrasonic metering
will be permitted. The Metering Facilities shall be accurate on a volumetric basis to within plus or minus one
per cent (1.0%) and on a net calorific basis to within plus or minus one per cent (1%).
The Metering Instrumentation is specified in Appendix D
The Metering Facilities to be used for calculation of the delivered quantities of Natural Gas shall be installed
by the EPC Contractor in such a way that no single failure of a component of the Metering Facilities shall
result in loss or degradation of accounting data. To this extent, the Main (Pay) Metering Facilities which are
primarily intended for accounting shall be labelled PAY and the Back-up (Check) Metering Facilities which
are intended for checking is labelled CHECK. Upon detection of failure of the Main (Pay) Metering Facilities
to produce data suited for accounting, an alarm condition shall be signalled and the Back-up (Check)
Metering Facilities shall be taken online and be used for accounting. The Back-up (Check) Metering Facilities
for that period of time shall have the same status as that of the Main (Pay) Metering Facilities, and shall not
result in loss or degradation of account data.

The Metering Facilities shall be time synchronised with the Master Clock of the plant which in turn shall be
synchronised to the GPS. The metering data shall be transmitted with its time stamped at source.
6.6.2.1. Measurement Standards and Test Methods
The standard test methods described below shall be used to determine the quality and quantity of Natural
Gas delivered at the Gas Delivery Point.
Description Test Method
Sampling ISO 10715 1997
Hydrocarbons ISO 6974 1984
Total Sulphur ISO 4260 1987
Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) ISO 19739 2004
Mercaptans ISO 19739 2004
Oxygen ISO 6974 1984
Mercury ISO 6978 1992
Water Content ISO 10101-3 1993
Lower Heating Value ISO/DP 6976 1995
Ultrasonic meter volume AGA 9 1998
Compressibility, Density AGA 8 1994
6.6.2.2. Computation of Quantity of Natural Gas Delivered
The measurement and computation of the quantity and/or quality of Natural Gas delivered at the Gas
Delivery Point shall be carried out in accordance with the standards specified below:
a) The volumetric flow shall be obtained by dividing the mass flow by the density of Natural Gas at the
reference conditions. The mass flow shall be based on a flow meter for which the design and mass flow
calculations are in accordance with AGA 9, ISO 5167/1, ISO 5168 and ISO 7066/1, or other system as
agreed by the Owner based on a recognised international standard. The Natural Gas density under
operating conditions used in the flow calculation shall be calculated in accordance with AGA 8 from the
measured gas composition, pressure and temperature. The density at the reference conditions shall be
calculated in accordance with AGA 8 and ISO 6976.
b) The continuous measuring system of the Metering Facilities shall retain values of Natural Gas
components concentrations in mol percentages. For the purpose of determining the molecular
composition of Natural Gas, all hexane hydrocarbon components and hydrocarbon components heavier
than hexane shall be included in the normal hexane fraction. The composition information shall be
obtained from on-line Natural Gas chromatographic measurements installed in accordance with the ISO
6974 and calibration gases shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 6142. The continuous
measurement system shall retain sufficient instantaneous, summed and averaged data to provide
volume and energy reports on a daily and monthly basis. The format of such volume and energy reports
shall be agreed to by the parties and shall be included in the specification of the Metering Facilities.
c) The Lower Heating Value, Wobbe Index, Gas composition range in mol % density and relative density of
the Natural Gas shall be calculated from the composition derived from the continuous measuring system
of the Metering Facilities.
d) The calculation of the quantities of energy delivered shall combine the continuous metering of volumetric
flow at the Metering Facilities at the reference conditions and Lower Heating Value to give energy per
unit time.
e) The SI system of units shall be used.

6.6.2.3. Fuel gas venting and purging system
A suitable venting system shall be provided to vent any gas during emergency or transient operations. The
system shall be arranged to meet all local statutory and environmental regulations in relation to venting of
gas and maintaining ground level concentrations below the lower explosive limit and odours to below
discernible levels.
The EPC Contractor shall provide for suitable connection points, vents and associated equipment to vent the
complete fuel gas system with nitrogen in case of an extended outage or emergency. The vents shall
discharge to a safe area outside of the building. The use of flame traps at the gas vent pipe terminations
shall be considered in the design.
6.6.3. Fuel Oil pilot and backup system
6.6.3.1. System requirements
The EPC Contractor shall provide a liquid Fuel Oil system to deliver diesel oil to the engines at appropriate
supply conditions and quantity. Fuel Oil will be transported to and stored on the Site in an area sufficient in
size to accommodate the unloading, transfer, storage and feed of Fuel Oil for the Plant for use as pilot fuel
and as an alternative fuel in the event of an interruption to the supply of Natural Gas.
The Fuel Oil supply system shall be complete including truck unloading station and forwarding pumps,
piping, valves, storage tanks and pumping station (including cleaning and treatment if required).The scope of
supply for the Fuel Oil system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a) The supply and installation of vertical, cylindrical and self-supporting distillate Fuel Oil storage tank(s),
designed and constructed in accordance with API 650 or equivalent standard. The Fuel Oil storage
tanks capacity shall be the greater of (i) sufficient Fuel Oil to operate the Power Unit Block for a
continuous period of at least sixty (60) days on Natural Gas (i.e. based upon pilot fuel consumption) or
(ii) sufficient Fuel Oil to operate the Plant for a continuous period of at least ten (10) days on Fuel Oil, at
GCPFC and a replenishment rate sufficient to operate the Plant in accordance with dispatch instructions
up to GCPFC..
b) Containment bund
c) Delivery vehicle unloading facilities, comprising sufficient bays to unload one days fuel consumption at
GCPFC within 24 hours and, in any case, not less than 4 unloading bays. The unloading facilities shall
include provisions for the treatment and removal of any fuel spillage at the facilities.
d) Supply and installation of Fuel Oil day tanks
e) Quick sampling (representative) and testing facilities to demonstrate that the quality of the diesel oil
meets the requirements of the engines.
f) A Fuel Oil treatment plant consisting of one fuel centrifuge unit
g) One duplex type strainer for diesel oil forwarding.
h) Two 100 per cent capacity, positive displacement type, diesel oil forwarding pumps.
i) Two unloading pumps
j) One pressure regulating valve.
k) One flow meter for the measurement of fuel deliveries to Site.
l) Flow measurement devices for measuring the diesel oil supply to each engine.
m) Fuel stop valves.
n) Level transmitters fitted to the diesel oil storage tank, and day tanks

In addition, the EPC Contractor shall provide all pipework, valves, air separators, filters, drains, drip pans,
vents, fittings, and equipment needed to convey oil from the unloading point to the engines. There shall be
two 100 per cent capacity filters in the supply to each engine.
Fugitive emissions of the VOCs resulting out of fuel storage facilities and leaks (from flanges, valves, pumps
and otherwise) related to fuel flow line shall be decreased by using Leak Detection & Repair Techniques. In
addition, the process of monitoring VOCs shall be made by using a mobile monitoring instrument
6.6.3.2. Fuel Oil storage tanks and unloading area
The tank(s) shall be installed in an impermeable containment bund sized to contain as a minimum 110 per
cent of the tank maximum capacity. Additional freeboard allowances for surges due to sudden failure,
rainwater containment, and fire fighting foam shall be considered in the containment capacity of the bund.
The tank(s) shall be designed to API 650 and shall be complete with stairs, handrails, internal and external
coatings, instrumentation, vents, manholes, drains, filling and extraction pipework, and any other equipment
necessary for the safe operation of the Fuel Oil system. The EPC Contractor shall as a minimum:
a) Fit activated carbon filters for the removal of volatiles from the tank vents
b) Fit fire valves on the tank outlets (capable of being operated via the plant control system)
c) Install tank level instrumentation, including level transmitter.
d) Install high level switches and an alarm system with display local to the tanker unloading point and on
the plant control system.
e) Install tank overflows with flap valves to prevent the overflow acting as a vent.
f) Install a pump, pipework and power supply system to remove fluid from the bund area.
g) Provide a complete unloading system comprising delivery vehicle unloading area (drained via an oil
interceptor), valved and capped unloading pipework and earthing straps.
h) Install a velocity diffuser in the tank on the incoming fuel line.
i) Install two access ladders into the bunded area to provide alternative means of escape.
j) Install access from the bunded area to the top of the Fuel Oil tank.
k) Install storm water drainage system to be routed through the oily waste water system. The bund shall be
drained via a manually operated valve or an automatic system incorporating an oil stop valve.
Procedures for the regular discharge of impounded storm water during and after periods of rainfall shall
be included in Operations and Maintenance Manual.
The tank floor shall be cone down and the tank shall be equipped with at least the following:
Suitable water draw-off points with water/oil separation and drainage to interceptor
Ports for the injection of additives
Facilities to circulate the fuel in the tank to mix additives
Any other facilities recommended to prevent the deterioration of the stored fuel.
Radar gauging for level indication and control, linked to the DCS and pump control systems
Manual dipping facilities.
In addition to the main site Fuel Oil storage tanks the facility shall incorporate one day tank per Power Block
which together meet the Fuel Oil requirements of the Plant for 8 hours. The day tanks shall supply the
individual needs of the power units and shall be installed in bunded areas and be designed to recognised
international standards.

Fuel Oil flow meters connected to the Plant control system shall be provided on the individual supply lines to
each Power unit and the individual Fuel Oil return lines from the individual Power units to calculate the actual
Fuel Oil consumed by the Power Unit. An adequate number of Fuel Oil transfer pumps with adequate
standby transfer pumps shall be installed to transfer Fuel Oil from the Fuel Oil storage tanks to the Fuel Oil
day tanks. The transfer pumps shall fill the day tanks automatically.
6.6.3.3. Fuel receiving / load-out station
Tanker unloading of Fuel Oil shall be undertaken within the Site boundary. The Fuel Oil unloading facilities
shall be designed to allow at least four (4) articulated road tankers to be unloaded in parallel. Necessary
traffic management systems shall be provided for tanker unloading.
Fuel receiving / load-out capacity shall be based on road tanker deliveries by tankers carrying up to 40,000L.
Each receiving point shall have a truck and trailer grounding facility.
A common flow meter which reads cumulative and instantaneous fuel flows shall be provided.
A permanent piping and pumping system shall be provided that allows fuel to be transferred from the storage
tank back to a road tanker. A flow meter which reads cumulative and instantaneous fuel flows shall be
provided.
A bunded area shall be provided in the receiving/load-out area to contain any oil spillage during the receiving
/ load-out process. Any spillage shall be diverted to an interceptor.
The tanker unloading/loading arms shall be self supporting. Hoses are not acceptable.
6.6.3.4. Fuel Oil treatment
As the diesel oil may be stored on Site for prolonged periods without use, a small treatment plant shall be
provided to circulate and treat the fuel.
The diesel oil treatment plant shall be constructed as a module, complete with electric heater (if required),
valves and pumps, etc, and shall be tested thoroughly before shipment. The centrifuge shall be of the latest
design of Alfa-Laval or Westfalia, or equivalent proven manufacture, operating as a clarifier without the use
of gravity discs. The centrifuge shall take suction from the fuel tank and discharge treated fuel back to the
same tank.
6.6.3.5. Diesel oil forwarding system
Each diesel oil forwarding pump shall be capable of delivering the specified Fuel Oil at an appropriate
pressure and quantity for the engines. The EPC Contractor shall take into consideration all pressure drops
in the system caused by elevation differentials, friction in the pipeline, filters, heaters, meters and strainers
and as required across all control valves. The forwarding pump shall have a low NPSH (Net Positive Suction
Head) capability so that the pump is capable of emptying the tank contents down to the intake level of the
suction pipe.
Each pump shall be protected by a relief valve set such that the maximum design pressure of the piping
system is not exceeded, and sized such that the flow requirements of the pump are met at all times. The
discharge of the relief valve shall be returned to the suction side of each pump.
The EPC Contractor shall submit performance curves and supporting calculations to substantiate the pump
selection with his detail design.

The Fuel Oil forwarding pumps shall be located adjacent to the Fuel Oil storage tank. The EPC Contractor
shall provide suitable trays or containment for the collection of any seepage emanating from the pumps.
Pipeline strainers shall be provided. The strainers shall be duplex type, and designed to provide for
uninterrupted flow of oil during manual cleaning of one of the strainers. Baskets shall be of stainless steel.
All strainers shall have pressure ratings appropriate for the service intended, but in no case, less than
1.5 times the maximum service pressure. Each strainer shall be provided with local differential pressure
indication and a transmitter for remote indication.
Vents and drains shall be provided at strainers and all high points and low points, respectively. Vents and
drains shall each be equipped with a ball valve. In addition, connections required for periodic tests shall be
equipped with valves and threaded nipples which shall be protected by threaded caps.
All isolating valves in the Fuel Oil systems shall be of the non-lubricated full bore ball type with Teflon seals
and resilient faces where applicable. Threaded valves shall only be used where required for equipment
compatibility. Cast iron valves shall not be used for oil service.
All piping and equipment shall be protected against excess pressure utilizing pressure relief valves. Over
pressurization of blocked and full lines and equipment by solar heating and ambient temperature changes
shall be considered in the design. Relief valve discharge shall be piped to the return header or pump suction
as required.
6.7. Water system
The EPC Contractor shall make provide onsite water production facilities sufficient for all requirements of
the Plant. Demineralised water used on Site shall be produced as required by the EPC Contractor.
For demineralisation plant, full regeneration and waste water neutralisation facilities shall be supplied.
Economy in the use of chemicals and waste water for disposal shall be an important consideration.
Facilities shall be provided for the treatment and disposal of all wastes arising from the processes.
6.7.1. Water source
The only source of raw water for the plant will be seawater. Due to the issues with abstracting water directly
from the sea, a Beach Well Assessment Study was commissioned by the Owner to investigate abstracting
water from site wells. The reports conclusions were:
The main aquifer system in the study area is alluvium and limestone formation;
The water table may strike within 6-8 m bgl (assuming that ground level is fractionally higher than high
sea level) in this aquifer system;
The yield of the aquifer system is ranged between 32 to 79m
3
/h. However further confirmation is
required with well specific pump test.
The geological settings and hydrogeological formations indicate that the study area can easily cater to
the MPC water requirement of approximately 100m
3
/h.
The EPC Contractor is to provide test wells on the site to confirm well yield and to optimise the location of
the supply wells. The beach wells shall be supplied with sufficient redundancy to accommodate a well out of
service and to avoid continuous drawdown from a single well to maintain the static water level. The wells
shall be spaced to avoid drawdown between the wells.

The wells should be constructed perpendicular to the flow line from the sea to minimize the mutual
interference. Considering the high salinity of the water and shallow depth of the wells, uPVC casings should
be used for the well assembly.
6.7.2. Combined fire and raw water storage tank
A combined raw water and firewater storage tank shall be provided to supply buffer storage capacity in the
event of a temporary loss of well/river water supply.
The total working capacity of the tank shall be based on:
The nominal water requirements of the plant, plus
The maximum anticipated flow rate for the largest single risk associated with the Plant plus two hydrant
points, for a period of two hours.
The off take for general station use shall be above the level dedicated to storage for fire fighting.
The tank shall be located adjacent to the fire water pump house. The tank shall be complete with all
necessary connections for make-up, pump suction, vortex inhibitor, pump testing and maintenance access,
together with level indicator, low level alarm, access ladder, handrailing and a dosing system to inhibit
microbial growth.
6.7.3. Potable water
The Plant is to provide the total potable water requirements, with adequate margins, for all personnel within
the Plant, under all conditions of operation. Details of the Plant's design throughput sizing and potable water
storage facilities shall be provided to demonstrate the adequacy of the Plant provision. The storage facilities
shall, if required, be fitted with access ladders, platforms, vents and access ports. Level and contents gauges
shall be located for operational convenience.
The provision shall include equipment for disinfection and for the adjustment of pH and hardness, as
required, such that the supply conforms to WHO guidelines. Adequate monitoring and control
instrumentation shall be installed to allow automatic operation of the plant and permit continuous
measurement of the conductivity of the final product water. Alarms advising poor water quality and system
malfunctions shall be provided to the DCS operator interface in the Control Room. Normal operation is from
the local control panel. Alarms and indications shall be displayed locally with essential alarms and indications
conveyed to the Control Room.
6.7.4. Water treatment plant
A water treatment plant (WTP) shall be provided to meet all the plants process water make-up requirements.
The WTP shall be fully automatic and shall provide demineralised water supplies to the plant under all
operating conditions. The WTP shall be capable of local operation within the WTP building with alarm and
malfunction signals sent to the Control Room.
Sea water shall be pumped from the sea water pump bay to the water pre-treatment plant and 2 x 100%
pumping redundancy shall be provided. The plant shall consist of but not be limited to:
Filtration stage using multi -media filters to remove the bulk of the suspended solids
Filtered sea water storage tank to hold the filtered water required for backwashing the multi-
media filters
Dosing of the filtered water using acid, sodium hypochlorite, phosphate and/or scale inhibitor

Cartridge filters (typically 5micron) to remove remaining suspended solids
Dechlorination of feed water using sodium sulphite or bisulphite
RO high pressure feed pump
Membrane pressure vessels - may be two or three stages of RO membranes
Degassing tower to remove carbon dioxide
Mixed bed ion exchange units to remove the remaining dissolved solids
The capacity of the filtered seawater tank shall be sized to allow the design output from the demineralisation
plant for 12 hours with the pre-treatment plant out of service when operating at maximum output.
Duplex cartridge filters ~5 micron filtration shall be installed and incorporate differential back pressure
measurement equipment. The differential pressure equipment shall be linked to the control system in order
to produce alarms when the differential pressure of an individual filter cartridge is high.
The reverse osmosis module shall produce a permeate of suitable quality for feeding to the mixed bed units.
The design shall include sufficient margin to allow safe reliable operation of the unit at the design conditions
and for the specified expected water variation. The design conditions shall include a fouling allowance to
ensure that design capacity is maintained, whilst operating the recommended membrane replacement
programme.
The reverse osmosis module shall contain rack mounted RO units with factory assembled pressure vessels.
These shall include feed, product and reject piping and valves and also instrumentation. .
The membranes shall include all protective measures required for their operation. Spare membranes
equivalent to ten per cent of the installed membranes shall be supplied as part of the contract. A membrane
store of appropriate capacity and storage conditions shall be provided. Membrane elements shall have an
anticipated life in excess of five years. Rejected brine from the RO plant shall be directed to CW outlet sump.
An automatically controlled dosing skid shall be included (sodium bisulphite, antiscalant, sulphuric acid or
sodium hydroxide). A standby dosing pump will be included in the package and in the event of a pump
failure the control system shall automatically switch to the standby pump.
Out of specification conditions shall cause the permeate product water to be automatically redirected to the
filtered sea water tank. The permeate product generated by the RO plant will be stored in the service water
tank.
All effluents from the WTP shall be treated and/or neutralised separately before being collected for disposal
via the reject water pipeline. An iron removal unit shall be supplied integral to the WTP.
Supply to the WTP shall be raw water. The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring any necessary
water samples and historical data to ensure the suitability of the water treatment plant proposed. Suitable
sampling points in easily accessible positions shall be provided to monitor WTP performance.
Chemical storage for bulk liquid chemicals shall be in bunded storage tanks. Solid chemicals shall be stored
on pallets in a secured area. Delivery of bulk liquid chemicals shall be by road tanker, and provision for
tanker delivery shall be provided. .
All necessary personnel protection and safety systems, including safety showers and eye-wash stations,
shall be supplied where appropriate.

The EPC Contractor shall supply a water test kit to analyse critical engine water parameters such as chloride
and nitrite content and hardness.
6.7.5. Demineralised water storage and distribution
A demineralised water storage tank shall be provided with a capacity of not less than 8 days consumption of
the Plant facility at maximum rate of use. A complete demineralised water distribution system shall be
provided to automatically make up all systems using demineralised water.
6.8. Black start and emergency diesel equipment
6.8.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall provide an emergency and black start facility that is capable of starting a power
unit within half an hour of instruction.
Two 100% suitably rated black start/emergency diesel generating sets complete with all accessories shall be
provided under the terms of this Contract. The EPC Contractor shall install two packaged high-speed diesel
generator sets, connected to the LV system, each of capacity sufficient to power essential supplies both
unique and common to allow starting of any one of the main engines. The generators shall each be sized to
accommodate (a) supplying the station auxiliaries on loss of mains supply and (b) the black starting of a
single engine / generator unit and its supporting auxiliaries.
6.8.2. Fuel
The engine supplied shall be suitable for operating on Fuel Oil. A complete Fuel Oil system including valves,
piping and daily storage tanks shall be provided to serve the Plant. The daily service tank shall be free
standing and be large enough to supply the generator sets with fuel for a continuous running period of 24
hours. Replenishment of the daily service tank shall be provided from the main diesel storage tank.
The engine fuel suction supply shall be fitted with a coalescing type filter separator which is capable of solids
and water removal in accordance with the engine manufacturers specifications.
6.8.3. Diesel engine
The diesel engine shall comply with ISO3046, ISO 8528 and IEC 60034-22. The engine shall be water
cooled, cold starting type, fitted with renewable cylinder liners.
An air cleaner, with replaceable element, shall be provided for the diesel generator unit to ensure air for the
engine is adequately cleaned.
An engine cooling system shall be supplied and shall operate in conjunction with a generously sized radiator.
A high water temperature alarm, and low water level detection equipment complete with relays shall be fitted
to the generator unit, and the engine shall be arranged to automatically shut down should the water
temperature reach a dangerous level or cooling water level be unsatisfactory.
A suitable silencer and associated fixed pipework including a weather hood where necessary shall be
provided and installed under this Contract. All exhaust piping within the building or enclosure shall be
provided with slab insulating material covered with an agreed finish to minimize the heat losses from the
piping to the diesel generator enclosure.

6.8.4. Engine governing
It is anticipated that the load will be stepped onto the diesel generator. A delay of a few seconds shall be
allowed between applications of load. On return of the mains supply it is anticipated that the load shall be
removed from the diesel generator at a similar rate.
The governing equipment supplied shall comply with ISO 3046.
All electric motors shall be direct on line started.
6.8.5. Generator cooling equipment
The diesel generator unit supplied shall have an air cooled radiator and engine driven fans arranged to
discharge cooling air from within the diesel generator enclosure to the outside of the building.
The diesel generator unit shall be complete with a suitable sheet metal duct to connect the radiator outlet to
the cooling air discharge louvre which shall be supplied and fixed to the wall of the building. The EPC
Contractor shall provide anti draught flap louvres at each discharge connection to prevent the ingress of
wind.
The diesel generator room air intake louvre shall open automatically on diesel generator start-up and shall
close on shut down.
6.8.6. Starting equipment
Suitable starting equipment shall be supplied. The equipment shall be of the battery starting type, complete
with mains and engine driven recharging facilities, or compressed air. The charging equipment shall be
automatic in operation and maintain the level of charge at a suitable value in each battery. Batteries shall be
accommodated in specially constructed stands mounted local to the diesel generator units off the diesel
generator house floor.
6.8.7. Operation of the blackstart / emergency plant
The station switchboard shall be provided with an electrical detection and control system to allow the board
to be fed separately either from the station auxiliary transformer or the standby diesel generating plant. The
changeover operation shall be automatic following a failure of the station auxiliary transformer supply,
permitting an automatic starting of the black start / emergency diesel generator.
Switching of the system back to main supply upon restoration of the grid shall take place automatically.
The supply to the diesel generator auxiliary plant shall be taken through a mains/generator changeover
switch, the purpose of which is to feed the auxiliary equipment from the mains during those periods when the
diesel generating plant is not operating. On failure of the mains supply the generator auxiliary plant shall be
supplied from the generator itself.
The black / emergency diesel generator shall automatically start when instructed by the operator to enable
the back starting of a selected main unit and the relevant auxiliaries. The station auxiliaries will be
automatically configured to enable black starting.
The generator will be equipped with all necessary facilities to enable periodic full loading testing of the diesel
generator unit.
The diesel generator set shall be suppressed to prevent interference with communications equipment.

6.8.8. Generator
The diesel generating set shall be complete with a direct driven generator together with automatic voltage
control equipment (AVR). The AVR shall be of a well established design, selected in conjunction with the
other features of the diesel generating set offered, to ensure trouble free operation.
Three phase sensing of the AVR shall be used to minimize the effect of the waveform distortion caused by
load. The generator shall be fitted with a fully linked damper winding to keep the sub-transient reactance to
a minimum.
The generator frame shall preferably be of fabricated construction and incorporate an exciter. The
generators shall be air cooled; insulation shall be to at least Class F with temperature rise to the next lowest
class of insulation (class B).
A proprietary flexible coupling shall connect the generator rotor to the diesel engine flywheel.
Generator rotor shaft shall be machined all over to accept the cooling fan and the rotating field assemblies
for the generator and exciter, all of which shall be readily detachable for maintenance purposes. The whole
rotor assembly shall be statically balanced on completion.
6.8.9. Generating set protection
The generating unit shall be provided with protection equipment which shall protect the alternator/generator
set from damage due to fault conditions. All relays or similar equipment including overspeed, oil pressure,
cooling water level and high cooling water temperature, air cleaner differential pressure, lube oil filter
differential pressure, directly associated with the prime mover shall be mounted on the generating set engine
and associated with a suitable trip relay.
Protection equipment shall be provided and arranged to trip the associated circuit breaker, suppress the
excitation and shut down the prime mover if faults should occur.
6.8.10. Generator control panel
The control panel shall be of a fabricated steel cubicle, set mounted or free standing to form a pre-wired
package.
The generator circuit breaker shall trip out in the event of low voltage, low frequency, overvoltage or
overspeed. Visual indication of alarm conditions and system status shall be visible on the control panel
through the use of LEDs. Alarms and trips shall be relayed to the Control Room.
The control panel shall incorporate repeat starting protection. Three repeat starting attempts shall be made
to suit manufacturer recommendations.
6.9. Mechanical building services
The EPC Contractor shall provide all necessary mechanical building services to ensure a satisfactory
working environment for all personnel within the plant, and to provide a suitable environment for the
performance of plant and equipment.
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) shall be provided in all areas where necessary for the
correct functioning of equipment and for any normally manned rooms. All electrical and DCS equipment
rooms shall be air-conditioned with at least dual 100% capacity systems. Air conditioning shall be provided to

C&I workshops, all offices, the administration area, control rooms, meeting rooms, and kitchen/lunchroom
area with at least 2 x 50% capacity systems.
Air conditioning shall also be provided in the guard house, electrical stores, laboratory and warehouse areas.
The HVAC system shall be designed in accordance with all relevant codes and standards. The EPC
Contractor shall consider the health and welfare of all personnel and the requirements of the relevant
equipment across all plant loading conditions and the full range of external ambient conditions. The design
of the HVAC system shall also consider the requirement to provide air pressurisation for smoke control,
adequate ventilation of hazardous gases and fumes and to control the spread of hot gases and smoke.
The EPC Contractor shall identify in its proposal, for each area of the Works, the type of HVAC system, rate
of ventilation and temperature conditions proposed. Where appropriate, the EPC Contractor shall provide
humidity control in areas housing sensitive electrical or electronic equipment.
In areas where smoke may accumulate, such as at the top of the engine building, the EPC Contractor shall
provide high-level smoke ventilators, in accordance with or in addition to the requirements of the relevant
standards. All HVAC equipment shall be fitted with detection equipment for hydrocarbons and hazardous
gasses, which shall cause the HVAC plant to shutdown if high levels of the gasses are detected within the air
intake systems.
A smoke extractor system shall be provided in the welding workshop area.
The HVAC system associated with critical plant areas shall be fed from the essential power supply.
6.10. Maintenance facilities and equipment
The Plant shall be designed and laid out to facilitate routine maintenance on all items of equipment.
Facilities and equipment such as cranes, lifting beams and monorails shall be provided to ensure equipment
can be dismantled and transported safely and expediently for maintenance and repair.
The EPC Contractor shall demonstrate the maintenance procedures for major items of plant, including lifting,
transportation and lay-down methods.
6.10.1. Cranes
An overhead travelling crane shall be provided in order to lift and transfer major items of plant within the
power house building. The crane shall be designed to lift the heaviest component required to be lifted during
maintenance, including for major maintenance and overhaul activities on the engines and generators. It
shall have an auxiliary hoist.
The EPC Contractor shall give consideration to the requirement to lift and remove all pumps, compressors,
motors, major valves and other associated equipment, which may require removal for maintenance and shall
design and install suitable means for doing so.
An overhead travelling crane of 2 tonne capacity shall be provided in the workshop and stores building.
All overhead travelling cranes shall comply with the requirements of a recognised international standard,
and, shall be tested and certified prior to being put into service.
Crane supporting steelwork shall be designed in accordance with the relevant Eurocode or equivalent
standard.

All cranes shall be controlled remotely and via a pendant push button unit suspended from a trolley or
equivalent.
Each crane's hoist and controller shall have two speeds. The trolleys shall have three speeds: creep, slow,
and medium. Speeds shall be in each direction. All crane motors shall have reverse phase protection,
jogging and plugging controls for precision work and soft start/soft stop capability.
All chains, slings, shackles, and associated lifting accessories shall be tested and certified prior to being put
into service.
6.11. Spare Parts
The EPC Contractor shall submit the Recommended Spare Parts List and Consumables List for purchase by
the Owner under the Contract and pursuant to Clause 11 of the Contract. The scope of the spare parts shall
cover all equipment not covered under the LTSA and balance of plant items and assemblies, excluding the
plant covered under the LTSA. The EPC Contractor shall provide an estimate of yearly consumption of the
routine maintenance spare parts. The Owner may select from the list the scope of spares to be purchased
under this Contract pursuant to Clause 11 of the Contract.
The EPC Contractor shall supply consumable spare parts for 2 years operation, based on prudent operation
and maintenance of Plant. The list of the consumable spares and the unit price shall be provided.
Appendix E Plant System Categories for Spare Parts provides a list of the plant system categories to be
covered.
6.12. Fire protection and detection facilities)
The fire protection facilities shall be designed, installed and tested in accordance with NFPA requirements
and recommendations. In particular, the requirements of NFPA 850 shall apply to the design of the Plant.
The fire system shall also comply in all respects with the requirements of all local requirements and
standards including the requirements of the Royal Omani Police (ROP), including the use of ROP approved
design and supervision consultants for fire detection and protection systems.
The EPC Contractor shall conduct a risk assessment study and fire protection design report for the Plant.
This report shall detail the design criteria and calculations for the proposed fire protection system.
Reference to the relevant clauses of the applicable codes and standards shall be provided for each design
parameter. The fire protection design report shall include for the classification of all hazardous areas.
6.12.1. Fire detection and alarm
An automatic and manually activated fire alarm system shall be provided to protect personnel and equipment
within all buildings and areas of the plant. A central fire alarm control and indicating panel shall be provided.
All system fire alarm and fault conditions shall be clearly reported at this panel. The panel shall be at a
convenient ground level location to be agreed with the Owner, accessible to the fire brigade and have
indicators denoting the various zones protected. If not located within the Control Room, all signals shall be
repeated to the Control Room.
Operation of a manual alarm call point or activation of an automatic detector shall cause an evacuation alarm
in the building of origin.
An early warning smoke detection system shall be provided to cover the engine building, Control Room,
control and electrical equipment rooms as a minimum requirement. Workshops, stores, and administration

buildings shall be protected by automatic wet pipe sprinkler systems. Offices canteen and corridors shall be
provided with hose reels and extinguishers as part of the overall fire protection system.
6.12.2. Fire water pumping system
The fire water pumping system shall provide the source of water to the site fire hydrant ring main system,
from which all fire fighting water supplies shall be derived.
The fire water pumping system shall contain one electrically driven pump and one diesel driven pump. Each
pump shall be complete with an automatic starting system and shall be capable of providing the design
hydraulic demand of the system. The diesel pump shall act as a standby to the electric pump. An
electrically driven jockey pump shall be provided to maintain pressure within the ring main system.
A control panel in the fire pump house shall be provided to facilitate maintenance and to allow the pumps to
be controlled both manually and automatically. The operation of the system shall follow the requirements
detailed in NFPA 20.
6.12.3. Fire water ring main
A fire water ring main system, based on NFPA 24, shall be provided. The ring main shall be arranged as a
grid or ring system. The ring main shall be buried and divided into sections by accessible isolation valves so
that any damage to one section of the ring main shall not compromise the fire fighting capability of the
system. The underground pipe material shall be either plastic or cast iron piping with protective coating and
cement lining. Normal carbon steel pipes shall not be used underground due to corrosion.
6.12.4. Fire water hydrants
Fire hydrants shall be provided throughout the Works. All buildings and structures shall be within reach of
hose streams from at least two hydrants. Each hydrant shall be provided with a cabinet containing a hose,
fittings, tools and necessary equipment to operate the hydrant.
Hydrant and hose systems within buildings shall be provided. In buildings of more than one storey, wet
risers supplied from the fire water ring main shall be provided at suitable locations.
6.12.5. Portable fire extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers shall be located at strategic points throughout the plant. The classification of each
plant area with regard to the type, number, capacity and location of portable fire extinguishers shall be
detailed in the fire protection design report.
6.12.6. Water deluge systems
The design water application rate shall be in accordance with the relevant codes and shall be suitable for the
risk protected areas of the Works.
6.13. General mechanical requirements
6.13.1. Provision for handling
Parts subject to wear or which require inspection or repair shall be accessible and capable of reasonably
convenient removal for replacement or repair.
Equipment shall be arranged to allow safe access for condition monitoring.

6.13.2. Protection of moving parts
All moving parts where accessible to personnel shall be protected and suitably guarded. All guards shall be
designed to facilitate easy removal.
6.13.3. Balancing
All rotating parts of pumps, fans, motors and drives shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
6.13.4. Utility stations
The EPC Contractor shall install utility stations at appropriate points throughout the site. Each station shall
provide compressed air, potable water and power outlets for single phase and 3 phase equipment. The
location of the stations shall be agreed with the Owner.
6.13.5. Painting
The preparation of surfaces and painting shall be suitable for the operating environment specified.
After all machining, forming and welding has been completed, all steelwork surfaces to be painted shall be
thoroughly prepared and cleaned prior to any painting, in accordance with the EPC Contractors approved
procedure
The colours of the primer, intermediate and finishing coats of paint shall be easily distinguishable from each
other. The final colours and identification systems for the equipment and pipework shall be generally in
accordance with accepted industry practice and agreed with the Owner.
6.13.6. Pumps (general)
All pumps shall be designed to provide the required output against all losses within the system. The EPC
Contractor shall match the selected pump characteristics to the relevant system to achieve the highest pump
efficiency and reliability.
All pumps shall be provided with suction strainers, inlet and outlet pressure gauges, check valves at pump
discharge, isolating valves and appropriate drains and vents. Strainers shall be provided with differential
pressure indicating switches.
6.13.7. Fans (general)
Fans shall be electrically driven and have a high aerodynamic efficiency exhibiting a stable operating
characteristic free from stall. To provide protection, all fans shall be fitted with a suitable grill upstream of the
impeller. Further, guards shall be fitted around all rotating parts to adequately protect personnel.
The arrangement of fans shall make them readily accessible for both maintenance and replacement.
6.13.8. Valves
All valves shall be of an agreed design to international standards and manufacture and those of a similar
make, size and type shall be interchangeable with another where practicable. Valves may be supplied to the
EPC Contractors standard or other international standards.

The EPC Contractor shall provide new, good quality and non-leaking valves and check-valves. Leak tests of
valves shall be undertaken by the EPC Contractor and its sub-contractors. Test results shall be made
available to the Owner.
All isolating valves shall be capable of being locked in both the open and closed positions for the purposes of
plant isolation. All valves shall be fitted with position indicators so that it may be readily established whether
they are open or closed.
Valves equipped with hand-wheels shall be arranged so that rotating the hand-wheel in a clockwise direction
shall close the valve. Hand-wheels shall be marked with the words open and shut with the relevant arrow
to indicate the direction of rotation.
Valves shall not be installed in an inverted position unless agreed. All valves required for the regular
operation and maintenance of the plant shall be readily accessible from permanent platforms.
Suitable lifting points shall be provided on heavy valves or valve components to facilitate lifting for
maintenance.
All parts, particularly seats and discs, which are subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration which
require adjustment, inspection or repair, shall be accessible and capable of reasonably convenient removal
when required. All valve internals, with the exception of certain butterfly and small bore valves, shall be
capable of being removed with the valve body in position.
Valves subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration shall have Stellite or agreed equivalent seats and
trim.
High pressure isolating valves shall be arranged in tandem. Two valves in series shall also be provided for
drains, vents and sample lines. All test points and pressure gauge connections shall be provided with
double isolating valves.
All isolating valves shall be capable of being operated from floor level. Where valves are located in pits or
enclosures deemed to be confined spaces, extended operating spindles or similar devices shall be provided.
6.13.9. Safety and relief valves
Safety and relief valves shall be installed where appropriate and where it is conceivable that the actual
pressure could exceed the design pressure under any possible circumstance. Safety valves shall be sized
and selected for the duty intended in accordance with a recognised code of practice, be constructed of
materials suitable for the medium to be handled, and certified as acceptable in accordance with the relevant
codes and standards.
Each safety and relief valve shall be supplied with a test / calibration certificate issued by the approving
authorities and shall be subject to the Owners agreement. The set pressure shall be clearly marked or
tagged on the valve.
Isolating valves shall not be installed on either the inlet or outlet piping. Discharges shall be directed to a
safe location.
6.13.10. Pipework
All pipe systems shall be inspected and hydrostatically tested in accordance with the requirements of the
EPC Contractors applicable design and construction procedures. The design and installation of pipe

systems shall such that the pipes are adequately supported and have sufficient means of venting and
draining.
Pipe system layout shall be arranged such that equipment and sections of pipework can be removed without
major disturbance to adjacent pipework.
Pipe ends during transport and construction shall be protected from external damage and sealed against
ingress of dirt.
The cutting of floor or roof beams or reinforcement of concrete for the fixing of pipe supports shall not be
permitted.
6.13.11. Locks
All isolating equipment including valves, switchgear, cubicles and hand switches as appropriate shall be
suitable for being padlocked.

7. Electrical Specification
7.1. General
The transmission system voltage for the project is 132 kV. The EPC Contractor may choose all other voltage
levels within the Plant from the levels recommended in IEC 60038 subject to any local requirements of the
Owner. The normal voltage ranges shall be 10 per cent.
In accordance with section 2.1, two options shall be offered. In Option A, the Plant shall be provided with not
less than a four (4) step-up transformers to connect to the Tibat grid sub-station. The maximum number of
step-up transformers that can connect from the Plant to the Tibat grid sub-station shall not exceed six (6)
due to space restrictions. Power Unit Blocks shall be connected through a suitable medium voltage
switchboard to a step-up transformer. Power Unit Blocks connected to a step-up transformer shall be of
identical capacity. For Option B, the configuration shall provide for the required number of generators to be
banked at Gen kV and connected to Tibat grid sub-station using four step-up transformers rated to support
full output of the plant with one step-up transformer out of service. In the 132 kV Tibat grid substation, the
132 kV incoming transformer bays will be provided and operated by the Licensed Transmission System
Operator. Only emergency manual tripping and protection tripping from the Plant control room, with proper
interlocks will be allowed. The plants own generator circuit breakers shall be used for the purposes of
generator synchronisation. The plant shall not use the generator step-up 132 kV circuit breakers of the
Licensed Transmission System Operator for synchronisation. The Licensed Transmission System Operator
will provide facilities to synchronise across its 132 kV outgoing feeder circuit breakers.
The auxiliary power for the facility for power generation shall be derived from the Plants internal electrical
system. The auxiliary power for the facility for power generation shall be derived from the Plants internal
electrical system. Equipment connected to the 132 kV system shall have an impulse voltage level and a
prospective fault withstand as required by the Owner. The impulse voltage levels for equipment connected
at other voltages shall be in line with the requirements of IEC 60071. The EPC Contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring that all electrical equipment in the Plant shall have a fault capability adequate for the
system to which it is connected.
All plant and equipment shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under such sudden variations of
load and voltage as may be met under working conditions, including those due to starting loads, transient
short circuit, internal and external fault conditions
The design and installation shall be carried out so as to minimize the risk of outbreak of fire and
consequential damage. Where possible materials used shall not support combustion.
The EPC Contractor shall designate a hazardous area classification to each area where gas may be present
under normal or abnormal operating conditions. Where electrical equipment is located within a designated
hazardous area it shall have a degree of protection appropriate to the area classification.
Capability curves for the dual fuel driven generator shall be submitted which shall demonstrate that the
generator, main connection system, and the associated cooling systems are adequately rated to transfer the
output of the engines over the complete range of loading conditions, grid voltage variations, operating modes
and ambient conditions.
The EPC Contractor shall carry out all electrical studies, including load flow; short circuit levels, protection
setting and co-ordination taking into account the technical requirements for transmission system interface.

The electrical auxiliaries AC and DC systems shall be designed to give adequate and reliable supplies to the
various items of plant, together with the necessary standby or duplicated supplies. As a general principle,
the failure of no single item of auxiliary plant shall result in the complete loss of unit electrical output. Plant
failures may result, at most, in a reduction of electrical output.
One engine in the plant shall continue running (on-load) under grid failure conditions and the essential
supplies system shall be capable of maintaining the supply to all instruments, controls and auxiliaries
required for the safe and reliable operation of the plant and equipment under all normal and abnormal
operating conditions. Where electrical equipment is essential to the continued running of the installation, the
associated auxiliary power supply systems shall be arranged to allow recovery from fault conditions and also
permit inspection and maintenance to be carried out without interference with normal operation.
The low voltage system shall be solidly earthed. The generator voltage system shall be earthed at the
neutral of the generator as described in the generator section below.
Protective relays and systems shall be provided to detect all credible faults on each item of plant and
equipment and their primary interconnections. In the event of unacceptable electrical system disturbances
occurring, the protection shall operate, as rapidly as possible, consistent with maintaining adequate
discrimination, to minimize damage to the plant and equipment and disturbance to the system as a whole.
Each protective scheme shall be designed so that it does not cause incorrect tripping of a circuit breaker if a
fault occurs outside the zone of protection covered by the scheme. A single protection failure should not
prevent fault clearance or cause plant tripping. The plant and equipment shall be capable of being controlled
under normal operation from the Central Control Room or locally.
Automatic and manually initiated synchronizing facilities backed up with check synchronizing circuits shall be
provided. Synchronizing equipment shall operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the automatic excitation
control and the respective engine speed governing equipment. Synchronizing shall be carried out at the
generator circuit breaker.
As a minimum, the EPC Contractor shall undertake the electrical system studies listed below. The results of
these studies shall be provided in report format for review and comment by the Owner.
The design of the electrical power system infrastructure shall be based upon the results of these studies.
The Generator shall ensure that numbering and nomenclature of high voltage apparatus will be in
accordance with the plant identification system of the RAEC Code.
7.2. Cable sizing calculations
The continuous current rating sizing calculations for all HV & MV cables shall be based on IEC 60287 /
62067 and shall verify the short circuit capacity of the cabling. The sizing calculations for all LV power cables
shall be based upon the requirements of IEC 60227/60502.
7.3. Auxiliary supplies
The EPC Contractor shall determine the design of the auxiliary power system; comprising unit transformers
and/or station transformers. Based on the proposed design the EPC Contractor shall determine the
requirement for a back-up MV supply from the local public distribution network.
The auxiliary system shall provide a suitable level of redundancy to ensure that the failure of a single item of
plant does not cause a loss of generation.

7.4. Load flow and fault studies
Studies shall be carried out to determine the voltage profile for the Plant based upon the full range of working
conditions, to ensure that they remain within acceptable limits. Studies shall also be undertaken to determine
the maximum and minimum fault levels that shall occur at various points on the power system network. The
anticipated fault levels and running currents shall be used in the load-flow and fault level studies to
determine equipment service and fault ratings.
7.5. Transient and dynamic stability studies
Studies shall be carried out to determine the transient stability during grid fault conditions and the Critical
Clearance Times and the Fault Ride Through capability of each generating unit.
7.6. Earthing studies
Studies shall be undertaken in accordance with BS 7671, BS7430, and IEEE Std 80, as a minimum, to
design the earthing system for the plant and determine the following:
Soil resistivity measurement and analysis and derivation of a multilayer soil resistivity model at the
substation.
Safety criteria
Conductor sizing and earthing system resistance
Derivation of the earth fault and grid currents.
Earth potential rise
Touch, step and transfer potentials
Lightning protection earthing calculations.
These studies shall take account of the interface with the earthing system that shall be installed at the
substation, which is connected via the transmission line overhead earth wires.
The earthing studies shall be undertaken based upon the earth fault currents expected from the development
in order to determine conductor and connection sizes and to determine touch and step potentials and earth
potential rise etc.
7.7. Protection coordination studies
The EPC Contractor shall determine the protection philosophy for the station, taking into account the
technical requirements listed elsewhere in this document. The EPC Contractor shall also undertake a
protection co-ordination study to determine the optimum settings for the protection relays and systems. This
shall take account of the interfaces with the substation protection system at their substation and the
requirements of the Grid Code. This study shall derive settings for all of the protection relays installed on the
plant and provide a separate setting sheet for each relay listing the settings to be applied. These settings
shall ensure discrimination is achieved where possible to ensure only the faulted section on the power
system is isolated in the event of a fault.
7.8. Insulation coordination studies
The EPC Contractor shall undertake insulation co-ordination studies in accordance with IEC 60071 which
take account of the following:
Temporary over-voltage resulting from HV earth faults

Temporary over-voltage resulting from LV earth faults
Temporary over-voltage resulting from load-rejection and short-term unearthing of the Site
Transient over-voltages resulting from lightning impulses, originating from the external network.
Switching transient over-voltages resulting from fault and fault clearing at HV and MV: point-on-wave
Switching transient over-voltages resulting from load rejection and point-on-wave.
Switching transient over-voltages resulting from transformer energisation.
7.9. Lightning protection studies
The EPC Contractor shall undertake a study to assess the risks and provide a suitable lightning protection
system and design in accordance with IEC 62305.
7.10. Generator and excitation system
The generator shall be of an established design having a proven record of reliability for similar applications.
The generator shall comply with the requirements of the relevant sections of IEC60034 and any local
requirements, and shall use air as the coolant, with suitable filters. Bidders shall supply capability curves for
the proposed generators.
The generator insulation systems shall be Class 155(F), in accordance with IEC62114, but the relevant
temperature rise shall not exceed the limits for Class 130(B).
The generator shall be capable of supplying its rated real power output at nominal voltage and at a power
factor between the following limits: 0.80 power factor lagging and 0.95 power factor leading. The generator
shall be of open air-cooled inlet filtered type.
The generator shall be capable of operating at its maximum continuous rating (MCR), at rated frequency, at
a voltage that may vary between the limits stipulated in the Grid Code. The generator and prime mover shall
also be capable of supplying the rated output, at rated voltage and power factor, at a frequency that may
vary between the extreme limits stipulated in the Grid Code for the stipulated duration.
Bearing and oil pipes shall be electrically insulated to prevent circulating currents. It shall be possible to test
the insulation without having to dismantle the bearing. An earthing brush, of a proven design, running on the
generator shaft shall be provided.
The generator shall be designed to withstand, without failure in accordance with IEC 60034, the forces
experienced during the following conditions:
1) Three phase short-circuit fault, with zero impedance, applied at the generator terminals;
2) Line-to-line fault, with zero impedance, applied at the generator terminals; and
3) Out of phase synchronism to the distribution network and with the voltage 120out of phase.
The stator winding shall be star connected. The design shall ensure that no fretting of the coils in the slots
and the winding overhang occurs under normal operating conditions. The integrity of the stator winding shall
not require post-manufacture resin injection of the slot portion in order to achieve this requirement. Slot and
end winding discharge shall not occur and the design shall ensure that slot wedge tightness and radial
pressure on the coils is maintained to ensure satisfactory operation for the life of the plant. It shall be
possible to re-tighten slot wedges if required. No re-tightening of the end-winding clamping between major
maintenance overhauls shall be required.

The generator end shields at both the turbine and collector ends shall be designed to prevent contaminant
ingress into the rotor and stator. Filters, seals and gaskets to be used on the end shields shall be heat and
oil resistant.
The generator shall be specifically designed to operate at 50 Hz and not be a 60 Hz design. In particular,
stator end windings, terminal connections and their support structures shall be designed such that the
natural vibration frequencies are well outside the forcing frequency of 100 Hz, and this shall be confirmed by
bump testing. There shall be no significant dusting of the end winding insulation indicating insulating fretting
and damage. The stator end windings shall be designed to last the design life of the generator without
failure.
The stator slot wedges shall be capable of withstanding the bursting force imposed during the most arduous
electrical short-circuit between adjacent coil connections of different phases.
Each coupling and its bolts shall be designed to withstand the forces that may be experienced at that
coupling without sustaining permanent deformation of components and without relative movement of the
coupling halves.
Journal bearings shall be readily accessible, adjustable and replaceable with minimal disturbance to
adjacent components.
All necessary measures shall be taken to prevent leakage of oil from bearing pedestals and pipe work under
all conditions of operation including shut down.
Arrangements shall be provided for the local indication of the temperature and flow of oil from each bearing
pedestal.
Instrumentation shall be provided to monitor the temperature of the generator major components, which, as
a minimum, shall include the following:
Stator winding
Stator core
Bearings
Cooling media to and from the stator and rotor cooling systems
Rotor
Shorted turns in the rotor winding
These shall be wired back to the control room and shall alarm on high temperature
A neutral earthing system shall be provided for the generator through an appropriately rated resistor. The
earthing system shall limit the generator neutral current under fault conditions to suit system design limits.
Special tools for assembling and dismantling the generator, including jacks, slings, lifting beams, skids, shaft
extensions, shall be provided.
The excitation system for the generator shall be of the brushless type having a permanent magnet pilot
exciter. It shall comply with the requirements of IEC60034 and shall also comply with any particular
requirements for the local 132 kV network and provide facilities to support black start of the plant and
connection to the 132kV system via a single generator / step-up configuration. The equipment shall operate
reliably and shall not impose restrictions on the availability of the generator due to excitation equipment
faults or malfunctions.

The excitation system and equipment shall be complete with fast response continuously acting automatic
voltage regulator having; no dead band, standby manual excitation control equipment with auto-following and
auto-transfer facilities, monitoring and fault identification unit, limiters and stabilizers, field suppression
equipment, protective devices, dedicated instrument transformers and all control facilities to enable the
excitation equipment to be operated from both local and remote positions.
The excitation system of the Power Unit generator shall be provided with a fast-acting reactive power (MVAr)
under-excitation limiter so as to prevent the Power Unit generators MVAr output falling below its safe limit.
A power system stabiliser shall be incorporated in the excitation system of each Power Unit generator.
The excitation control system shall include the following functionality:
Automatic and manual modes of operation and local and remote points of control;
Manual mode of operation shall be provided by closed loop control of the field current;
Fault tolerant behaviour with bumpless fail over and change over;
V/Hz limiter;
Over-excitation limiter;
Under-excitation limiter;
Power System Stabiliser
Manual excitation control shall be subjected to over and under excitation limiters as for automatic
voltage regulation;
Automatic excitation run-up;
Rapid de-excitation by provision of field suppression equipment;
Reactive power compensation.
A static excitation system having an equivalent or superior performance would be considered.
7.11. Generator main connections
The main connections between the generator and the generator circuit breaker shall be by cables. The main
generators to step-up transformers connections shall have a short-time current rating determined by the
higher of the fault contributions from the generator and the system.
7.12. Transformers
7.12.1. Main Transformer
The EPC Contractor shall provide a two winding type generator transformer suitably rated to match the
output of the associated generator(s) over the designed voltage and power factor ranges, over the entire
tapping range. The rating of the diesel generator transformer shall be selected such that it will always exceed
the capability of the connected generator(s) throughout the entire range of the Site ambient temperatures.
The EPC Contractor shall nominate in the proposal the cooling classification proposed for the generator
transformer.
The capacity of any cooling system shall be such that the transformer can be operated at full-load with one
set of cooler fans out of service. The maximum hot spot temperature under all site and operational conditions
shall be 98C.

The transformer shall have an on-load tap changer with the tapping range selected to meet the voltage and
reactive power requirements of the network. Tap position shall be shown in the control room. The tap
changer shall be fitted with a position indicator and an operation counter that can be read at the transformer.
As a minimum requirement, the transformer shall be provided with the following auxiliary equipment:
Gas, oil level low and oil surge protection relay (Buchholz) fitted in connection between the main tank
and the conservator;
Tap-changer gas and oil surge protection relay, if separate to the main tank;
Main tank pressure relief device(s);
Tap-changer pressure relief device, if separate to the main tank;
Top oil and winding temperature indicators, alarms and protection trips;
Conservator oil level indicator and alarms;
Marshalling and control cubicle;
HV and LV cable box;
On-line condition monitoring equipment;
Cartridge type conservator silica gel breather;
Dehydrating breather for OLTC tank;
Lifting lugs;
Jacking lugs;
HV surge arrester mounting brackets; and
Rating and terminal marking plates.
The transformer and its cooling system shall be designed to minimise operating costs over the design life of
the plant.
7.12.2. Auxiliary transformers
All station auxiliary transformers shall be rated to meet design requirements under the specified ambient
conditions and comply with the latest edition of IEC60076 or IEC60726 as appropriate and shall have off-
circuit tap-changers fitted with locking facilities to allow the tap-changers to be locked in position.
Oil immersed transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation. Units having a rating greater than 1 MVA
shall be free breathing, smaller units may be sealed. Both types shall have pressure relief devices. Free
breathing units that have a rating greater than 1000 kVA shall also be fitted with a conservator, Buchholz
relays and dehydrating breathers. Oil immersed auxiliary transformers shall have ONAN cooling.
Dry type transformers shall be of the vacuum cast resin distribution transformer type with at least Class F
insulation mounted in vertical cubicles for use indoors in clean dry areas. Other forms of dry type
construction may be offered if the minimum thermal classification of the insulation is Class F. Alternatively
non-flammable liquid immersed transformers (LNAN) may be offered.
7.12.3. Instrument transformers
All current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC60185. Current transformers that are
critical for the correct performance of protection devices under severe overload shall also comply with
IEC60044-6.

All voltage transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC60186. Primary windings shall be
connected to the switchgear through renewable fuses of agreed type to IEC60269 or IEC60282 and shall be
readily accessible. Secondary fuses shall be provided on each voltage transformer and secondary windings
shall be earthed at one point only through a link in an accessible position.
7.13. Metalclad Switchgear
7.13.1. General
The design of the equipment shall ensure easy operation and maintenance and shall prevent accidental
contact with live metal and avoid the spread of fire or damage from short circuits or other causes. All
medium voltage equipment shall include fully rated earthing facilities to provide safe maintenance access.
Equipment to be installed indoors shall have ingress protection to IP 41; outdoor equipment shall be to IP 65.
All enclosures containing electrical equipment shall be provided with thermostatically controlled anti-
condensation heaters arranged to operate at low voltage ac.
All enclosures shall be provided with an earth terminal of not less than 12 mm diameter to which shall be
connected all internal apparatus, screens and supporting metal, and which shall be connected externally to
the general earthing system.
A steel cabinet with doors and locks equipped with a complete set of spanners to fit every nut and bolt on the
circuit breakers along with any special tools or maintenance equipment necessary shall be provided.
A key cabinet capable of accommodating all padlocks and keys for the switchboard and padlocks of an
approval type for all padlocking positions shall be provided for each switchboard.
7.13.2. Circuit breakers
Circuit breaker operating mechanisms shall be trip free with anti pumping devices.
Circuit breakers and voltage transformers shall be fully withdrawable for isolation and maintenance purposes
and shall be lockable in the isolated position. Suitable circuit breaker handling equipment shall be provided
where necessary. Withdrawal shall not expose live parts.
Low voltage circuit breakers shall be air break, horizontally withdrawable with independent manual spring
closing and electrical trip release. Withdrawal shall not expose live parts.
7.13.3. Auxiliary switches
All necessary auxiliary switches and mechanisms for indication, protection, control, interlocking, supervisory
and other functions shall be supplied with each circuit breaker, contactor, isolating device and earthing
device. All auxiliary switches including spares shall be wired up to a terminal board on the fixed portion of
the switchgear.
7.13.4. Control
Switchgear shall normally be controlled from the control room. However, local control at the switchgear shall
be also provided for maintenance purposes. Lockable rotary local/remote selector switches shall be
provided.
Where electrically held-in contactors are used, individual transformers shall be fitted to each circuit unit. The
primary winding shall be connected via suitably rated fuses to the busbars. One side of the secondary

winding shall be earthed via a removable link, the other side of the secondary winding shall be provided with
a suitably rated fuse. An earthed screen shall be provided between the primary and secondary windings.
7.13.5. Isolating devices
For maintenance or other purposes, all circuit breakers, contactors and main circuit fuses shall be connected
to the busbars through isolating devices of agreed design. The isolating devices shall be arranged for
operation while the busbars are live and while no current is passing.
Isolators shall be capable of carrying continuously the rated load current of the circuit and the fault current for
the time specified. On-load isolators shall be capable of making a current equivalent to the specified
prospective fault current as limited by the cut-off characteristics of the largest fuse with which it may be
associated.
7.13.6. Interlocks and shutters
Safety interlocks shall be provided to ensure correct system operation, to avoid unsafe switching conditions
and to ensure safe isolation for maintenance. Switchgear mechanisms shall be provided with means of
locking in the isolated and earthed positions.
A set of metallic busbar and circuit shutters shall be provided to cover each 3-phase group of fixed isolating
contacts. Each set shall be capable of being padlocked closed.
Where shutters are required to be opened for test purposes an integral device shall be provided for retaining
(but not padlocking) the shutters in the open position. The moving portion of the apparatus shall
automatically cancel this device.
7.14. Medium voltage (MV) switchgear
7.14.1. General
All MV switchgear shall comply with the requirements of the relevant parts of IEC62271-100 and IEC60298.
MV switchboards shall comprise metal-clad vacuum or SF6 type switchgear, with circuit breakers for the
incomers, interconnector circuits and feeder circuits together with contactor units or circuit breakers for the
motor drives and transformer feeder circuits. Cable and busbar earthing facilities shall be provided.
Each switchboard shall be readily extensible and space shall be provided to allow the future installation of
two circuit breaker cubicles at both ends of each switchboard, i.e. four future cubicles per switchboard. A
clear side access space of one metre shall be provided at each end of the fully extended switchboard.
It shall be possible to reset trip relays from outside the cubicles.
7.15. Generator voltage switchgear
Generator circuit breakers shall be designed for the receipt of suitably rated cables
The circuit breakers shall be designed, manufactured and tested for generator switching duty in accordance
with the requirements of the standards for 50 Hz application.
Isolating and earthing switches shall be provided to permit adequate and safe maintenance of main plant
and equipment to be carried out, including all connected equipment.

7.16. Low voltage switchgear
7.16.1. General
Low voltage switchboards shall be three-phase and neutral with four-pole switching devices on the incoming
circuits and any busbar coupling circuits. Other low voltage switching devices may be three-pole with a solid
neutral connection through accessible bolted links to each star point to suit contractor design.
Low voltage switchgear shall be Form 4 Type 5 in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60439-1.
7.16.2. Busbars and connections
Busbars and electrical connections between several pieces of apparatus forming an item of equipment shall
be of electrolytic copper and they shall comply with IEC 60439-2. Busbars shall be protected against
atmospheric corrosion by heat shrink sleeves.
7.16.3. Contactors and motor starters
Contactors for motor control shall be suitable for direct-on-line motor starting and shall be capable of
withstanding without damage the motor stalled current until the associated protective device operates.
Contactors shall be designed for Type 2 co-ordination to ISO 60947-4.
Motor starters shall be equipped as follows:
a) high rupturing capacity fuses
b) electrically held contactor with control-circuit transformer
c) local/remote selector switch
d) ammeter
e) stopped/running/fault indicating lamps
f) thermal overload relay with contacts for remote indication.
It shall be possible to reset trip relays from outside the cubicles.
7.16.4. Fuse gear
Composite fuse and switch equipment may comprise either a fuse-switch unit with integral fuses, or switch-
fuse units in which the air break switch and the connections from it up to the associated fuse shall be
designed to minimize the possibility of a fault. The equipment shall comply with the requirements of IEC
60947-3 and ensure that the fuse is isolated when it has to be changed.
Switch-fuse units shall be arranged with the switch on the busbar side of the fuse. Fuses shall be of the high
rupturing capacity cartridge type complying with the requirements of IEC 60269.
7.16.5. Miniature circuit breakers
The dc distribution boards associated with the batteries and LV AC distribution boards shall preferably be
equipped with miniature circuit breakers on outgoing circuits. They shall be single, double or triple pole as
appropriate to the circuit and shall have sealed operating and overload mechanisms and locking facilities.
7.17. Battery systems
Main dc systems shall be provided and shall be rated to supply all the essential load and control
requirements of the Plant, including all dc supplies for safe run-down and cool-down. The EPC Contractor

shall choose the voltage levels from standard levels. Each dc system shall comprise one set of batteries and
two chargers. On loss of output voltage from any battery charger, the associated battery shall supply the
load on the dc system without a break in supply. The battery shall supply the dc load for sufficient time for
the load to be transferred to a battery charger, i.e. by restoration of ac supply to the charger in question, or
by transfer of the battery and loads to the alternative battery charger.
The batteries shall generally have both poles fully insulated and shall be suitable for unearthed operation. A
full set of battery test accessories shall be provided, mounted in a box.
The station dc distribution boards shall be equipped with double pole circuit breakers for each incoming,
interconnecting and outgoing circuit.
Each battery charger shall be provided with local alarms and instrumentation and provision for remote
indication of a common alarm on the DCS. Each battery charger shall also be equipped with ac input and dc
output circuit breakers.
The batteries shall be rated for a period of 2 hours when supplying 125 per cent of the maximum continuous
load of its associated equipment.
7.18. Black Start / Emergency Generator
The black start unit shall be sized to enable automatically the auxiliaries of a selected main unit and the
relevant station auxiliaries to be energised to enable black starting of the Plant. The selected main unit or
units shall be capable of energising the relevant step transformer and energising the 132 kV substation in an
unloaded condition. Subsequently the 132 kV substation outgoing circuits will be energised, the generation
being matched to the step load demands.
The black start / emergency generator shall be automatically start and supply the station auxiliaries on loss
of the Plant output.
7.19. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systems
A secure ac power supply system shall be provided for the operation of control and instrumentation
equipment including the DCS operator stations and communication devices, e.g. network switches. The
secure supply shall be derived from two inverters fed from separate dc systems with independent battery
back-up supplies. Each complete system shall be rated to supply the complete control and instrumentation
load of the associated plant.
The performance of the inverter shall be compatible with the requirements of all connected loads in respect
of steady state and transient output voltage variation, frequency variation, harmonic distortion, etc.
The short circuit performance of the inverter shall be adequate to ensure correct fuse discrimination on short
circuit of the outgoing circuit protected by the highest rated distribution fuse. The duration of the associated
voltage depression must not be sufficient to affect the operation of the plant, other than that associated with
the faulty circuit.
The control scheme shall automatically transfer the ac load from the inverter to a back-up supply on inverter
failure. The back-up supply shall be provided from a LV emergency supplies switchboard via a transformer
and static switch. Operation of the above transfer shall not affect the output of the Plant. Facilities shall also
be provided for transferring back to the inverter without affecting the Plant output. A manual bypass switch
capable of switching between the incoming supply and inverter output without a break in the supply shall
also be provided. Faults in the UPS shall be alarmed on the DCS.

The UPS equipment shall be rated for a standby period of 2 hours when supplying 125 per cent of the
maximum continuous load of its associated distribution board.
7.20. Protective system
Protective devices shall be provided to disconnect faulty circuits with speed and certainty, without
interference with healthy circuits. Each protective scheme shall be designed so that it does not cause
incorrect tripping of a circuit breaker if a fault occurs outside the zone of protection covered by the scheme.
Each protection scheme shall generally be arranged in two independent groups according to the main/back-
up protection principle.
The types of protection schemes required shall include:
Generator transformer protection:
- high speed transformer biased differential (87GT);
- HV overcurrent (50/51);
- HV earth fault (50N/51N);
- HV restricted earth fault (64REF);
- HV standby earth fault (51G);
- LV earth fault (50/51N) for open generator circuit breaker;
- oil level low (71)
- Buchholz relay (63TCB-T/63TCB-A);
- pressure relief valve (63PR);
- oil temperature alarm and trip (49OT);
- winding temperature alarm and trip (49WT);
- over voltage relay (59); and
- under frequency (81).
Generator protection with one hundred percent (100%) redundancy:
- generator differential (87G);
- voltage dependent overcurrent (51V/27R);
- thermal overload stator and rotor (49);
- stator earth fault ninety five percent (95%) protected (59N);
- stator earth fault one hundred percent (100%) protected ( (64F3 {third harmonic under
voltage relay} combined with 59N);
- rotor earth fault (64G);
- sensitive directional earth fault (67N);

- neutral displacement (59N);
- pole slip/out of step (78);
- over voltage (59);
- under voltage (27UV);
- over frequency (81O) (Stage 1 & Stage 2);
- under frequency (81U) (Stage 1 & Stage 2);
- under impedance/back-up impedance (21);
- field failure/loss of excitation (40);
- over excitation V/Hz (24);
- negative phase sequence (46);
- low forward power relay(37);
- reverse power (32R);
- inadvertent energising (50/27);
- generator circuit breaker failure (50CBF);
- voltage balance (60);
- check synchronising (25); and
- out of step protection (78).

Station transformer protection:
- high speed biased differential (87UT);
- HV overcurrent (50/51/51N);
- LV restricted earth fault (64REF);
- LV standby earth fault (51G);
- Buchholz relay (63BG/BT);
- pressure relief valve (63PT);
- oil temperature alarm and trip (26); and
- winding temperature alarm and trip (49).
All relays and protection schemes shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate parts of the
IEC60255. All relay cases shall prevent the ingress of dust and shall meet the requirements of IEC60529,
classification IP 50, category 2
Electronic protection relays, of the programmable microprocessor type incorporating fault and transient
measurement memories, matrices for programming tripping sequences and auxiliary relays shall be

provided. The fault and transient measurement capabilities of the relays shall be used to provide a digital
fault-monitoring and disturbance recorder system which covers the entire Plant electrical system items,
including but not limited to:
- incomers and couplers of all main low voltage (LV) switchgear;
- all LV switchgear feeders except motor feeders (motor feeders shall be monitored via the
DCS); and
- all HV switchgear bays connected to the Plant;
Each relay or protection scheme shall be provided with an adequate number of indications to ensure that the
appropriate faulted phase, zone, etc. can be easily identified after a fault condition. Each indicator shall be
visible and capable of being reset without removing the relay cover. Indications shall only be given from the
protection activated by the fault. Each protection relay or protection scheme shall be provided with sufficient
output contacts of suitable rating to carry out the prescribed tripping functions, alarms, indication and fault
recorder functions and such supplementary signalling functions as may be necessary for the initiation of
automatic reclosing or automatic switching control, etc. In all cases, contacts intended for tripping duty shall
be designed so that they cannot inadvertently interrupt trip coil current.
All solid-state equipment shall be designed to withstand the impulse and high frequency test requirements
for Class III as specified in IEC60255-4.
Solid-state protection equipment that requires an independent low voltage dc supply shall preferably use
dc/ac/dc converter power packs for this purpose. Separate power packs are preferred for each individual
discriminative relay unit.
Adequate test facilities shall be provided at the front of the relay panel to enable the protection equipment to
be tested whilst the primary circuit is on load, without having to disturb any wiring.
Adequate facilities shall be provided to isolate all dc and ac incoming and outgoing circuits so that work may
be carried out on the equipment with complete safety to personnel and without loss of security in the
operation of the generating station.
All test equipment required for commissioning and routine testing of the offered protection equipment shall
be provided.
7.21. Motors
7.21.1. General
Motors shall comply with the requirements of IEC60034. Motor enclosures shall be IP 54 for indoor
application and IPW 55 for outdoor.
Motor windings shall be insulated with materials Class 155(F), in accordance with IEC62114, but the relevant
temperature rises shall not exceed the limits for Class 130(B).
All MV motors, LV motors required to operate outdoors, or motors that may be at standstill for relatively long
periods, shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of appropriate rating. The heaters shall be designed
for connection to a suitable low voltage supply and shall be energized when the motor is at standstill. A
separate heater terminal box and isolating facilities shall be provided for each motor.

7.21.2. Terminal arrangement
Terminal boxes shall be air insulated, totally enclosed and shall be designed to exclude the ingress of dust
and moisture. The arrangement of terminals and cable connections shall permit the motor to be
disconnected from the supply cable without damaging the seals, glands or connections.
Terminals for low voltage motors shall have insulating barriers between phases or poles.
MV motors shall have phase-segregated terminals and the terminal box and fittings shall not fail in a manner
hazardous to personnel in the event of an internal fault.
7.22. Earthing
7.22.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall supply an earthing grid for the entire plant that conforms to the relevant sections of
IEC 61000-5-2, IEC60364-5-54, IEEE 80 and IEEE 665. The EPC Contractor shall present calculations to
show that the proposed system complies with IEEE 80 and is safe in terms of touch, step and transferred
potential. There shall be separate direct connections to the station earth electrode from all low voltage,
medium voltage and high voltage system neutrals, and from the station main earthing bar. Test links shall
be provided.
The main earth bars within the Plant shall comprise annealed high conductivity bare copper strip or stranded
copper wire. Earth conductors installed directly into the ground shall normally be laid bare and the trench
back filled with fine topsoil. Where the soil is of hostile nature precautions must be taken to protect the earth
conductor.
TN-S earthing arrangements to BS7671 (IEC equivalent) shall be provided for the electrical distribution
system.
7.22.2. Equipment earthing
Metal parts of all equipment, other than those forming an electrical circuit, shall be directly connected to the
main station earth system via a single conductor. The arrangement of the main earth system shall be such
as to minimize the length of these connections.
Current transformers and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be earthed at one point only through
links situated in an accessible position.
Crane tracks shall be earthed at both ends to the main earth bar. In addition a separate earth wire and
brush shall be provided.
7.22.3. Structure earthing
The bases of each column in the Plant buildings structural steelwork shall be bonded together during
construction and shall also be connected to the station main earth bar. Structures for Site lighting shall be
located within the perimeter of the earth grid. No fixed low voltage equipment, with the exception of warning
or alarm buttons and intruder alarms, which shall be of the double insulation type, shall be erected outside
the perimeter of the earth grid.
Connections to apparatus and structures shall be made clear of ground level, preferably to a vertical face
and shall be protected against electrolytic corrosion.

7.22.4. Lightning protection
The buildings and open-air constructions shall be provided with a lightning protection system in accordance
to IEC 62305 for protection of all personnel and apparatus. Lightning shall not cause any disturbance in the
actual operation of the plant.
7.22.5. Indicating instruments
All indicating instruments shall be in accordance with the requirement of IEC60051.
Motor ammeters shall be capable of withstanding motor starting currents. Voltage operated instruments
shall be protected by a fuse on each pole of the circuit placed as close as possible to the voltage transformer
terminals.
7.23. Alarm equipment
Alarm equipment shall be provided on the plant control panel and shall be equipped with interface equipment
to allow transmission of each alarm to the CCR. The equipment shall be capable of acceptance and
resetting from the CCR.
Critical alarms i.e., those requiring urgent action by the operator, shall be hardwired from each alarm system
to the DCS.
7.24. Cabling
7.24.1. General
The cable installation to be provided under the Contract shall include all cables required for the supply,
control, indication and monitoring of all plant provided under this Contract. The installation shall be complete
with all cable terminations, cable trays, cable ladder racks, junction boxes, glands, ferrules, lugs, numbered
ferrules, cable markers, clips and all fixings, fittings, brackets, cleats, piping and accessories. The EPC
Contractor shall undertake all design studies for the electrical distribution cabling system.
Cable conductors shall be stranded high conductivity copper. The conductor cross section of each cable
shall be adequate for carrying the prospective fault current determined by the next relevant short circuit
protection device.
All cabling and wiring shall be of the flame retardant type to the latest IEC standards and during combustion
shall emit no halogen and produce minimal smoke. Cabling and wiring shall be designed and the installation
arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage. Cable shall be of the low the low smoke zero halogen
type.
The insulation of each conductor shall be identified throughout its length either by colour or embossed
numbers. The cable insulation shall include inhibiters for rodent protection.
Each cable shall be identified by a securely fixed fade-free and dirt resistant identification label adjacent to
the cable gland at each end of the cable. Single point earthing shall be used for all single core cables.
Cables shall be glanded at entry to each panel with suitable mechanical glands to meet manufacturer
recommendations.
For all equipment, conductors up to and including 2.5 mm
2
shall be terminated with agreed crimped
terminations. Conductors larger than 2.5 mm
2
shall use an agreed crimped termination

Cable and core unique identification shall be provided, and terminations to suit manufacturer
recommendations for terminal points.
The EPC Contractor shall submit for agreement full details of all loading on cables. No intermediate joints
shall be allowed in any length of cable without agreement.
7.24.2. Power cables
HV power cables shall be triple extruded, dry cured XLPE insulated with copper wire or metallic screen,
radial water Al or Cu solidly bonded to the outer sheath, longitudinal water sealing and PVC outer sheath
MV power cables shall be XLPE insulated, single core with aluminium armour, or multicore with steel-wire
armour, all sheathed with PVC as detailed above. Cables shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC60840,
IEC60502 and IEC60811.
LV power cables shall be 1000 V grade, XLPE insulated, single core with aluminium armour, or multicore
with steel wire armour, all sheathed with PVC. Cables shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC60502 and
IEC60811.
The outer sheath of all cables shall be dosed during manufacture with a UV inhibitor to provide maximum UV
protection.
All cables shall be procured with metal sheath protection against termites. Toxic sheaths are not permitted.
7.24.3. Control cables
All control cabling (except fibre optic cables) and wiring supplied under this Contract shall have copper
conductors, thermoplastic insulation and thermoplastic inner sheath and be provided with mechanical
protection to suit installation and vermin proofing requirements. When routed outside buildings or enclosures
and where no other overall mechanical protection is afforded, cables shall have galvanized steel wire armour
with a thermoplastic waterproof rodent protection oversheath.
Individually screened pairs or overall screened multicore cables shall be provided where it is necessary to
provide immunity from electro-magnetic interference.
No conductor smaller than 1 mm
2
shall be used for interconnecting cabling except in the case of telephone
type cables where conductors of section not less than 0.6 mm
2
may be used. C&I cables of less than 1 mm
2

cross-section shall be subject to approval by the Owner/Engineer and would only be considered in cases
where special cable termination methods requiring a smaller cross-section .
Where twin or quad make-up is required in any cable, the cores shall be uniformly twisted and the lays
arranged such that cross-talk is reduced to a minimum. Cable cores, twins, quads and individually screened
multi-pairs shall be colour coded. Each core of a multi-core cable shall be readily identified by a number
impressed into the insulation every 1000 mm.
All multicore control cables shall have approximately 20 per cent spare cores, but not less than two cores for
future use and terminals shall be provided for all cores.
Multicore pilot cables shall have copper conductors, thermoplastic insulation, thermoplastic inner sheath,
galvanized steel wire armour and thermoplastic sheath overall.

7.24.4. Cable screens and armouring
Cable screens and cable armouring shall be kept electrically separate, throughout the equipment installation.
This separation shall be maintained by the installation of an instrument clean earth system, which shall be
deliberately connected to the main plant earth system at one central point.
7.24.5. Cable installation
Where practical, cables shall be laid in cable subways, shafts, pipes, ducts and troughs. Cables shall be
neatly laid throughout with sufficient slack near the ends of cable runs to allow for disturbance during
maintenance or repair.
Where run on trays or racking, the cables shall be securely fastened at intervals of not more than one metre
with fittings to suit long term integrity and short circuit purposes.
Power cables and control cables shall be not run along the same route. Where this is not possible, the
cables shall be segregated as fully as possible. Precautions shall be taken to ensure physical contact does
not take place anywhere throughout the run.
Redundant cables (e.g. communication network cables) shall be installed over separate routes to minimise
the possibility of a common failure.
AC and DC cables, control, telephone, and computer cables shall be segregated, separated and grouped in
defined conditions according to the requirements of IEC 60364.
All ducts and covers shall be sealed after installation of cables.
Where cables are laid direct in ground they shall be buried to a depth of at least one metre. The base of the
trench shall be lined with sieved soft fill or fine washed sand to a depth of 100mm to form a bed for the cable.
After the cables have been laid they shall be covered with additional soft fill or sand to a level of 100 mm
above the top of the uppermost cable. All trenches so arranged shall have covering tiles laid over the
cables. All cable trenches shall be marked with durable location posts to agreement.
7.24.5.1. Cables laid in preformed trenches
Power cables laid in unfilled formed concrete or brick trenches shall be securely cleated to the trench side
wall in a manner to suit the cable system design, or on trays/racks.
7.24.5.2. Buried cable ducts and service sleeves
Approved Materials
Unplasticised PVC pipe: UPVC pipes for cable ducting and service sleeves shall comply with BS EN
1452-5:2000, BS 3506 Class C or BS 4660 or equivalent IEC standards. UPVC ducts and pipes shall
be joined together with spigot and socket joints unless agreed otherwise by the Owner;
Concrete pipes for service sleeves shall be in accordance with EN 1916. The concrete shall comply
with BRE Special Digest 1:2005 for sulphate resisting conditions. Pipes shall be flexible jointed;
Joints in the ducts shall be sealed with a proprietary joint sealing compound and jointing shall be carried
out as recommended by the duct manufacturer;
Vitrified clay pipes for cable conduits shall be suitable for high voltage oil filled cables, and be free from
any internal undulations, roughness or projections and shall have smooth radiuses internal edges at the

joints. The joints shall be of an agreed plastic type, flexible and self-aligning. Grooved cable conduits
shall be provided for splitting where split conduits are required for protection of existing services.
Excavation and Laying:
The ducts shall be laid in a trench of sufficient width to provide adequate working space on either side of
the ducts, and of such depth as to provide, after backfilling, a cover of not less than 1000 mm over the
collars;
The trench bottom shall be tamped and shall be blinded with a layer of sand or similar soft material not
less than 150 mm thick on which the ducts shall be laid;
The ducts shall be laid to the design profiles. The permitted maximum deviation shall be +150 mm in
line and level. However at terminals the deviation shall not exceed +50 mm on the centrelines;
Where the change in direction is not more than 30, t his may be achieved only by the use of bends and
fittings, otherwise inspection pits shall be provided;
Ducts shall be provided with either a bell mouth fitting at the terminals, or the conduit shall terminate 50
mm from the inner face of the terminal and a bell mouth shall be formed in the concrete wall or slab;
During laying of the ducts between inspection pits, a continuous length of nylon or pigmented
polypropylene draw cord of 5 kN breaking load shall be left in each duct to be used later with the
cleaning mandrel;
Each duct shall, after laying, be given a surround of sand or similar soft material not less than 300 mm
thick;
When ducts are laid under roads or hard standings they shall be embedded in concrete with 150 mm all
round for the length across the road/hard standing plus an additional 1.5 m on either side of the road;
Prior to concrete placement, all ducts and sleeves shall be inspected and agreed by the Owner to
ensure that they are properly spaced and enclosed;
In the proximity of foundations the ducts shall be encased in concrete;
The trench shall be backfilled with a layer of sand not less than 150 mm thick and then with suitable
material in layers not exceeding 200 mm and compacted;
150 mm wide in yellow or similar with Caution Electric Cable in English shall be placed between 100
mm and 225 mm below finished level over the line of the ducts.
Cleaning and identification of ducts
Immediately after backfilling the ducts shall be cleaned and proved in sections between inspection pits;
A mandrel shall be drawn through each duct. The diameter of the mandrel shall be no smaller than
5 mm less than the internal diameter of the duct. The EPC Contractor shall submit details of the
mandrel to the Owner for agreement. During this process a continuous PVC coated 15 gauge steel
draw wire to shall be threaded through each duct, properly secured, and left for future use;
The ends of each duct shall be plugged immediately after cleaning. Ingress of water and/or concrete
shall be prevented.
Inspection pits
An inspection pit shall be constructed at every junction and at every change of direction greater than
30;
The pits shall be so constructed as to avoid ingress of water, with walls of reinforced concrete or
brickwork resting on a reinforced concrete base. The internal dimensions of inspection pits shall be
greater than the minimum bending radius of the largest cable to be drawn through the pit. The top of the

inspection pit shall have a reinforced concrete slab of thickness to DIN 19580 in accordance with the
traffic application class;
A cast iron frame of a size agreed by the Owner shall be built into the top slab. A cast iron (or concrete)
cover to suitable for the duty and of a type which prevents ingress of water into the pit shall be provided.
The EPC Contractor shall submit details for the agreement of the Owner;
Four pairs of lifting keys shall be supplied for each type of cover;
The floor of the inspection pit shall slope to a sump;
The invert of the lowest duct at the point of entry into an inspection pit shall not be less than 150 mm
above the floor;
7.24.5.3. Cables laid direct in the ground
This method of installation shall only be accepted with the written agreement of the Owner.
Trenches shall be excavated to a depth such that a minimum of 800mm cover shall be provided over cables
laid in the trench. Filling in of trenches shall not be commenced before inspection and agreement of the
Owner.
The cables shall be laid direct in the ground in the following manner:
a) 150 mm minimum of builders fine and graded and washed sand shall be placed to form a bed for the
cables.
b) After cables have been laid they shall be covered with carefully compacted bedding sand in accordance
with the cable manufacturers recommendations taking into account the surface loading over the cable.
Mechanical compaction equipment shall not be allowed for this work.
c) Protective concrete covers shall be provided and installed.
d) Where in the opinion of the Owner, the soil on the site is unsuitable for backfilling, the EPC Contractor
shall arrange for the importation of suitable material.
e) Unless otherwise agreed, auxiliary cables shall be laid under the same covers as the power cables and
there shall be at least 150 mm of riddled sand between the two types of cable.
f) 150 mm wide Terri-tape or similar in yellow with Caution Electric Cable in English shall be laid above
the protective covers.
7.25. Lighting and small power installation
The lighting and small power installation shall be installed in accordance with BS7671 (IEC equivalent) and
cover the complete Plant and shall comprise:
Permanent lighting installations, emergency lighting systems, area floodlighting;
Small power socket outlets for plant areas, equipment and control rooms, office areas, maintenance and
testing areas, and domestic items; and
Secondary supplies to distribution boards, transportable and fixed equipment, welding plant,
environmental plant, and sump pumps.
7.25.1. Lighting
The main lighting installation shall be designed to give the IES recommended minimum levels of illumination
in such a manner as to ensure even lighting and to avoid glare. The level of illumination in the Local Control
Room(s) shall not be less than 100 lux under emergency conditions.

A section of the main lighting installation shall be operated as an emergency lighting scheme that shall be
automatically energized on failure of the electrical supply to normal lighting in the relevant area. Self-
contained emergency lights shall be used to indicate personnel exit points.
In areas where continued operation is necessary under emergency lighting conditions, the illumination level
shall be consistent with the continuity of such operation. In the remaining areas, including general access
areas, the level of shall ensure the safety of personnel at all times.
7.25.2. Small power
Three phase (for welding sets) and single phase socket outlets complying with IEC 60309 shall be installed
to give adequate coverage of all buildings and plant included in this specification.
7.25.3. Secondary distribution
Distribution boards shall be grouped together where suitable within a free standing totally enclosed cellular
cubicle type switchboard, or individual boards where required.
Lighting and small power final circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers. A minimum of
20 per cent of spare ways shall be provided. RCD protection shall be provided where appropriate for
personnel protection.

8. Control System Requirements
8.1. General requirements
The design of the control and instrumentation systems and components shall be consistent with the overall
availability, reliability and operational philosophies adopted for the Plant.
The design of the control and instrumentation systems shall conform to accepted industry practice for
generating units of this nature.
8.2. Codes and standards
Systems, equipment and components shall be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the
relevant NFPA, IEEE and IEC Standards. Other National or International Standards shall not be used without
the written approval of the Owner.
Control and instrumentation systems shall comply explicitly with the latest revision of the following standards.
IEC 61131-3 Programmable controllers Part 3: Programming languages
IEC 61508 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
systems
IEC 61511 Functional safety Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector
IEC 60654 Operating conditions for industrial-process measurement and control equipment
IEC 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment Electromagnetic
disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement
IEC 61000-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques
IEC 61000-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6: Generic standards
EN 50014 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres. General requirements
IEC 60079-14 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres. Electrical installations in
hazardous areas (other than mines)
BS 6739 Code of practice for instrumentation in process control systems: installation, design
and practice
ISA-5.1 Instrumentation symbols and identification
8.3. Design and operational requirements
Control and instrumentation equipment shall:
Ensure safe and efficient operation of the Plant by an optimum number of operators during normal on-
load plant operation within the technical limits of a Power Unit, Power Unit Block and the Plant as
applicable, as well as start-up/shutdown;
Be designed to operate satisfactorily over the full range of operating and ambient conditions of the plant.
This shall also include operation in hazardous areas where necessary;
Be designed to provide a high level of availability and reliability consistent with a power plant operating
with a high utilisation factor. This shall be achieved through the application of redundant systems with
automatic on-line change-over facility upon detection of a fault or failure of the operating unit and the
use of equipment well proven in similar applications. The control system design philosophy shall be
such that a single C&I component failure shall not result in the loss of complete generation of the Works
or the reduction in the Works capacity greater than that of a single generating Unit of the Works.

Use of failsafe design principles to provide Plant safety critical control and protection systems.
Triple modular redundant control systems (2-out-of-3 voting) or equivalent (e.g.1-out-of-2-diagnostic)
shall be provided for all plant safety critical control systems relating to gas and liquid fuel critical control
and shut-off schemes to meet the Safety Integrity Level (SIL) required for the particular application.
Utilise a high level of standardisation with regard to equipment selection and control logic design.
Have demonstrated satisfactory performance in similar applications for at least 3 years.
Be designed to maximise the level of automation provided for such Plant operations as start-up,
synchronising, loading, unloading and shutdown. The automated sequences shall be designed with a
view to optimise the start-up / shutdown times whilst maintaining the mechanical and thermal stresses
that the Power units are subjected to within allowable limits. The Plant shall be provided with a load
dispatch model which will be able to receive Dispatch Instructions/optimise the number of Power units
which require to be in service at the load required by the RAEC System while maintaining adequate
spinning reserve and dispatching the Power Units within their emission limits. This shall also take into
account any other power generation units in operation in the RAEC System. It shall be able to carry out
economic Dispatch; and
Utilise a high level of standardisation with regard to equipment selection and control logic design, so that
training requirements for equipment operation and maintenance and of spare parts holdings are
optimised.
Automatic and immediate on-load change over from Natural Gas to Fuel Oil to ensure GCPFC without
interruption in the event of a Gas Operation Failure, trip of Gas Connection Facilities or the pressure of
Natural Gas at the Gas Delivery Point falling below the minimum gas pressure specified in the NGSA or
the pressure at the Gas Connection Facilities falling below the minimum gas pressure required by the
Power Units Block(s), and thereafter changeover from Fuel Oil to Natural Gas when pressure is
reinstated or Natural Gas supply interruption is corrected
To meet the grid operational requirements of the Owner, the control system shall be designed and set up to
ensure that at least one gas engine shall remain on-load in the event of the loss of the 132kV transmission
grid. This is to ensure that a supply is maintained for house loads, local loads and to the gas conditioning
system. The Owner shall be able to designate and change/rotate the engines which shall perform this duty.
Space provision shall be provided in the central control room for an additional PC and screen for control and
monitoring of external systems. The PC and screen shall be provided by others.
8.4. Plant control structure
The control, monitoring, protection and information management functions for the Plant shall be carried out
by an overall Distributed Control System (DCS). At the plant end of the DCS, real time process data shall be
acquired using plant-mounted instrumentation and sent to I/O sub-systems that are located either locally
(preferred) or remotely. In the case of local I/O, the sub-system shall be designed to tolerate the plant
environment in which it is operating.
The I/O sub-systems shall transmit the plant data using suitable data links to controllers that are either
physically distributed around the plant or located at a centralised equipment room with functional
segregation, for data processing and execution of sequence logic and modulating control algorithms.
Depending on the application and the implementation philosophy, a controller and its I/O system may be part
of the native DCS family (e.g. station load controller, fuel forwarding system) or a high integrity fault tolerant
version of the DCS (e.g. engine control/protection system) or a stand-alone dedicated system (e.g. engine

control/protection system, generator control system, water treatment plant controller, fuel gas conditioning
skid controller).
The controllers shall communicate with each other and the Human Machine Interface (HMI) part of the DCS
to send/receive data, command and feedback. This shall be achieved using a dual redundant
communications network, with the HMI and the controllers from the DCS family interfacing seamlessly to the
communications network while the foreign controllers (e.g. stand-alone dedicated controllers) shall interface
to the network using gateways or protocol converters as necessary.
The DCS HMI shall be located in the CCR and shall provide a fully integrated control, monitoring and alarm
facility to the plant operator with a view to optimise the visibility and controllability of the process and
minimise operator manning levels. In addition, local control and monitoring facilities shall be provided where
appropriate for use during commissioning and maintenance. The DCS and local controls shall be designed
such that it shall not be possible to operate any item of plant from more than one point of control
simultaneously. Adequate local indication of mechanical and electrical quantities shall also be provided.
The high level plant management sub-systems of the DCS such as the plant historian and
condition/performance monitoring systems shall interface with the DCS communication network to extract
the plant data. These sub-systems shall communicate within the DCS in such a way that the real time
operation of the DCS is unaffected.
External third party control systems (e.g. GIS SCADA system, RDC, MGP alarm system, settlement system,
fuel demand model, weather monitoring system, etc ) shall be interfaced to the DCS by suitable means (e.g.
hardwired, serial data link) for data exchange to allow high level cross-monitoring and Plant overall control
functions. The DCS shall also interface with the Plant administrative Local Area Network (LAN) via its
communication network and gateway server protected by suitable firewalls for transfer of plant data to high
level plant management and reporting applications resident in the Plant administrative computer systems.
8.5. Safety instrumented shutdown systems
Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) shall be supplied where necessary to prevent danger to personnel and
damage to plant by initiating an automatic emergency shutdown (ESD) operation on detection of an unsafe
operating condition of the plant. It is a mandatory requirement that adequate safety integrity is engineered
into the overall plant and equipment in accordance with IEC 61508 and IEC 61511.
The SIS design shall include two stages in its design process, viz. Safety Integrity Level (SIL) selection and
SIL validation. The SIL selection includes the definition of a target SIL when undertaking a Preliminary
Hazards Analysis (PHA) or a formal Hazards and Operability (HAZOP) study of the various sub-systems of
the plant. The SIL selection shall be done by one of the standard techniques currently used in the industry,
e.g. Risk Graph method.
The SIL validation initially includes a description of the design approach taken to achieve the target SIL for
the identified sub-systems, followed by calculations to prove that the target SIL has been achieved. A Cause
and Effect diagram shall also be produced by the EPC Contractor to support the design of the SIS.
The functional safety which is being engineered into the system shall be documented for all Safety
Instrumented Systems (e.g. engine emergency trip and protection systems, fuel shut-off system) in terms of
both the target SIL and the design approach offered to meet this target for each sub-system. This
documentation shall also show how the overall functional safety in terms of the SIL shall be assessed. This
shall take on board the plant measurements, the associated cabling, data networks if used, the logic which

acts on the measurement data, and the control/shut-off valves or other control elements which shall put the
plant into a safe condition.
Since the SIL rating of the shutdown systems would be higher than that of the DCS, these systems shall be
independent from the DCS. However, high level monitoring of these shutdown systems shall be organised
via the DCS so that the status of these systems can be presented on the operator screens for monitoring
from the CCR. Where special high integrity controllers with certified SIL rating are available in the DCS
family, they may be considered for emergency shutdown functions as long as they are engineered as
independent nodes of the DCS with the DCS communication network being used only for high level
monitoring from the CCR.
8.6. Distributed Control System (DCS)
An integrated DCS shall be provided for the complete operation, instrumentation, control and human
machine interface (HMI) of the plant. The DCS shall interface with the equipment / unit control systems
supplied under the Works including but not limited to those for the engines, generator, water treatment plant
and all station electrical systems.
The control system shall be fully integrated using microprocessor techniques and shall have a distributed
architecture comprised of a family of independent functional processors and communications components
consistent with the recognised international industry interpretation of a DCS. Each component shall be
software programmable and maintainable and shall be set up to carry out specific tasks.
Outstations shall be capable of autonomous operation and perform data acquisition, calculation, digital
(open-loop) and analogue (closed-loop) control functions.
Communications between the outstations located in different plant areas and the Operators and Engineers
workstations located in the Control Room shall be performed over a redundant high speed data highway.
The data highway shall be designed to perform at the speed necessary to ensure that all variables are
updated and control commands are issued without loss of system performance. The data highway shall
include all control equipment, error detection and correction facilities and cabling.
The DCS shall be designed to ensure maximum availability by the inclusion of built-in redundancy for both
hardware and software. This shall include duplicated control processors, data highway and power supplies
with automatic changeover to the standby unit upon detection of a fault or failure of the operating unit.
Where appropriate, I/O cards shall also be duplicated. The failure of any single element shall not affect the
operation of any item of operating plant. In particular, the duplicated control processors shall be capable of
fail over without change to plant status, sequence status or control actions, at any stage of plant operation. It
shall be possible to replace a failed redundant module without affecting the satisfactory functional operation
of the plant and without system downtime.
Comprehensive system diagnostic facilities shall be incorporated to assist in maintenance and trouble-
shooting. These shall include memory, control processors, I/O cards, data highway, storage devices, as a
minimum.
8.6.1. DCS Functionality
The DCS shall:
a) allow fully automatic unit operation through a local operator-initiated cold start, synchronise on line, run
up to demand generation under automatic generation control (AGC) and conversely run down to cold
stop under safe and controlled conditions;

b) automatically ensure safety of personnel and equipment under all Plant operating conditions;
c) supervise and control the common services facilities provided for the Plant;
d) maximise the availability and efficiency of the Plant;
e) enable the Plant to be operated and maintained with the minimum of appropriate personnel consistent
with cost effectiveness and safety;
f) provide station auxiliary electrical supervision and control;
g) provide performance monitoring of the Plant
h) provide life-consumption monitoring of the Plant and plant items;
i) meet the operational and design requirements as specified;
j) provide Plant alarm monitoring and interlock functions;
k) provide Plant data logging, including but not limited to sequence of events, historical storage and
retrieval, trending;
l) minimise the cable requirements on Site; and
m) provide external interfaces as defined elsewhere
It is accepted that some minor plant equipment such as diesel and lubricating oil unloading and transfer
units, etc will be controlled locally.
The AGC facility shall incorporate automatic and manual regulation of the real and reactive power output of
the Plant. It shall be capable also of remote AGC operation by RDC
8.6.2. Software
The latest version of the manufacturers system software shall be provided fully developed, tested and
installed. The EPC Contractor shall implement and co-ordinate software design, integration and
implementation across sub-contract systems.
The software design shall comply with the requirements of IEC61131-3. Software licences for unrestricted
use by the Owner shall be supplied for all packages required for operation, diagnostics and reconfiguration
of the system.
Software shall be implemented through standardised component control logic designs. Control logic designs
shall be designated for all field devices or functional groups of field devices, as appropriate. The number of
control logic designs shall be kept to the minimum possible, in order to simplify DCS software, and the full
set of designs shall be submitted to the Owner for agreement prior to implementation.
The application software and associated displays, reports, databases, etc, shall be pre-formatted when
installed at site. The creation or modification of displays, reports, databases or control strategies shall be
possible with the system on-line by the Owners engineering personnel without affecting the plant operation.
Modifications to the software shall be done in straightforward and logical steps using, wherever possible,
graphic displays. It shall not be necessary to have specialist knowledge of the underlying software in order to
carry out modifications.
Access to software and application programmes at various levels shall be possible by operating or
engineering personnel using passwords. This shall protect the software from unauthorised access.
8.6.3. Operator interface software
The operator interface software shall enable the operator to carry out the necessary actions in a safe and
efficient manner. In particular the following features shall be included, as a minimum, but not be limited to:

Software shall be structured in such a way so as to provide a hierarchy of control from automatic
sequential plant start-up through to manual control of an individual item;
During manual intervention by the operator (sequence initiation and individual device control under
normal and failure conditions), all software derived, hardwired permissive and overrides shall be visible
to the operator;
Where process measurements have been duplicated into the DCS for improved reliability, the signals
shall be averaged for control purposes and quality monitoring shall be employed to automatically switch
to the good signal in the event of an interruption. The operator shall have, for the purposes of
maintenance, the on screen facility to select either signal or the average, as the measured variable for
control.
8.6.4. Reports
The DCS shall be capable of presenting to the operator, on request or at predetermined times, pre-defined
reports, which shall include:
Periodic logs, daily logs and group logs, balance of energy and efficiency log;
Snapshot report, providing the current value of analogue signals or the current status of all or selected
binary points;
Change of state report;
Alarm report, listing alarms in chronological order;
Analogue history report;
Hours Run-Time report;
Event count report;
Trip report;
Sequence of Events report; and
Statistical Metering report, to provide average demand values over a 24-hour period for MW
import/export, MVAr import/export, and auxiliary MW and MVAr and fuel use;
In addition reports shall be produced to meet the requirements of the Environmental Protection Agency. All
report formats shall be to the agreement of the Owner.
8.6.5. Alarm management
All Plant and system generated alarms shall be prioritised, logged and displayed by the DCS. There shall be
a dedicated alarm display which shall show all the plant alarms or groups of alarms. The operators work
stations shall have a visual and audible warning which shall raise the attention of the operator upon the
receipt of any alarm. Alarms shall also be printed on the alarm/event printer.
The alarm philosophy shall be such that alarms shall only be displayed to the operator where the condition
requires immediate operator attention to prevent plant damage, loss of plant life, loss of efficiency, loss of
availability or other abnormal conditions.
Intelligent alarm filtering shall be employed in order to minimise the occurrence of nuisance alarms.
All alarms and events shall be logged and stored for future analysis.
The operator shall have the facility to select optional alarm displays, summary of alarms, historical alarms on
global or point based, unacknowledged alarms, alarms by priority, alarms by pre-defined system groups.

8.6.6. Data logging and trends
The DCS shall incorporate long term data logging facilities for all analogue, digital, serial data, alarms,
condition monitoring and other internally generated points including the overall extension capacity specified.
All data shall be automatically archived and retained for future reference in either optical or magnetic
medium.
The operator shall have the facility to present real-time data, recall data held in the data logger memory or
from archives over a specified period of time. The requested information shall be presented on the
operators workstations either in tabular form or as selected variables on a trend display. It shall be possible
to compare on the same display, multiple trends of real-time data or historical data from the data logger or
archives.
The format and content of the reports for data retrieval from the logging facility shall be subject to agreement.
8.6.7. Sequence of Events
A sequence of events (SOE) recording system shall be supplied to allow analysis of the causes of trips or
plant disturbances. The SOE recorder may be either integrated within the DCS (preferred method) or a
stand-alone item of equipment. The SOE recorder shall scan all designated binary inputs continuously. The
overall error in event time stamps in controllers shall be 40 to 50 ms considering a clock accuracy of 20 to 30
ms between controllers and a cycle time of 20 ms. The philosophy shall be to have more accurate time
stamps for electrical events (i.e. electrical protection relays time stamping the events to an accuracy of 1 ms)
since they are fast acting. Less accurate time stamps for slow acting process events shall be accepted,
thereby achieving a correct sequence of events log.
The status of each point shall be time tagged. Data shall be continuously deleted from the database after the
specified time period has elapsed. Facilities shall be provided for data to be archived for future reference.
The SOE shall allow for the retention of data on a user defined event (e.g. engine trip), or manual initiation
from the DCS. All data for a user defined time period before and after the event shall be recorded.
The SOE recorder shall automatically reset after the elapsed time period and continue to monitor the plant in
the normal way.
8.6.8. DCS control hardware
The control hardware of the DCS shall consist of control processors, I/O sub-systems, communication
modules and communication networks. The control processors shall be capable of executing multiple
modulating control and logic sequences in a time shared arrangement within the processor and shall have
the power to meet the sampling frequency requirements of the control algorithms dictated by the process.
The control processors shall be functionally distributed, i.e. a processor handling the requirements of a
section of the process, and shall have a duty/standby configuration with automatic failure detection of the
duty processor and bumpless switchover to the standby processor.
The I/O system shall be functionally and geographically (preferred) distributed. The system shall be resilient
to environmental conditions and electrical noise that it can be subjected to. Time stamping of scanned data
shall be done as close to the field as possible and shall make use of a master real time clock reference for
the whole system derived from the station master clock system. A modern internationally accepted
communication protocol shall be used to exchange data with the control processor.

The control processors shall have data communication modules that allow the interfacing of foreign systems
which are not part of the main control system family by acting as gateways or protocol converters.
The control processors shall communicate with each other and the HMI via a dual redundant fault tolerant
communications network. The network shall use an internationally accepted open protocol and shall have
sufficient bandwidth to handle the worst case data traffic under transient conditions of the plant without a
noticeable reduction in the speed of response of the control system and the operator HMI. Adequate fault
detection of the network and data error detection and correction facilities shall be provided as part of the
basic design of the communication network. The cabling for the dual redundant network shall be segregated
and the network cables shall be routed along two separate paths to prevent an accidental damage occurring
to both cables from a single incident (common mode failure).
The plant and controller dynamic data shall be resident in a real time database that shall be either distributed
throughout the controllers or resident in dual redundant servers for access by the controllers and the
operator HMI.
The loading of a control processor shall be no greater than 40% on average, with peak load within 65% of its
capacity. The memory usage of a control processor shall be within 50% of what is provided. The loading of
the communication network shall be within 40% of its capacity during normal conditions and no greater than
65% under abnormal plant conditions. Fully installed and wired spare I/O shall be a minimum of 20% for
each type of I/O. Provision for future expansion of the I/O by 20% by installing additional modules in the I/O
racks shall also be given.
The control, I/O and communication hardware shall be supplied from two independent power sources, with at
least one of them derived from an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) source. The internal power supplies
shall be derived using duplicated power supply modules to maximise the availability of the system.
The system shall have extensive diagnostic facilities to facilitate trouble-shooting and maintenance
operations. A hot replacement facility shall be available for all redundant hardware without affecting the
operation of the overall system.
8.6.9. Human Machine Interface (HMI)
The DCS shall provide a single, coordinated operator interface with the Plant. Control and monitoring of all
plant systems shall be through the DCS HMIs located in the central control room, excluding those that, by
their simple, robust nature and minimal impact on overall availability and reliability, are provided with local
controls only.
An adequate number of HMI workstations shall be provided for centralised control and monitoring of the
Plant from the CCR. The number of operator stations and their grouping in the CCR shall be decided taking
into consideration safe and efficient operation of the plant by an optimum number of Plant operators;
however three dual-headed operator workstations shall be supplied as a minimum. A workstation for the
shift supervisor shall also be provided for overall plant supervision and high level control functions, e.g.
station load control.
The HMI workstation shall consist of its processing unit, dual/triple headed LCD VDUs, keyboard and
mouse/track ball. The workstation shall be connected to both lines of the redundant communication network
via separate network cards installed in the workstation. Network switches which enable the connection of
the workstations and peripherals to the communication network shall be intelligent/managed to optimise
network traffic. Printers of the laser jet type (colour and black & white with A4/A3 printing facility) shall be

provided in the CCR for printing alarm/event logs (on request), reports, trends and screen copies. Sufficient
quantities of workstations, printers, switches etc. shall be provided to maximise the availability of the HMI.
The HMI workstations shall be based on an Operating System (OS) which is rugged, user-friendly and has
been field-proven for continuous use in industrial applications (Microsoft Windows OS preferred). The
Tenderer shall describe in his bid the recommended methodology and the provisions made in the
workstations to prevent the inadvertent entry of computer viruses into the DCS via data transfer facilities
such as Compact Disk (CD) drives and Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports that are available in the
workstations.
The control desks for locating the DCS HMI in the CCR shall be ergonomically arranged consistent with the
plant operating philosophy. The arrangement shall be suitable for plant control and monitoring by the
minimum number of operators with the possibility of access to workstations by more operators for special
operations and for training purposes. The control desk shall also accommodate a minimum of one telephone
for the station internal system. Cable routing facilities shall be provided for the control desks.
The supervisors desk shall include his workstation, internal telephone with dial out facility, external phone
dedicated for load dispatch purposes and other station communication equipment such as the public address
and radio communication systems.
An engineering facility via engineers workstations shall be provided in the CCR as well as in an engineering
room adjacent to the CCR for modifications to the control system configuration, screen graphics and
application software as well as to run diagnostics. This facility shall include password protected workstations
with high resolution VDU and a colour laser A4 printer.
All CCR equipment including workstations, printers, network switches etc. shall be powered from a UPS
source.
The Central Control Room shall have a false floor to enable easy routing of C&I, communication and power
cables to the various workstations, computer peripherals etc. The CCR shall be air conditioned.
All CCR furniture including control desks, fully adjustable swivel chairs, printer desks, document storage
facilities, discussion table with chairs etc. shall be supplied and fully colour co-ordinated with the rest of the
CCR.
Large digital numeric displays to indicate variables of general interest shall be mounted in the CCR. These
shall include as a minimum, total gross and net real power exported, system voltage, system frequency and
local time.
An architecture drawing of the DCS HMI showing the number of workstations, peripherals, network switches
etc. included in the offer as well as the grouping and connections of these devices shall be submitted with
the tender. A drawing which shows the proposed layout and locations of equipment and furniture within the
CCR shall also be provided with the bid submission.
8.6.10. DCS screen layout
Plant systems shall be represented graphically on the DCS HMI VDUs in a format that mimics the plant
design P&IDs and SLDs. Symbols used for the representation of devices shall be to recognised industry
standard. Colours used for the representation of process piping and electrical system busbars shall conform
to the global plant colour scheme and shall be unique to each discrete system.

Screen layout shall be designed to optimise the efficiency of data display. Ideally, any given system shall be
displayed on one screen. However, it is recognised that some systems are too complex to achieve this
requirement. In these instances clearly identified and logical links shall be made between the pages that
make up the complete system. In all instances, where the operator passes from one screen to another, it
shall be possible to return directly back to the previously viewed screen.
The main, or highest level, DCS screen shall represent, in as simple a manner as possible, the entire plant
and give the operator the main control parameters, such as power out, fuel gas pressure, terminal volts, etc.
It shall be possible to reach any sub-system screen from the main screen by following as few links as
possible. HMIs shall be provided with large screen support as necessary to enable operator management of
all units simultaneously.
8.6.11. DCS screen functionality
Where devices have two discrete states, or more, the different states shall be indicated by different colours
on screen. The colours shall change as the device changes state. As a general rule devices that are
running/stopped (pumps, fans, etc.) or opened/closed (valves, circuit breakers, etc.) shall be green (inert
or safe state) when stopped/opened and red (live or potentially hazardous state) when running/closed.
Devices that are controllable from a DCS screen shall have a screen pop up allocated to them that shall
activate when the mouse cursor is positioned over the device and the appropriate mouse button activated by
the operator. The pop up shall display all relevant control and status information relating to the device along
with buttons for control of the device. It shall not be possible to change the state of any device without a
second confirmation pop up being activated requesting that the operator confirm the action.
The update frequency for real time data shall be at least once every second for all graphics. This
requirement applies to both data displayed alphanumerically and data displayed symbolically (shape
changes, colour changes, etc.).
HMI screens and Control Room lighting shall be designed and coordinated to ensure that there is no
discernible screen flicker.
8.6.12. Proprietary main equipment control packages
Despite this requirement it is recognised that the EPC Contractors design may include packaged items that
include integrated control systems that are discrete and separate from the DCS. Whilst it is preferred that
such black box control systems are kept to a minimum it is accepted that such systems may be included for
a variety of reasons. These reasons may include:
Safety critical systems that rely on high-speed response to process variables; and
Systems where performance and functional guarantees (and subsequent warranties) are dependent on
the use of the package control system.
Dependent on the selection of primary equipment suppliers, systems that may be considered under this
clause include the gas engines.
Where the use of such control systems is accepted the packaged control system shall, nonetheless, comply
with all other requirements of this specification. Such systems shall maintain the principles of redundancy,
reliability and availability applied to the main DCS. Where employed, these systems shall interface fully with
the DCS such that control and monitoring facilities available through the DCS HMIs are identical to those of
the packaged control system in isolation.

8.6.13. Interfaces with third parties
The details of interface signals shall be finalised after Contract award. The EPC Contractor shall allow for
interface signals as follows:
Control and monitoring of the grid substation circuit breakers , tap changers and isolators will be via a pc
and screen ( provided by others) located in the Plant control room connected to the grid substation via a
fibre optic cable (provided by others).
Gas data from the gas supplier, e.g. tariff metering system, as per mechanical section of this
specification; and
Remote control and monitoring interface for remote AGC operation by RDC.
8.6.14. Plant condition monitoring system
The Plant condition based monitoring system shall access the database parameters indicating the general
mechanical condition of the Plant and the corresponding operating status. These shall include vibration data
of major rotating plant, bearing temperatures, winding temperatures etc. measured during steady-state
operation of the Plant as well as transient (start-up, shutdown) operating conditions. Other parameters of
interest such as operating hours, number of starts, thermal stress, together with relevant process data shall
also be stored in the system for analysis.
Where possible, the data shall be obtained at the required sampling rate from the field instruments. All data
shall be stored in the system for analysis and comparison with current data. Archiving and printing facilities
shall also be provided as part of the system.
The condition monitoring software shall be fully configured to detect the changing trends in the Plant
parameters by comparison with healthy plant signatures. The software shall be intelligent enough to
determine whether deterioration in the Plant condition is evident.
8.6.15. Plant Performance monitoring system
An online Plant performance monitoring system shall be supplied to compute and report on the performance
of the overall Plant and specific major Plant items to management and operating staff. The system shall
utilise real time Plant data obtained from the DCS via its main communication network. The reports shall
include readily available performance related Plant data such as generated power, fuel consumption, and
auxiliary power consumption as well as calculated parameters such as efficiency of the Power Units.
8.7. Station clock system
A master clock shall be supplied as part of the station clock system to provide a common time reference for
the Plant. It shall be referenced to an appropriate radio time signal (e.g. GPS signal).
Station clocks shall be supplied and installed at various locations of the Plant. The quantity and locations of
the clocks will be finalised during the detailed design stage, however, a reasonable provision for a typical
Plant shall be included for this item in the Contract. A large alphanumeric display showing hours, minutes
and seconds shall be installed in the CCR for indicating the local time. The station clocks and the digital
display shall be driven from the master clock.
The master clock shall provide real time reference to the DCS and all other plant control, monitoring and
protection systems by suitable interfaces capable of achieving a time synchronisation accuracy of 1 ms
among these systems for their data acquisition and logging activities.

8.8. Instrumentation
All transmitters shall have internals and fittings of a corrosion resistant material suitable for the medium
being measured.
All instrumentation shall be selected such that the normal maintenance intervals to maintain the performance
and function based on the worst case plant operating conditions is no more than annually based on
manufacturer recommendations.
Programmable smart transmitters are preferred. Each transmitter that is used to transmit a signal to the
DCS shall be powered from 24 V dc supply and utilise a two-wire transmission system.
All electrical and pneumatic transmitters shall be equipped with separately mounted local indicator. All
transmitters shall be provided with test connections and instrument isolating valve manifolds. Separate
indicating thermometers and manometers will be provided.
Transmitters shall be used wherever possible, however, where used switches for pressure, flow, temperature
and level monitoring shall be of the heavy-duty type with double pole changeover contacts. Contacts shall
be rated to suit their required duty. Mercury switches shall not be used.
8.8.1. Field mounted instruments
All field mounted electrical items shall be weather-proof to IP 65 or equivalent and suitable for the local
ambient weather conditions. Pneumatic instruments shall be weather-proof to IP 54 or equivalent.
Components that are not line or vessel mounted, shall be mounted on local instrument racks and connected
to the measurement source with stainless steel tubing or pipe. These racks shall be configured in a manner
to consolidate multiple devices in the same plant area to a centralised location for cable routing and to
facilitate equipment servicing.
Instrument impulse lines shall use compression type tube fittings. Only one manufacturers fittings shall be
used throughout the Plant.
8.8.2. Flow instruments
For high pressure applications, the carrier for the primary device shall be of similar material to the pipeline in
which it is to be mounted, and shall be connected into the pipeline by butt-welding. Other applications shall
use flanged connections wherever possible.
All differential pressure devices shall be provided complete with tapping point isolation valves, 3 valve
manifolds and drain valves or 5-valve manifolds, as required.
Turbine type flow meters shall be used for gas flow measurements. Meters used for tariff metering purposes
shall be supplied, complete with adjacent pipe sections where necessary, with calibration certification from
an agreed laboratory.
Flow meters employing alternative measurement principles may be utilised for appropriate applications
subject to the agreement of the Owner.
Flow integrating meters shall provide output in the form of pulses from volt free contacts to the DCS.
The flow measurement system must be designed, built and installed to the current editions of ISO 5167-1
(Measurement of Fluid Flow in Closed Conduits - Pressure Differential Devices) and ISO 9951

(Measurements of Gas Flow in Closed Conduits - Turbine Meters). The uncertainty of the measurement
systems must be assessed in accordance with ISO 5168 (Measurement of Fluid Flow - Estimation of
Uncertainty of a Flow rate Measurement) and the relevant parts of ISO 5167 and ISO 9951.
8.8.3. Level instruments
Level measuring devices may be of the direct measurement, differential pressure or electrical/electronic type
as appropriate to the application. For local indication of level, direct measuring devices shall be used.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner it shall be possible to remove any level measurement device without
the vessel or other instruments being taken out of service.
Where installed, each level indicating gauge shall be fitted with top and bottom isolating valves with full bore
drain valve at the bottom and plugged vent at the top. Flanged connections, rated the same as the vessel,
shall be used.
Differential pressure transmitting devices shall preferably be used on all services other than slurry.
Displacement type instruments and switches shall be mounted in external cages with flanged connections,
rated the same as the vessel. This type of instrument shall not be used for applications involving viscous,
corrosive or flashing liquids.
Float switches shall be glandless with magnetic coupling.
Switches used for level detection shall provide facilities for testing the mechanical and electrical operation of
the switch without its removal from the process.
8.8.4. Pressure instruments
Low pressure gauges may employ manometer or barometer devices to indicate small gauge, differential
pressures or vacuums.
Gauges measuring low ranges that can be exceeded by a higher containment pressure shall be fitted with
over-range protection. Gauges shall be fitted with vent/test valves. Blow out devices shall be provided for
high pressure applications.
All differential pressure transmitters shall be capable of withstanding without damage or calibration change,
full rated line pressure as a differential input. Pressure transmitters shall withstand at least 115% of nominal
input range without damage or calibration change.
Pressure switches shall be such that under normal process operating conditions, the contact in the switch
shall be closed unless otherwise agreed by the Owner. Switches shall have adjustable set-points and
adjustable hysteresis, as required.
8.8.5. Temperature instruments
Sensing elements for air, inert gas and radiant temperature measurements shall be complete with suitable
protective sheath. For water and hazardous applications, thermowells shall be utilised.
Where thermocouples are employed then cold junction compensation shall be provided.
In the case of direct immersion metal couples of the mineral insulated type, the couple up to the associated
junction box shall be capable of easy replacement. A flexing coil having a minimum diameter of 250 mm
shall be provided in the couple between the junction box and the carrier.

Where thermocouple assemblies are supplied, a disconnection head shall be arranged clear of the pocket
and associated lagging and shall be sufficiently long as to prevent excessive temperature of the head
assembly.
Local temperature indicators shall be supplied with a thermowell.
8.8.6. Analytical instruments
Analytical instruments monitoring chemical or physical properties of process fluids and substances may be
installed either directly in the process line or vessel or at a distance and connected by means of sampling
systems. The delay time between the sample being withdrawn from the process and being available to the
analyser shall be consistent with the measurement and control requirements of the particular process. The
preferred method of keeping sampling lags to acceptable limits shall be by locating the analyser close to its
sample take-off point. When this is not practicable the distance velocity lag of the sampling system shall be
reduced by increasing the velocity of the sample.
Analytical instruments shall be selected to operate continuously, infrequently or on a continuously interrupted
cycle as most suited to the measurement and the intended application.
Where sensors require the use of calibration solutions or gases then a minimum of one years supply at
normal usage shall be supplied. Where sensors require replacement or removal for recalibration or
rejuvenation at regular intervals, then an adequate number of spare sensors shall be supplied for one years
normal usage.
Self cleaning pH and conductivity probes are preferred.
8.9. Valves
8.9.1. Control valves and actuators
All control valves shall have local indication to show the actual position of the valve.
Where transmitters are used to indicate the position remotely, the transmitted signal shall be taken directly
from the actual valve position.
Control valves shall be supplied with suitable actuators matched to the operational and environmental
requirements of the plant. Digital valve controllers are preferred.
All actuators shall be provided with a means of local control that shall be capable of being utilised without the
use of tools. Loss of remote/automatic operation of an actuated valve shall be alarmed to the operator.
Where the position of an actuator or regulating device is required for remote control or indication, then
suitable linear variable differential transducer or plastic film potentiometer devices shall be fitted together
with a transmitter.
Position feedback of an actuator or other regulating device shall take their measurement as directly as
possible from the mechanical output of the actuator or regulating device.
Where it is only necessary to provide a limited number of discrete position indications, then position actuated
switches shall be used. Switch settings shall be adjustable.
Control valves shall be designed to fail to the safe state, given the valve application. For each valve
application, due consideration shall be given to whether the safe state is open, closed or for the valve to

remain in the last position prior to loss of control (through control system failure, loss of feedback, power
failure (pneumatic, hydraulic or electric), etc.).
8.9.2. Manual valves
Where the open/closed status of manual valves is monitored, dual limit switches shall be provided, one for
each end of travel.
8.9.3. Primary isolation and instrument valves
All primary isolating and blow down valves shall be capable of being locked in the open or shut positions.
The direction of rotation shall be clearly marked on the hand-wheel. Two valves in series shall be provided
for all applications above 40 bar line pressure. Double isolation shall be provided for hazardous services.
The primary isolating valve shall be located at the tapping point, be of the parallel or globe type and rated for
the temperature and pressure of the main line.
Equalising valves shall be provided on differential measurements, downstream of the instrument isolating
valves, to permit zero checking. Instrument isolating, equalising and vent valves shall preferably be
incorporated in a single manifold.
8.10. Installation requirements
Only one instrument shall be fitted to each tapping point.
Instrument isolating valves, vent/test valves and instrument manifolds shall be attached to measuring
devices so that it is possible to disconnect the device from the connecting pipe work without having to
disconnect or drain the pipe work.
There shall not be any open blow down or drain connections inside panels or local equipment housings.
All instrument vent/drain points shall be directed to a safe position away from site personnel.
The arrangement of pipe work and connections shall be such that the temperature of the instrument isolating
valve or instrument valve manifold does not exceed 55C.
For pneumatic connections each individual air user shall be provided with a line size and lockable isolating
valve immediately upstream of a dedicated filter regulator.
All indicating instruments and controls shall be readable and accessible from floor level or permanent
platforms. Gauge glasses shall be visible from any control valve that controls the vessel level. Clearance
shall be allowed for servicing and access to all items.
Post or bracket mounts for instruments shall not be attached to pipe work, removable flooring, and handrails
or be directly affixed to machinery and equipment subject to vibration.
Instrument ranges shall be such that normal working indication lies between 60 and 75 per cent of the span.
Instruments shall be mounted in heated or protected locations wherever possible in order to minimise the
effects of ambient weather conditions.
Instruments in water services or where water can accumulate in the impulse lines shall be trace heated
where the ambient temperature can fall below 0C. Wind chill factor shall be considered.

Instruments in liquid services, which solidify at ambient temperature, shall be provided with diaphragm seals.
Seal chambers or diaphragm seals shall be used where fluid services are corrosive, viscous, congealing,
deposit forming, or dangerous. Seals shall be located as close as possible to the primary isolating valve.
8.11. Plant information management system database (PIMS)
The DCS shall incorporate a shift log facility for use by the plant operators from the DCS screens.
A separate PIMS historian system shall be installed to provide longer-term historical storage of plant
analogue, digital, alarm and event data. The system shall be based on a field-proven database and shall
have an open interface (e.g. OPC) for data acquisition. The system shall acquire all relevant process data
from the DCS and store data for the life of the Plant. The historian shall incorporate an efficient algorithm to
optimise the sample points stored without compromising the data quality and integrity. Sufficient storage
capacity shall be provided in the system to meet the requirements. The retrieval, display and processing of
historical data stored in the system shall be straight forward. It shall be possible to present historical data
from different time periods in trend displays. A data back-up facility shall be provided for the historian
system.
The PIMS shall use a database for storing plant historical data and making it available via a hardware
firewall to users both on site and off site. The data shall generally be used in long term asset management,
maintenance and fault finding. The PIMS system shall provide the same data resolution and reliability as the
data logging in the DCS and have the capacity of online storage of at least five years of historical data.
The server, firewall and network hardware platform and architecture for the PIMS shall be to a standard
agreed by the Owner.
The PIMS interface to the control system data shall be via an OPC link via a network connection and firewall.
8.12. Plant instrumentation and wiring system database
The EPC Contractor shall provide an engineering and design database that centralises information related to
field cabling and I/O. Information entered into the database shall be used to automatically generate cable
schedules and loop diagrams. The data shall also be exported to form the basis of the DCS database.
8.13. Communication and security systems
All security systems shall comply with the requirements of the ROP and EPC Contractors shall receive the
necessary ROP clearance before implementing the security systems.
8.13.1. Private automatic branch exchange
An integrated services digital network (ISDN) type PABX, shall be provided for the Plant. The EPC
Contractor shall specify the initial installed capacity including numbers of exchange lines, tie lines and
extension lines. A personal computer (PC) based telecommunication console shall be provided together
with a VDU, keyboard and headset. The communication being provided shall be consistent with the CISCO
system and its advanced features. A voice recorder with two telephone system shall be provided for
automatic recording and saving the communication between the generating station operator, OOCEP and
the Licensed Transmission System Operator and the storage capacity shall not be less than six months. The
exchange shall be capable of future expansion. The EPC Contractor shall specify the ultimate expansion
capacity, which shall be to agreement

The interconnecting cable between the PABX and the Owners telephone network including the terminations
shall be the responsibility of the EPC Contractor who shall provide all facilities for the connection of this
service including ducting within the building where the Owners telephone exchange is located. All other
internal telephone connections within the Plant boundary, including cabling shall be the responsibility of the
EPC Contractor.
The telephone system shall be powered via a battery/charger system to maintain the PABX and the siren
system in normal operation for a period of not less than 10 hours in the event of a failure of battery charging
current, when the exchange has been fully extended. The batteries shall normally be kept charged by a dual
battery charger unit, each charger comprising a float charger with manual boost charge facilities with
capacity sufficient to cater for ultimate extension facility referred to previously. Each battery charger shall be
housed in a separate robust and well-constructed cubicle with good access to all components and
equipment. It shall not be possible for the load to become disconnected from both batteries and chargers
simultaneously.
Telephone instruments suited to the location and environment in which they are installed shall be supplied by
the EPC Contractor. These shall include basic wall and desk mounted units, executive handsets, and units
suitable for noisy and outdoor plant areas (e.g. background noise suppressed units with acoustic hoods and
weatherproof units) as necessary.
8.13.2. Administration LAN
A Local Area Network (LAN) for the administrative functions of the Plant shall be provided by the EPC
Contractor. For this purpose, cabling suitable for a fast Ethernet (CAT 6) computer network shall be
provided to cover all offices. The scope of work shall include the provision of network cables between a
proposed computer room (location subject to approval by the Owner) where the network switches and other
computer equipment (e.g. servers) will be located and all the offices including also some plant areas (e.g.
stores, maintenance areas, CCR). The scope also includes the provision of LAN sockets, cable termination
as well as junction boxes as required. The layout of the LAN shall be subject to approval by the Owner.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that a dual switched power socket is located adjacent to each LAN socket.
The final location of the sockets will be determined during the detail design phase and be to the approval of
the Owner.
8.13.3. Public address system
A facility to broadcast announcements throughout the Plant shall be provided via a Public Address (PA)
system. Loudspeakers shall be installed at strategic locations of the Plant to ensure full coverage of the
Plant and shall be grouped into different zones. The announcing station shall be located in the CCR and
with zone selection facilities.
The PA system shall be designed for a power output level high enough for clearly receiving broadcasts even
in noisy plant areas. The selection of the loudspeakers shall take into account the environmental conditions
of their location. The PA system shall have a self-check facility and provision to raise an alarm in the CCR in
the event of a fault in any part of the system.
8.13.4. Site radio system
A two-way radio system shall be supplied for use by the operating and maintenance staff of the Plant. The
system shall consist of a base station and 12 portable sets as a minimum, each with noise reducing
headphones. An adequate number of base stations to ensure full site coverage shall be supplied. The

system shall operate in the UHF band with multiple frequency channels in a semi-duplex mode for
transmissions through the base station and in a simplex mode for direct communication between portable
sets. The portable sets shall be light-weight with adjustable power levels to conserve battery life.
The base station shall be powered from a UPS source or battery system. The portable sets shall be
powered by rechargeable batteries that have sufficient capacity for normal usage during an eight-hour
working shift and do not have memory problems.
8.13.5. Closed circuit television security system
The Plant is to be protected from both casual and malicious intrusion. The protective measures shall include,
but not necessarily be limited to, a digital closed circuit television (CCTV) system for the surveillance of the
Site perimeter fence and gates. Colour cameras in sufficient quantities shall be mounted at suitable
locations either on buildings or masts to provide a full coverage of the monitored areas. The overall design
of the CCTV system shall be such that images of the subject of interest are captured, displayed and stored
with sufficient resolution to enable a positive identification. For this purpose, a combination of fixed position
and pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras shall be provided as well as automatically switched infra-red lighting for
improved night vision.
The cameras shall be networked together using a dedicated local area network with sufficient segments to
optimise the cabling requirements without compromising the system performance and throughput. The
bandwidth of the network shall be large enough to accommodate a minimum of 50% of additional cameras in
each segment without having to modify the installed network infrastructure. The network cabling shall be
tamper-proof.
A matrix of high resolution colour video monitors shall be arranged on a console with camera selection and
camera/lighting control facilities for surveillance purposes. These consoles, whose design shall be to the
approval of the Owner, shall be provided at the security office / gate house as well as at the CCR.
A digital recording system shall be supplied capable of storing the images transmitted from the cameras in
time lapse mode with the camera identification number and date/time information superimposed on the
images. It shall also be possible to capture and store the continuous real time video output from a selected
camera in special circumstances for a limited period.
These measures shall be fully integrated to allow an automatic response to events to aid operator decisions.
For example, operation of the intercom will cause the relevant CCTV picture to be displayed at the reception
desk. Fence alarms will also cause the relevant camera view to be displayed and initiate an alarm video
recorder to record events from the camera.
8.13.6. Perimeter fence and building monitoring
An acoustic cabling system shall be installed to monitor the perimeter security fence.
Mechanised gates with intercom communication to the Security Office / Gate House and CCR shall be
provided.
All key buildings shall be provided with intruder detection systems.
8.13.7. Data links and SCADA
The Plant shall be incorporated into the Licensed Transmission System Operators SCADA system at the
RDC. The SCADA interface between the RDC and Plant shall be achieved using dual redundant gateways

using IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol to be decided during the design stage. Interoperability
between the RDC and Plant shall be ensured.
The interface shall be communication ports on the multiplexing equipment provided by the Licensed
Transmission System Operator at the Tibat grid substation. The Generator shall provide all materials
required to establish redundant communication links to the multiplexing equipment, including patch cords,
network switches, fibre optic patch panels and fibre optic cable with accessories.
The data exchange between the RDC and the Plant shall be provided in accordance with RAEC Code and
the Consolidated SCADA List. In addition all necessary signals for implementation automatic power
generation control AGC for regulation of the real and reactive power output of the Plant remotely operation
by RDC. The list of signals with Licensed Transmission System Operator shall be finalised during the design
stage.
In accordance with the NGSA the Plant is required to exchange data with the MGP. The Generator shall
provide all materials required to establish this data link to MGP, including patch cords, network switches,
fibre optic patch panels and fibre optic cable with accessories. The list of signals with MGP shall be finalised
during the design stage. The Generator shall also include the signals from the MOG related to interruptions
in Natural Gas supply, MGP gas releases and MGP safety alarms with potential to impact the Generator in
the data transmitted to RDC.
The hardwired signals interchanged to and from the Plant and the Licensed Transmission system Operator,
at the interface marshalling cubicle shall be exchanged as follows:
4 to 20 mA signals for analogue; and
volt-free change over contacts for digital signals.
8.13.8. Plant gas detection system
Due to the proximity of the nearby processing facilities the plant is at risk from gas releases that emanate
inside and outside the plant boundary.
To counter this risk the EPC Contractor shall provide a comprehensive hazardous / poisonous gas detection
system designed to protect the plant and personnel. The system shall interface with the DCS and be
designed to reliably detect:
leakages internal to the Plant; and
gas releases from outside the Plant boundary.
The EPC Contractor shall demonstrate in its proposal adequate provision of a gas detection system.


9. Civil Requirements
9.1. General requirements for civil works
9.1.1. General
This section of the Specification covers the civil engineering and building works (collectively referred to as
the civil works). This is a design and build project and shall include any preliminary studies, fully detailed
design and construction of all civil works, auxiliary works and services necessary for the completion of the
Plant.
The civil works required shall include site investigations and data collection as deemed necessary by the
EPC Contractor, detailed design, preparation of construction drawings, procurement of materials, execution
and maintenance of works complete in all respects, provision of record drawings and CAD CD-ROMs as
described herein.
The design concept is to build the Plant on a platform at +15m MSL (optimal level without reducing plot
surface area, and maintaining road slope of 5%) the platform being made by reducing the mountain on the
east of the plot initially to foundation level and using the selected graded rock to elevate the existing plot
ground level to foundation level(or foot of piling level)by backfilling, levelling, grading & compacting.
When foundation level (or foot of piling level) is achieved by using the same methodology the elevation will
be increased to +15m MSL using a suitable size capping layer. Priority is to be given to completion of the
RAECo sub-station area to enable others to meet their schedule, the substation is within the plot area at
+15m MSL.
As well as creating the platform other activities but not limited to include: controlled blasting using laser face
profiling & vibration monitoring, mountain stabilisation, storm & site drainage, access roads, rerouting of any
existing infrastructure (e.g. Omantel cable), excavation of foundation areas, steel fixing & concrete works,
backfill to structures, effective dust suppression by means of high pressure misting systems on any
crusher/screening systems and fog machines in quarry working areas, An area of land reclamation will be
constructed for ROP and/or the Owners use on the southern side of the existing jetty in front of the project
site, using all of excess rocky material arising from the site excavations estimated to be 1.5 million cubic
metres as the Base Case. Reclamation for the area north side of the existing jetty, in front of the project site
is an Option Case.
Due to the close proximity of the MGP & ROP border post, pushing down of material from the mountain will
not be permitted and hauling of material using suitable dump trucks must be used to reduce dust emissions
Although International Standards have been used extensively in this Specification, equivalent Oman codes
and standards whose use is a statutory requirement or the norm in the construction industry in Oman will be
acceptable provided a comprehensive list of these codes and standards is included with the proposal.
Where Oman codes and standards do not exist to cover the full scope of work, other recognized and
accepted international standards may be used only if they are explicitly stated in the proposal.
The following example of the inspection & test plan for the early civil work is attached
Sample Inspection & Test Plan showing minimum requirements for Earthworks and Land reclamation

Activity

Controlling Document

Frequency

Specification limits

Material Verification
Rock Suitable for
Embankment
(+7m to +13m MSL)
Rock suitable for
Land reclamation
+2m high tide level to
+4m MSL
Sultanate of Oman ,
Standard Specification
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.5.2
1 test per 8000
cubic meters
with not less
than 1 test per
material type.
For every change
in material type
Maximum particle size = loose layer
thickness
25% maximum passes 0.42 mm (sieve
#40)

Uniformity Coefficient = 5 minimum
Soil Suitable for
Embankment
(+13m to +15m MSL)

Soil suitable for Land
reclamation +4m MSL
to +7m MSL
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.5.2
1 test per 3000
cubic meters
with not less
than 1 test per
material type.
For every change
in material type
loose layer thickness

Maximum dry density not less than 1.7
T/m3

Gypsum content not more than 5%
No use of A-6, A7 soil

Plasticity Index less than 20%

4-day soaked CBR should not be less
than 8%
Organic Matter not more than 5%

Soil Suitable for
Backfilling around
Structures
(0-50mm)
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.7.3
1 test per 500
cubic meters
with not less
than 1 test per
material type.
For every change
in material type
Minimum D10 value = 1mm

Maximum Plasticity Index = 10 %
Site Preparation
Protect existing services SP-1279-C Cl.2.5.2 During operations No damage to existing utilities & facilities
during earthwork operations
Check area before
backfilling
SP-1279-C Cl.2.4 Before Backfilling Complete removal of trash and debris
Provide protective shoring when
necessary
Translocation of coral as required
Surveying Marking
Establish benchmarks Approved plans Each area of Horizontal : 6mm allowable

and datum from control
points
SP-1279-C Cl.2.4 operation
Vertical : 3.5mm allowable
Backfilling
Rock-fill Embankment
(+7m to +13m MSL)

Rock suitable for Land
reclamation +2m high
tide level to +4m MSL
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.5.3

Each fill layer Related to the unit weight of the vibratory
roller and not greater than 800 mm loose
thickness
Soil Embankment
(0-100mm)

reclamation +4m MSL
to +7m MSL

Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.5.3
Each fill layer 250 mm compacted thickness for layers
in excess of 1.5 m from final level
200 mm compacted thickness for other
layers

Fill Behind Structures
(0-50mm)
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.7.3
Each fill layer 150 mm compacted thickness for other
layers
Compaction & Field
tests

Rock-fill Embankment
Compaction
Plate Load Bearing
test
Compactometer test

Rock suitable for Land
reclamation +2m high
tide level to +4m MSL
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.5.3
Each fill layer Max. Settlement 0.5 % of the average
compacted layer thickness
Allowable bearing capacity = 25 Ton/m2
to be confirmed in design

Soil Embankment
Compaction

reclamation +4m MSL
to +7m MSL
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.5.4
Each fill layer Each layer compacted at least 90% of
Modified Maximum Density as per AASHTO
T-180 and at moisture content between 1%
above and 2% below the optimum for
compaction, 95% of Modified Maximum
Density as per AASHTO T-180 for layers
600mm below final level

Fill Behind Structures
Compaction
Sultanate of Oman ,
for Road & Bridge
Construction 2010,
Clause 2.7.3
Each fill layer Each layer compacted at least 95% of
Modified Maximum Density as per AASHTO
T-180
Grading
Finish Grade area
Soil Embankment &
Land reclamation
SP-1279-C, Clause
C2.8.2
Final surface
finish elevation of
each area of
operation
Even and smooth surface and all voids are
filled Level shall be within a tolerance
15mm from the required levels
Rock Armour
Rock properties Armourstone Part
1:Specification BS EN
13383-1:2002
Armourstone Part 2:
Test methods BS EN
13383-2:2002

Gradation Approved plans &
Armourstone Part 2:
Test methods BS EN
13383-2:2002

Layer thickness &
Elevation
Surveyed to approved
plans

Location Surveyed to approved
plans

Geotextile position &
overlap
Inspected to approved
plans

9.1.2. Civil programme and method statements
A construction programme shall be submitted to the Owner within 28 days of Limited Notice to Proceed or
Notice to Proceed whichever occurs earlier. Once agreed by the Owner, this programme shall become the
Contract Construction programme.
The EPC Contractor shall prepare comprehensive method statements & inspection & test plans for all major
construction activities and submit these to the Owner for review at least fifteen days prior to the
commencement of the relevant activity. The method statements shall include, but not be limited to, working
methods for earthworks& quarrying, blasting, rock bolting, shotcreting, gabion basket installation, rip rap
installation, , geotextile installation on land reclamation, surveying, working at height, lifting, heavy mobile
plant maintenance & brake testing schemes, temporary works, construction sequence, environmental
considerations, quality control and safety arrangements. Hours of work should be identified & the owner

informed at least 48 hours prior to any night work taking place, a permit for night work must be obtained and
HSSE needs addressed (e.g. lighting, supervision, HSSE coverage, QC coverage etc..)
9.1.3. Planning and building regulation approvals
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for seeking outline and detailed planning permission. The EPC
Contractor shall be responsible for the timely submission to any relevant authority of such details of his
proposals for the works as will be necessary to comply with all relevant legislation. The EPC Contractor, and
allowance shall make the application for all costs related thereto, including any statutory charges, shall be
deemed to be included in the proposal.
9.1.4. Site investigation
The Owner has been advised that from natural ground level to optimum (with regard to optimising plot
surface area and maintaining road slope of 5%) design foundation elevation(or foot of piling) rock debris and
cutting soil is used as filling material by selecting suitable size fill material. Top filling layer from design
foundation level (or foot of piling) to (+) 15.0 MSL shall be compacted and filled by granular soil. Since there
exists the possibility of settlement, the EPC Contractor shall review the need for pile foundations.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for fully assessing for himself surfaces and sub-surface ground
conditions by his own detailed site investigation should the EPC Contractor deem necessary. The EPC
Contractor shall be fully responsible for arranging his own site survey, geotechnical, hydrogeological,
contamination, bathometric and hydrological investigations which are necessary to fully assess surface and
sub-surface conditions on Site.
All site investigations shall comply with a standard to the agreement of the Owner. All geotechnical and
contamination laboratory testing shall be conducted in a laboratory with an auditable quality control system in
accordance with the specification and to the agreement of the Owner. The EPC Contractors scope of work
and method statement for and standards used in carrying out the site survey and geotechnical investigation,
borehole layout etc, shall be submitted to the Owner as a design intent memorandum (DIM) for agreement
not less than four weeks before the site investigation work commences.
The EPC Contractor shall submit to the Owner all factual and interpretative reports on the geotechnical
investigation as the work proceeds, followed by an interpretative final report for the Owners agreement
containing complete borehole logs, results of in situ and laboratory testing and a full description of ground
conditions and material properties, any geotechnical and contamination risks to the project and geotechnical
design criteria for earthworks, underground structures, foundations, ground improvement, infiltration
drainage, groundwater abstraction and pavement design.
The cost of all surveys, geotechnical, geological, hydrological and meteorological investigation work shall be
deemed to be included in the EPC Contractors proposal.
The EPC Contractor shall submit details of any further site investigation works he proposes to carry out prior
to and during the construction of the Works.
9.1.5. Environmental considerations
The EPC Contractor shall make sufficient provision both in his programme and his proposal to include for:
a) Protection of the environment, both during construction and operation, from contamination, dust, siltation
and erosion;
b) The remedial treatment or removal/replacement of any unsuitable strata of material;

c) The remedial treatment or removal/replacement of any contaminated soils;
d) The EPC Contractor shall comply with all requirements and recommendations contained within the
Environmental Impact Assessment which shall be prepared before the commencement of project
construction activities ;
e) The results of contamination testing of soils, groundwater and surface waters shall be compared to site
specific assessment criteria or trigger concentrations to determine if remediation or disposal of
contaminated soils is required. Qualitative risk assessment shall be used to determine if remediation is
required;
f) Operation license regarding burnout sources shall be obtained from the Inspection and Environmental
Control Department of the Ministry as per the requirements of the Ministerial Decree No. 118/ 2004.;
g) Transfer of coral reefs , Plan to manage marine environment during project and transfer of coral reefs,
mathematical model in order to monitor changes to coastal strip as well as the topography;
h) Translocation of any corals must be carried out in accordance with any plans approved by MECA.; and
i) Diesel and waste oil must be stored in leak proof bunds as approved by MECA.

9.2. Scope of civil works
The civil works to be provided by the EPC Contractor under the turnkey contract shall comprise
investigations and studies as necessary, the full detailed design, preparation of construction drawings, site
levelling, construction, completion and maintenance of the works until the end of the Defects Liability Period.
The scope of the Works shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:
a) Any further site topographical survey, site investigation: geotechnical, hydrogeological, contamination,
meteorological, bathymetric, coral habitat and hydrological surveys, as required.
b) Any further data collection (including verification of any design data provided in the Specification).
c) Site preparation , site development site strip, bulk excavation and filling, grading, primary and storm
drainage systems, any ground improvement and stabilization works (including preparatory backfilling
and grading work for a future Phase 2 extension of the plant) and preparation of the RAECo substation
area within the +15m MSL plot area.. The Base Case implementation of land reclamation on the western
side of Khasab highway, south of the existing jetty, opposite the MIPP site, for the use of the
ROP/Owner and relocation of and monitoring of coral, located on the north side of the jetty with 0.3
hectare in area, if approval is obtained. For the Option Case, land reclamation and relocation of and
monitoring of coral will take place on the western side of the Khasab highway to the north of the existing
jetty, opposite MIPP plot.
d) During construction, including early civil & civil works, the EPC Contractor shall supply 4 offices for the
Owners representatives, each office capable of housing 2 people and supply food for 8 people at the
EPC Contractors canteen at lunch times.
e) Building works, foundations, structures, all necessary welfare facilities, mess rooms, toilets, shower(s),
locker facilities and building services for the installation, operation and maintenance of plant and
equipment, fitting out and furnishing for the following:
Gas engine and generator foundations, building, laydown areas, supporting structures and
craneage;
Central control building;
Electrical equipment building;
Storage tank foundations and containment;

Fuel treatment building;
Fire fighting pump foundations and sunscreen;
Administration, workshop and stores building(s);
Gatehouse / Guardhouse;
Water treatment container;
Fuel Oil unloading facility

Any other ancillary buildings necessary for the proper functioning of the Plant;
Transformer and compounds for auxiliary transformers including steelwork, ground work, slabs,
firewalls and finishing works;
Fin fan radiator system.
4) Foundations and associated works for the following:
Service ways, trenches, pipe racks and bridges;
Cableways, ducts, trenches;
Foundations, plinths, bunds, culverts, access ladders and miscellaneous metalwork items water
storage tanks, oil storage tanks, fire water tanks etc.
5) New access and site roads, hard standings, car parks, footpaths. To include also construction of access
roads on-Site and connection to the off-Site access roads that may be necessary for access by others
(RAECO) to Phase 2, electricity transmission and Gas Metering Facilities. Agreement with ROP should
be obtained for access through the MGP site for delivery of abnormal loads during the construction
period.
6) Storm, foul, oily and chemical waste water drainage and underground services.
7) Raw water supplies.
8) Miscellaneous foundations and trenches for mechanical and electrical installation.
9) Builders work associated with building services installation.
10) Security walls/fencing/gates/signage and lighting in accordance with Royal Oman Police (ROP)
standards.
11) All temporary installations for the construction period, including Owners office.
12) Building services.
13) Application of protective coatings.
14) Site finishing works including hard landscaping, trimming, grading and protection.
All aspects of the civil works shall be designed and constructed in accordance with this Specification, basic
design data included therein and the referenced codes of practice and standards.
All personnel employed by the EPC Contractor shall be competent and be able to demonstrate a
combination of suitable experience and approved training and any other relevant qualities. All people
in responsible charge down to supervisor level will have successfully completed an IOSH managing
safely course or equivalent. No senior person shall be removed from the project without the Owners
approval. All senior personnel above supervisor CVs to be reviewed by the owner. All drivers on the
project will successfully complete a defensive drivers permit, and failure to wear seatbelts, or using a
mobile phone while driving will be instant dismissal offenses, speeding will be three written warnings
and then removal from the Site;

A geotechnical specialist shall be employed by the EPC Contractor to evaluate measures required
for slope stabilisation in design stage and during construction;
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that all non-Omani employees (including those of any Sub-
contractors) have valid entry visas, residence permits, labour cards or any other documentation
required by the Applicable Law;
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that all employees (including those of any Subcontractors) who are
required to drive any vehicles as part of their duties are in possession of a valid driving license
acceptable to the Royal Oman Police and the Company whilst carrying out those duties;
Visa, residence, labour and multiple entry road permits for working, driving licenses, work permits,
and journey management plans shall not be part of the Permit plan;
Should any Permit, have a limited duration, which expires before the completion of the activity of the
Work to which it relates, the EPC Contractor shall include renewal of the Permit, in the Permit plan;
Time delays in arranging/obtaining/issuance/renewal of Permits, shall not form the basis of any
Variation to the Contract and is fully the EPC Contractors responsibility;
EPC Contractor shall appoint an Omani public relations officer for overall coordination of the project
public relations and external relations requirements. He shall be based at the EPC Contractors site
offices during the construction phase;
The EPC Contractor shall obtain the following Permits, if required including, but not limited to the
following:
1. Consent to extract soil for construction purposes
2. Royal Oman Police notifications and approvals as well as well as the use transport and storage
of explosives
3. Permits for temporary or permanent rerouting or relocation of roads, power lines and
telecommunications and temporary camp site approvals (Municipality, ROP any other
Governmental Authority.)
4. Handling and Storage of Chemicals and Hazardous Substances Permit to extract water for an
Reverse Osmosis (RO) plant Permit to discharge RO reject water
5. Permit to dispose of wastewater
6. Permit to dispose of any construction waste
7. Permit to handle , store and to dispose of any other waste including Hazardous Substances
8. Approval from Ministry of Awqaf and Religious Affairs (MARA) regarding works adjacent to the
graveyard.
It is not intended that this Specification cover every particular aspect of civil works design and construction.
This, however, shall not relieve the EPC Contractor of his responsibility for the satisfactory design,
construction, completion and maintenance of the entire civil works, whether specified or not, necessary for
the safe and proper operation of mechanical and electrical plant provided.
It is essential that the EPC Contractor should visit the Site before preparing his proposal for the purpose of
examining the extent and nature of the work and means of access to the site, to familiarize and satisfy
himself with respect to local and site conditions and to ascertain for himself the availability of all labour,
workers accommodation, water supply, fuel supply, temporary laydown areas, plant and materials for the
satisfactory execution of the works within the overall project programme. The proposal shall be deemed to
meet all local and site conditions and restrictions.

9.3. Design of the works
9.3.1. General
The EPC Contractors design of all buildings, plant enclosures and exposed plant shall be visually
compatible with the surroundings and shall be designed for a life expectancy of 25 years.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for developing the overall architectural concept for the Plant, within
the broad guidelines provided herein. He shall submit with his proposal the architectural treatment for main
and ancillary buildings, taking account of the visual impact and function of the buildings, whilst observing the
requirements set out elsewhere in this Specification. The architectural concept for the station buildings,
including colour schemes and finishes schedules, shall be finalized and agreed with the Owner at an early
stage in the design process.
Main plant and ancillary buildings shall have structural steelwork frames, with upper levels and roofs having
profile colour coated cladding of noise insulated double skin construction and with sandwich panel
construction. Administration and minor buildings may be of sandwich panel construction.
All buildings shall be designed to ensure that noise, vibration, temperature and dust levels are kept within
acceptable limits to provide proper operating conditions for the plant which is to be installed and a
comfortable working environment for the Owners operations and maintenance staff throughout the year. The
construction of all buildings shall take into account the need to achieve all specified and regulatory noise
restrictions.
Provision shall be made in the designs for the maintenance of all high level buildings, internally and
externally.
Buildings shall be designed to comply with the relevant parts of the international or Oman regulations
covering:
Fire precautions in the design and construction of buildings;
Code of practice for fire precautions in Plant.
Design calculations and analyses shall take into account the most unfavourable combination of static,
seismic, dynamic, erection and laydown loads and loads due to temperature and shrinkage effects, to which
the structure or component part may be subjected, both for the serviceability and ultimate limit states.
Methods of computation and magnitude of loads shall be in accordance with the relevant standards and
codes of practices.
For rotating machinery foundations the pedestal/foundation/soil system shall be designed for safe operation
of the machine at any load within the speed range, without resonant vibration of the whole or any part of the
system. Machine foundations shall be suitably isolated from all surrounding floor slabs and structural
framing.
The EPC Contractor shall provide all building services (electricity, telephone, computer, water, HVAC, fire
protection etc), as specified in the Specification and ensure that they are readily accessible for maintenance
and repair and adequate clearance is provided from main structural members and foundations.
The extent and layout of new roads shall provide suitable access to, and within, the new plant in order to
allow erection and maintenance works to be undertaken effectively and with minimum disruption.

The dimensions of buildings shall provide adequate space for the safe installation and operation of all plant
and equipment and for maintenance procedures to be carried out by the Owner.
All buildings shall be provided with roof drainage for disposal of storm water and be connected to the station
storm water drainage system.
A separate foul sewerage system for the station buildings draining shall be provided. The design of the
sewage system should comply with the provisions of the regulation governing such matter issued by
Ministerial Decree No. 421/98 and all procedures should be taken to prevent flooding from tanks.
A waste water system shall be provided for the station. The EPC Contractor shall submit a design intent
memorandum, which is to be reviewed and agreed with the Owner, describing the concept and design of the
system. The design should allow for the separate collection, treatment and disposal of:
Oily wastewater arising from run-off, plant buildings, oil related operations and from major spillages;
Chemical waste water drainage arising from purge water and draining down systems which have been
chemically dosed. Chemical waste water shall be drained to a neutralisation pit where it shall be
adequately treated before discharge.
9.3.2. Specific building requirements
9.3.2.1. Office, administration and control room facilities
The EPC Contractor shall provide permanent office and administration facilities in accordance with the
general design requirements detailed elsewhere in this Specification.
The building(s) shall be designed in accordance with international or Oman regulatory requirements
(whichever is the more stringent) and be appropriately sized to accommodate the proposed number of
operating and administration personnel. The building shall be designed to ensure efficient and safe
operation of the plant over the design lifetime of the plant and under full ambient design conditions detailed
for the site.
The EPC Contractor shall provide as a minimum the following offices and messing facilities:
Offices for the following staff:
1 Plant Manager
1 Operations Supervisor
2 Accountant
8 Plant Engineer
2 Secretary/Clerk
2 Visitors office
16 Total individual offices
The following rooms are also required in the same area:
Kitchen and lunchroom area;
Prayer room;
2- Conference room (large enough for 12 people);

Mens locker/change facility (with toilets, showers, lockers, etc) for 50 operators;
Womens locker/change facility (with toilets, showers, lockers, etc) for 10 operators;
Copier and fax room; and
Supplies room.
Provisions are also needed near the control room and equipment room for the C&I engineers office, where
the DCS engineers console shall be installed.
9.3.2.2. Workshop and stores
The EPC Contractor shall provide a dedicated site workshop and store rooms to enable all routine
maintenance activities to be undertaken in a sheltered environment with ease of access to all utility services.
The store rooms shall include a tool store, materials/spare storage room. A separate electrical workshop
shall be provided.
The workshop shall be fully equipped to allow for the efficient maintenance and operation of the Plant, which
shall have an office equipped with telephone and electrical connections and adequate lighting and ventilation
provisions.
9.3.3. Materials
All materials shall conform to the latest edition of the relevant international or Oman or other standards cited
within this Specification.
Samples of all materials for the works may be called for at any time by the Owner and shall be furnished by
the EPC Contractor free of charge and without delay. The cost of all routine tests required by the adopted
standard shall be borne by the EPC Contractor.
9.3.4. Civil design parameters
9.3.4.1. Design methodology
The EPC Contractor shall prepare for the whole of the works and each discrete section thereof a design
basis statement. The design basis statement which shall be made available for agreement by the Owner
within four weeks of the Notice to Proceed shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Foundation design concept
1. Loading conditions
Dead
Superimposed and live loading in accordance with international or Oman standards
Plant and equipment including for laydown areas
Wind loading in accordance with international or Oman standards
Seismic design UBC Seismic Zone 2A
15) Load case combinations
As required by relevant international or Oman standards and codes of practice.
16) Steel design parameters
Design concept fixed, pinned, portal, braced
Grades and sources of steel

Protective coatings
Quality Control / Quality Assurance compliance testing and acceptance criteria of materials and
welding
17) Concrete
Grade(s)
Cover requirements
Mix designs and admixtures
Sources of materials and compliance with standards
Batching and curing strategy
Sulphate class
Quality Control / Quality Assurance compliance testing and acceptance criteria
18) Reinforcement
Types
Grade of steel
Quality Control and Quality Assurance of materials
19) Other materials selection
Materials selected for drainage and duct runs
Materials selected for brickwork/blockwork construction
Materials selected for architectural finishes and builders work
20) Earthworks
Cut and fill balance (material densities to be considered)
Selected engineering parameters for all soils identified at the site
Material properties and availability of imported fill materials
Compaction methods including ground improvement
Acceptance criteria and compliance testing including testing frequencies
Formation levels
Landscaping levels and finishes
21) Pavements
Design loads
Geometry and swept path analysis
Selected engineering parameters for formation soils and construction materials
Compaction methods
Acceptance criteria and compliance testing including testing frequency
The design basis statement shall also clearly state the codes of practice to be used for design and material
specification applicable to the entire scope of civil works. English translations of the relevant codes and
standards, where necessary, shall be provided by the EPC Contractor.
9.3.4.2. Loadings
Loadings to buildings and structures shall be in accordance with UBC 1997:

The Site is exposed to a seismic hazard induced by the seismically active Iranian coast. The Site is located
in the Arabian Peninsula, identified as the rigid Arabian plate, which is a quiet zone. However in the
mountain range along the eastern coast of Yemen, Oman and the United Arab Emirates, the existence of
some minor faults increases the chances of earthquakes in the area.
Based on this, and considering the UBC with Seismic Zone 2A, earthquake loads shall be
considered. The earthquake calculations shall be made in accordance with the latest UBC
standards, international standards and Oman standards. Uniform Building Code 1997 for Seismic
Design to Seismic Zone 2A
Fifty (50) year return period values shall be used for environmental loading as appropriate.
9.3.4.3. Foundations
The design of the foundations for the engines, generators and other plant foundations subject to dynamic
loads shall be in accordance with Eurocode 2.
All other plant foundations and building foundations shall be designed in accordance with the applicable
Eurocode or ACI standards.
In the design of plant foundations, due account should be taken of settlement criteria required by plant
manufacturers. The EPC Contractor shall state in his calculations the maximum permissible foundation
movement that may be tolerated consistent with normal operation of the Plant.
Foundations should be designed with a factor of safety in accordance with the applicable standard.
For normal loads, the foundation designs shall be based on a stress distribution of 100 per cent compression
on the underside of the base (eccentricity of loading < L/6) and within the allowable bearing capacity of the
soil. For foundations with overturning moments, the following shall be satisfied: -
Uni-axial bending: eccentricity < L/4;
Biaxial bending: 70 per cent of the base area to be effective in compression; and
Allowable bearing capacity of the soil not to be exceeded.
Permissible settlements for foundations shall not exceed settlement criteria imposed by plant manufacturers
or shall conform with the following, whichever is more stringent:
Foundation Total Settlement Differential Settlement Gradient
Gas engine and
generator foundation
10mm 5mm 1 in 750
Other plant 15mm 10mm 1 in 500
Buildings and
miscellaneous structures
25mm 15mm 1 in 300
Flexible tank foundations In accordance with manufacturers requirements

9.3.4.4. Piling (if required)
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for all matters relating to design, construction, setting out,
installation and testing of piles.

All piles shall be designed with an ultimate load bearing capacity a minimum of 2.5 x the allowable pile
capacity required for the pile. This factor of safety shall apply to compression, tension and horizontal loads.
Group effects and negative skin friction (as appropriate) shall be allowed for in the design of the piles.
The allowable load capacity and settlement characteristics shall be calculated using soil mechanics
methods. Authoritative texts shall be used throughout the design.
A 25 year design life shall be assumed in the design.
Preliminary test piles shall be constructed and tested before the installation of working piles unless otherwise
instructed by the Owner. The location of the preliminary test piles together with any reaction piles shall be
agreed with the Owner prior to installation. On completion of the preliminary tests, piles shall be cut down to
a minimum of 2m below ground level and backfilled.
Preliminary test piles shall be subject to static maintained load testing to a load equal to 2.5x the design safe
working load. A minimum of 2 preliminary pile tests for compression, tension and horizontal loads for each
proposed type and size of pile shall be conducted. The performance of the preliminary test piles shall be
reviewed against expected load bearing and settlement characteristics predicted by calculation. Should the
preliminary test piles fail to achieve the specified design characteristics the EPC Contractor shall either
modify the design of the pile or down-rate the allowable pile load.
The EPC Contractor shall also carry out proof load testing on 1% of each type and size of pile installed or a
minimum of 3 piles, whichever is the greater. The piles to be tested shall be selected by the Owner. The
proof load shall be 1.5x the allowable pile capacity. Piles shall be tested using static maintained load testing
procedures.
Static maintained load testing shall be carried out in accordance with the UK Institution of Civil Engineers
Specification for Piling and Embedded Retaining Walls 1996 or equivalent international standard agreed by
the Owner
Permissible pile settlements at proof load shall not exceed settlement criteria imposed by plant
manufacturers or shall conform with the following, whichever is more stringent:
Foundation Total Settlement Differential settlement Gradient
reciprocating engine and
generator foundation
10mm 5mm 1 in 750
Other plant 15mm 10mm 1 in 500
Building and miscellaneous
structures
15mm 10mm 1 in 300
Integrity testing shall be carried out on all piles installed at site using non-destructive testing techniques.
9.3.4.5. Earthworks
All earthworks, including initial site preparation and grading, shall be designed and carried out in accordance
with Eurocode 7. Suitable fill materials, whether selected from excavated material or imported from quarries,
shall be used throughout. Any explosive blasting shall be to the Owners agreement.
The EPC Contractor shall carry out material compliance testing and in-situ compaction testing of placed fill
materials at frequencies stated in the design basis statement and agreed with the Owner. The range of

testing required shall be agreed with the Owner prior to the commencement of earthworks operations.
Compaction shall be carried out to minimize ground movements and foundation settlement.
9.3.4.6. Structural design standards
The following standards or equivalent Oman or international standards shall apply as appropriate.
Structural: Eurocode 3; AISC
9.3.4.7. Security
The EPC Contractor shall fence off the Site and take all reasonable precautions to safeguard the health and
safety of all persons, whether or not they are his employees, from all construction and construction related
activities.
The EPC Contractors proposals for security shall be submitted to the Owner. The exact delineation of the
EPC Contractors site shall be established and agreed with the Owner prior to the commencement of the
works.
The Plant design shall include suitable security systems such as perimeter security fences. Facilities for
security personnel such as a guard house and mechanised site access gates shall also be included.
9.3.5. Roads and hard standings, car parks and paths
The EPC Contractor shall provide construction and access roads on-Site and connection to the off- Site
access roads including any permanent roads offsite that may be necessary for access to Phase 2, electricity
transmission and Gas Metering Facilities.
An access road will be required at the south west side of the site of a suitable slope to allow ease of access
to the heaviest piece of equipment for the plant approximately 5% (to be verified by calculation by the EPC
Contractor).
A second access road, with a suitable gradient for lighter vehicles of approximately 8% (to be verified by the
EPC Contractor), .is to be constructed at the North West side of the Site.
A permanent graded road is to be built to provide maintenance of the benching of the site and to provide
access to any transmission equipment on the mountain, this should be 10% maximum slope and have
suitable edge protection and 5 metre wide
All materials, workmanship and testing shall be in accordance with the procedures of the Oman transport
and highways authority (MOTC). All areas of roads or hard standing that could be subjected to a fuel, oil or
chemical spillage shall be constructed in concrete.
During construction on Site a traffic management scheme must be submitted to the owner for review and this
should incorporate a one way system where possible with proper signage. Roads on the mountain must
have adequate edge protection, suitable gradients, signage, run off points where possible and be 3 times the
width of the largest machine and properly maintained, during development passing places must be provided.
Temporary roads during construction period shall be suitable for transporting and positioning plant and
equipment.
The new permanent road system within the site shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO 2001 or
equivalent international or Oman standard to allow for adequate access and emergency situations during

operation and maintenance of both the Plant. The layout of the access roads and pavings serving the
various plant items shall be designed to allow safe manoeuvrability and hard standing for all necessary
deliveries.
All access roads to and within the site shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner on completion of the
works and the Oman highway authority.
Junctions with existing public roads shall be designed and constructed to comply with the requirements of
the Oman highways authority. Design loads shall take account of the abnormal and heavy loads which
occur during Plant construction and operation, box culverts are required under the access roads and they too
shall be designed to carry required loads.
Major access roads shall be 7 m wide and shall include the necessary kerbs, drainage, road markings and
signs. Radii shall be provided on turning areas and corners that are suitable for transporting plant during the
construction period and for maintenance purposes.
Roads shall be constructed in asphaltic concrete or hot rolled asphalt, except that concrete paving shall be
provided where Fuel Oil or chemical spillages may occur.
Road markings and signs shall be in accordance with relevant Oman standards.
Footpaths shall be of 1500 mm nominal width and designed for an accidental wheel load of 20 kN.
Footpaths shall be either precast concrete flags or hot rolled asphalt.
Within the plant area height limit gauges shall be provided where height clearances are limited and in
particular where there is danger from overhead lines.
Safety barriers shall be provided where there are exceptional local hazards or where specific plant protection
is required. These barriers shall be of the Armco or substantial bollard type and be removable.
9.3.5.1. Drainage
The EPC Contractor shall install the following drainage systems for the station:
a) Surface water drainage;
b) Foul water drainage;
c) Oil/water drainage; and
d) Chemical waste water drainage.
Drainage pipework shall be designed and constructed in accordance with Eurocode 7. Pipe materials shall
be compatible for the chemical composition and temperature of effluent discharged through them.
Underground pipework design, particularly at the interface with buildings, structures and chambers shall take
into account the effect of seismic loading.
Surface water drainage
The EPC Contractor shall design and install a surface water drainage system that shall effectively drain the
site, storm drainage may be required off site on the eastern perimeter and the EPC Contractor should
carefully consider the catchment area in the design. Where hard standings are drained, the water shall pass
through an oil/water separator fitted with oil detectors and automatic isolation valves. The effluent discharge
from the oil/water separator shall not exceed the limit values stated in the IFC 2008 Environmental Health
and Safety Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants.

The capacity of the surface water drainage system, including perimeter surface water run-off interceptor
ditches, shall be designed in accordance with Oman drainage authority procedures and storm parameters.
A fifty year return period shall be used for the design.
The design of the pipework shall be in accordance with BS EN 752 and the pipe manufacturers
recommendations in respect of pipe grade, trench dimensions, pipe bedding and protection. Recognized
and accepted design procedures shall be used in establishing design loads on buried pipelines. Manhole
and chamber covers shall be heavy duty throughout.
Sewage drainage
Pipework shall be designed to accommodate flows as a result of the maximum number of staff required to
operate the plant excluding maintenance personnel present during major overhauls etc. The pipework shall
be sized and laid to falls so that appropriate self cleansing velocities are maintained throughout the system.
The sewage drainage system shall discharge to a sewage treatment system. If raw water is to be abstracted
from groundwater the septic tank shall be positioned so that any leakage from it will not be drawn into the
well(s). The septic tank shall be located on the site in a location where leakage from it is unlikely to cause
contamination.
Oily water drainage
Oily water drainage systems shall be provided for, but not limited to, the following areas:
a) oil unloading areas;
b) oil and fuel storage compound drainage;
c) oil filled transformer compounds;
d) car parking areas; and
e) plant and equipment from which oil spillages could occur.
The EPC Contractor shall design and install an oily wastewater drainage system which shall effectively drain
all areas where oil spillages could occur. The design shall incorporate bunded areas, oil interceptors and
traps. The oily water buffer tank shall be supplied with a single level transmitter.
Bunds provided in transformer compounds, oil storage areas, lube oil tanks and such like shall have an
impounding capacity 1.1 times the largest possible oil spillage that could occur. Facilities shall be provided
to contain oil and protect the environment in the event of a catastrophic failure of the transformer.
The EPC Contractor shall provide adequate facilities for the inspection and maintenance of oil interception
equipment.
Chemical waste water drainage
Chemical waste water drainage systems shall be provided for all plant discharges which may have been
contaminated with chemicals and metals. Such flows include, but are not limited to, purge water and process
streams which have been chemically dosed. Such effluent streams shall be collected to local or a central
collection or neutralisation pit prior to off-site disposal or neutralisation/treatment. Chemical waste water shall
be treated so that it meets the requirements of the World Bank standards and the requirements of the
Environmental Impact Assessment before discharge.

9.3.5.2. Buried pressure pipelines
Buried pressure pipelines for water mains, fire water mains and rising mains for drainage shall be designed
in accordance with BS EN 1295 or equivalent international standards and parameters required by the
Owner. All pipelines carrying fuel/oils shall be installed in sealed ducts to prevent ground contamination in
the event of a pipework leak. Underground pipework design, particularly at the interface with buildings,
structures and chambers shall take into account the effect of seismic loading.
9.3.5.3. Buried services
Ducts and chambers for electrical, mechanical and telecommunication services shall be designed in
accordance with the relevant international or Oman standards and regulations
Chambers, drawpits and manholes shall incorporate a drainage sump. Where practicable the sump shall be
linked to the appropriate drainage system.
9.3.5.4. Protection of structural steelwork
The following is indicative of the type of corrosion protection surface preparation and painting:
Main and secondary steelwork In accordance with this Specification.
Cladding rails and roof purlins
(all areas)
Hot dip galvanized fixed with spun galvanized or
sherardized bolts.

Where fire protection is required this shall be by an intumescent paint system in exposed situations (subject
to required fire rating being achievable) or, where concealed, a fire resistant board system shall be
acceptable.
9.4. Specific building and architectural requirements
Deviations from the materials specified in this section may be permitted in order to comply with local building
practice and availability, provided the substitute materials are similar to those specified and are agreed by
the Owner.
9.4.1. Cladding and decking - General
Notwithstanding the following outline specifications, cladding and roof decking shall be chosen, designed,
detailed and constructed to achieve both the acoustic and thermal requirements for the plant and building
operation.
9.4.1.1. Metal wall cladding
Wall cladding, where used, shall be metal sheet to a profile and colour agreed by the Owner. The wall
cladding system shall incorporate an acoustic lining system designed to ensure that the acoustic
requirements of the project are met.
9.4.1.2. Metal roof decking
Roof decking, where used, shall be metal sheet to a colour and profile agreed with the Owner. The decking
system shall have sufficient strength to allow personnel access for maintenance purposes. The roof decking
system shall incorporate an acoustic lining system designed to ensure that the acoustic requirements of the
project are met.

9.4.1.3. Fixings
Fixing of sheeting, flashings and cappings etc. shall be compatible with the sheeting system.
9.4.1.4. Acoustic requirements
Specific requirements are stated for the maximum increase in noise levels from the completed buildings and
these shall be taken into account in the design and detailing of the cladding and roof systems to ensure that
the specified noise levels are achieved.
9.4.1.5. Laying the decking
Decking shall be laid to ensure they are straight and to an even and correct gradient. The panels shall be
fixed to steel support beams in a manner recommended by the manufacturer.
9.4.1.6. Fixing the cladding
Cladding shall be fixed to ensure they are straight and even and true to line. The panels shall be fixed to the
cladding rails in a manner recommended by the manufacturers.
9.4.1.7. Cutting
If hole cutting is required on site to accommodate penetrations, this shall be done using a motorized disc
cutter and/or hole saw or nibbler. Acetylene cutting shall not be allowed. Suitable flashings shall be
provided.
9.4.1.8. Venting
Roof vents shall be required to ventilate the voids immediately below the roof sheeting.
9.4.1.9. Flashings
All flashing, trims and sills associated with wall and roof cladding shall match the cladding/roofing system.
They shall be detailed and installed to fully close off any potential air, noise or water transmission.
9.4.1.10. Caulking compound and sealing strip/gaskets
All sealants of whatever form shall be to the recommendations of the cladding manufacturer.
9.4.1.11. Glazing
Glazing panels may be incorporated into the wall and roof cladding.
9.4.1.12. Windows
Windows incorporated into the external wall cladding shall be complete with all flashings and be fully sealed
to substrate. The vapour barrier and breather membrane shall be fully sealed to the windows.
9.4.1.13. Detail drawings
The EPC Contractor shall submit for review by the Owner detail drawings of the work in this section,
including complete scale and full size details of all cladding components, showing the relationship to
adjacent building elements, the points to which dimensions are taken and all fixing proposals.

9.4.2. Metal doors and frames
Fire resistant doors are made of steel profiles and steel sheet plates insulated with mineral wool, surface
treatment and painting similar as other steel structures
All doors shall be complete with ironmongery including locking arrangements, handles and where
appropriate emergency escape facilities. Locking shall adopt a site master key system to be agreed with the
Owner.
9.4.3. Internal doors and frames
If agreed with the Owner that doors and frames should not be metal, they shall be of an agreed hardwood.
The doors shall have fire resistance appropriate to the fire rating of the building. Fire resisting door sets shall
be installed in a manner to ensure continuity of the fire resistance between the frame and the surrounding
fire wall.
Vision panels shall be incorporated into fire doors with hardwood beads detailed so as not to compromise
the required level of fire rating.
All door sets shall be complete with ironmongery including locking arrangements handles and where
appropriate, emergency escape facilities. Locking shall accord with the site master key system to be agreed
with the Owner.
9.4.4. Louvred doors
Where applicable, doors shall be manufactured in hardwood. The top rail shall be 148 x 50 mm, with middle
and bottom rails 246 x 50 mm. The top and bottom panels shall be formed with hardwood louvre blades,
each size 70 x 10 set at 45to throw rainwater to th e external face. The EPC Contractor shall prepare a
detailed drawing, to be reviewed by the Owner prior to manufacture commencing.
9.4.5. Vision panels
Internal vision panels in blockwork walls shall be of a design to match the door sets in the relevant room.
Where appropriate the fire rating shall be the same as that of the wall in which they are situated and glazing
shall comply with the requirements of the Oman regulations.
9.4.6. Masonry
Masonry walls shall be constructed in dense concrete blocks, fair face blocks built fair face where exposed in
final construction. In all areas with suspended ceilings, the blockwork shall be finished with two coats of
plaster and painted, the remainder shall be fair faced, sealed and painted.
Necessary measures are to be taken to ensure structural stability of masonry free standing walls. Vision
panels shall be provided in the masonry walls to satisfy operational requirements.
In office areas, where if applicable, external blockwork skins are to be provided full height, to minimum
150 mm above the false ceiling (if provided), and finished to match other internal walls.
The construction of external walls shall be in accordance with relevant international or Oman construction
requirements.

9.4.7. Rainwater pipes and outlets
Rainwater pipes shall be aluminium or galvanized mild steel, medium gauge. Pipes shall generally be
straight and plumb fixed to structural steel columns. They shall be complete with suitable bends for
connection to outlets and to drainage with brackets for support from columns.
All rainwater pipes shall be routed externally. Jointing compound where required shall be compatible with
the rainwater pipe system. Inspection covers shall be provided, suitably sealed, to all pipes immediately
above ground floor level.
9.4.8. Suspended ceilings
Suspended ceilings shall be installed to all circulation areas, toilets, control rooms, offices and the like, with
recessed light fittings used in all such areas. Toilet areas shall have plain thermal tiles.
Light fittings shall be supported independently of the ceilings.
Ceiling tiles, electrical and other components shall be entirely compatible in all respects.
9.4.9. Damp proofing
The design and installation shall fully comply with the requirements of Oman regulations. Proposals for the
type and detailing of all damp proofing shall be submitted for review by the Owner.
9.4.10. Stairs
Stairs are to be provided to suit all requirements for means of escape, and the stairs and balustrades are to
be designed to satisfy the detailed requirements of the Oman regulations.
9.4.11. Sanitary ware
The detail design of the building should allow for the appropriate provision of sanitary facilities to satisfy local
standards. The proposals for layout and selection of fittings are to be submitted for review by the Owner. In
accessing sanitary requirements the EPC Contractor shall assume a maximum on-site presence of
approximately 50 personnel.
9.4.12. Finishes
9.4.12.1. General
Specifications for internal wall and floor finishes and colours in all areas of each building shall be submitted
for review by the Owner. Generally, floors and internal walls in the plant rooms and unloading bays shall be
coated with oil resistant paint.
All finishes, walls, floors, skirtings, window sills, worktops, casings and fittings shall be appropriate for the
area in which they are to be used.
9.4.12.2. Definitions of finishes
All finishes shall be such as to completely cover and obscure the base construction and priming coats such
that additional coats of paint shall not effect a significant improvement. All finishes shall be of the correct
type to withstand the various conditions under which the painting system shall operate.

9.4.12.3. Schedules
Colour/finishes schedules shall be provided showing proposals for all surfaces both site and factory finished
and submitted for review by the Owner.
9.4.12.4. Painting - general
Paints for priming, undercoating and finishing shall be ready mixed paints. All paints shall be supplied by an
agreed manufacturer. The colours of paints shall be agreed by the Owner.
9.5. Materials and workmanship
9.5.1. Codes and standards
Civil construction activities shall be carried out to the relevant international or Oman standards and codes of
practice in terms of materials and workmanship.
The latest edition of such documents shall be used, including all current amendments and additions.
9.5.2. Materials
Samples, technical descriptions and sources of supply of materials shall be submitted where required by the
Specification to the Owner.
9.5.3. Certification of materials
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any certificates required by the Specification or a
relevant international or Oman standard, together with the results of any tests on such materials that are
required by the Specification and the relevant international or Oman standards. The EPC Contractor shall
submit to the Owner a statement detailing his test procedures and testing schedule for any site
manufactured materials.
9.5.4. Plant and equipment
The EPC Contractor shall provide, for approval, details of plant and equipment to be used in the construction
of the civil works including his proposed construction craneage strategy.
9.5.5. Setting out and monitoring
All survey, setting out and levelling shall be carried out in accordance with good working practices using
instruments and equipment which shall be regularly checked and calibrated.
Information regarding site datum levels and co-ordinates shall be provided by the Owner.
Setting out stations shall be accurately positioned at locations to be agreed with the Owner and shall be
adequately protected from damage during the construction of the works.
The EPC Contractor shall carry out an accurate survey of all setting out stations relative to the site datum
and shall submit details of their co-ordinates and levels to the Owner for agreement prior to commencing any
setting out of the Works.
All subsequent survey and monitoring work shall be based upon the setting out stations and shall record
details of the reference station used.

Monitoring for movements of ground or structures shall, if required by the Owner, be carried out by the EPC
Contractor at locations and frequencies as instructed by the Owner.
All surveys and setting out work shall be fully recorded and the details and results provided to the Owner on
completion of each section of the Works.
9.5.6. Concreting strategy
The Specification for concrete, including producing, transporting, sampling, testing and assessing its
compliance shall comply with the recommendations of American Concrete Institute (ACI) or equivalent
international standard.
Workmanship shall be in accordance with ACI recommendations or equivalent international standard.
Water, admixtures, aggregates, cement or screeds shall be in accordance with ACI or equivalent
international standard. Aggregates shall be certified as not containing minerals that may cause the alkali-
silica reaction to occur, and may be produced on site using a crusher fitted with a proprietary high pressure
misting system to control dust emissions (permit to be obtained by EPC Contractor). If water for batching
concrete is obtained from boreholes or an RO plant, it shall be treated to ensure that it suitable for use in
concrete production in all respects.
Concrete may be produced from an onsite batching plant or, if available, from a local ready mix plant.
Concrete shall be placed promptly after batching. Water shall not be added to the mix after batching.
Fresh concrete shall be placed and cured in accordance with the relevant ACI standard taking into account
the ambient atmospheric conditions during the curing period.
Sampling of the concrete shall take place at the point of deposition. Concrete cubes shall be cured in similar
conditions to the placed concrete. The compression test results for concrete cubes shall be made available
to the Owner within 24 hours of the test being carried out.
The EPC Contractor shall provide full details of his proposed concreting strategy for review by the Owner.
Trial mixes shall be conducted to demonstrate the suitability of the proposed mix design.
Formwork shall be designed and constructed to withstand the worst combinations of dead, imposed,
dynamic and wind loads. Finishes to concrete surfaces shall be visibly suitable for their location.
Tolerances shall be suitable for the integrity of their location.
Worked finishes shall be suitable visually in their location.
Steel reinforcement and fabrics shall be specified to comply with ACI or equivalent international standard.
Joints in concrete shall be designed and constructed to allow for the proper functioning of the structure,
following the recommendations of the ACI or equivalent international standard.
9.5.7. Earthworks, excavation and filling
Materials, workmanship and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of Eurocode 7.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for proposing material and chemical properties for each type of
earthworks material required for the construction of the works. The material classifications shall include, but
not be limited to:

General fill
Fill to structures
Capping
Sub-base
Sub-soil
Topsoil
Filter material for abstraction wells
Pipe and duct bedding materials
Rip rap for slope protection and gabion baskets
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out compliance testing in accordance with BS1377,
ASTM standards or equivalent international or Oman standard for all material and chemical properties used
to classify each earthworks material type to determine their suitability of soils to be sourced from the Site for
use in the Works.
If the EPC Contractor intends to import earthworks materials to the site the proposed materials shall be
subject to the same classification tests as soils sourced from the site and should be available in suitable
quantities to achieve the schedule.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for arranging for an independent testing organisation to carry out
in-situ density tests on placed fill materials in accordance with BS1377, ASTM standards or equivalent
international or Oman standard.
The EPC Contractor shall present proposed earthworks material classifications, testing standards, allowable
material and chemical properties for each classification, the frequency of compliance testing and the
frequency of in-situ density testing in the design basis statement. Earthworks shall not commence until the
proposals have been agreed with the Owner.
Excavated materials considered inappropriate for reuse on site or surplus to requirements shall be disposed
of (by the EPC Contractor) offsite at a suitably licensed disposal facility or in an area of (or near to) the site
made available by the Owner.
9.5.8. Structural steelwork
9.5.8.1. General
Materials, workmanship and testing shall be in accordance with Eurocode 3
Generally the members of each individual structure shall be fabricated from steel of one grade and from the
same manufacturer.
9.5.8.2. Testing and inspection
The EPC Contractor shall give full access to the Owner at all times to the place of fabrication and storage for
the purpose of inspection and testing. Mill test certificates shall be provided when requested by the Owner.
When so instructed by the Owner, the EPC Contractor shall provide samples of the steel to be used in the
works for tests to be carried out at an independent laboratory agreed by the Owner. The cost of these
independent tests shall be paid for by the EPC Contractor. Should the works or any part thereof fail to pass

any test or in the opinion of the Owner fail to comply with the Specification, the EPC Contractor shall
immediately take such action as is necessary to ensure that the Works comply with the Specification and the
Contract.
All defective material and workmanship shall be rejected and shall be replaced and reconstructed at the EPC
Contractors expense in accordance with clause 26 of the Contract.
The EPC Contractor shall carry out non-destructive testing of all butt welds subject to tensile stresses.
Testing shall be carried out in the fabrication shop or on site as the case may be.
Unless otherwise agreed, non-destructive testing shall be by radiographic examination. Alternative forms of
testing, if agreed, shall comply with the appropriate international or Oman standard.
Any required storage pit for radioactive isotopes shall be built to ROP standards and be the responsibility of
the EPC Contractor.
9.5.8.3. Splicing and plated sections
No splicing of members between connections either by welding or bolting shall be permitted without the prior
agreement of the Owner.
Where it is necessary to fabricate sections from steel plate, fabricate laced or battened columns or where
doubler plates are to be added to hot rolled sections, all the steel used in each individual member shall be of
the same grade and be obtained from the same manufacturer.
The welding of steel of differing grades and/or from different manufacturers shall not be permitted
9.5.8.4. Shop drawings
The EPC Contractor shall prepare fully detailed shop drawings with supporting calculations for submission to
the Owner for comment and review prior to commencement of any fabrication.
Any design changes shall be submitted to the Owner on a red line drawing to be reviewed prior to
construction.
On Provisional Acceptance, as-built drawings will be submitted for each phase of completion.
Review by the Owner shall not relieve the EPC Contractor of his responsibility for the correctness of all
measurements, detailing, fabrication, alignment and erection of the Work.
9.5.8.5. Protection to steelwork
The preparation, protection and painting systems selected for ferrous surfaces shall be according to
S2.15/EP120/2-FE Sa2,5 for steel structures inside fulfilling corrosivity categories C2M, C3L and
S3.21/EPZn(R)EP160/2-FESa2,5 for steel structures outside fulfilling C3H, C4L according to EN ISO 12944.
The treatment class shall be Fe Sa2,5 according to EN ISO 8501.
Finish colour shall be selected by the Owner within the colour range available from EPC Contractors colour
program recommendation document.
The EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit, to the Owner, four copies of a complete protection and
painting schedule covering each and every item to be coated and shall fully describe the systems to be used
including surface preparation, type of coating/paint, application methods, number of coats and dry film

thickness of each. The EPC Contractor shall complete a schedule, to identify the paint manufacturer and
include representative colour samples.
It shall be understood that the intent of the Specification is to detail a protection against corrosion and other
types of damage whilst being aesthetically pleasing. It shall be the EPC Contractors responsibility to
schedule and execute the painting and coating work to this end.
All corrosion protection coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.
Where any coats are damaged, all loose and damaged paint shall be removed down to the bare steel using
a needle gun and/or rotary wire brush and adjacent sound paint which is to be over-coated shall be
thoroughly abraded to ensure adhesion of touch-up paint, all to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Surfaces which are to receive a fire protective coating shall be delivered to site with travel coatings applied
and shall be suitably protected until immediately prior to the fire protective coatings or casings being applied.
The latter shall be applied as late as possible in the construction programme subject to other trades and
operations. Primer and travel coat shall be compatible with the fire protection coating.
9.5.8.6. Fire protection to steelwork
All fire protection proposals and applications shall be in accordance with NFPA standards and shall be to the
satisfaction of relevant local and fire authorities, to give adequate fire protection when tested.
The coatings shall be applied by a specialist applicator strictly in accordance with the product manufacturers
recommendations.
9.5.8.7. Erection
Prior to the erection of permanent steelwork, the EPC Contractor shall submit for the Owners review a
detailed method statement with all supporting drawings and calculations setting out his sequence for
erection, laydown areas, details of craneage etc. The Owners review shall not relieve the EPC Contractor of
his responsibilities under the Contract.
9.5.8.8. Foundation bolts
Boxing out for bolts shall not be permitted. Tolerance tubes shall be fitted to foundation bolts. The projection
of threaded portions of bolts above the foundation level shall be adequate to properly secure the nuts. All
nuts shall be lock nuts or nyloc type, prior to use the nuts & bolts shall be protected using denso tape or
similar.
9.5.9. Drainage and buried pressure pipelines
Materials, workmanship and testing shall be in accordance with relevant international or Oman guidelines
and the requirements of the refinery. The drainage and pipeline systems shall, in all respects, suit the liquids
that have to be carried, pipe bedding materials shall also comply with the relevant standards. Proposals for
testing buried pipelines shall be in accordance with the relevant international standard and presented in the
design basis statement.
9.5.10. Concrete, formwork and reinforcement
All materials, workmanship and testing shall be in accordance with the applicable Eurocode Standards.
Water/liquid retaining structures shall be designed constructed and tested in accordance with Eurocode 2.
Proposals for testing shall be presented in the design basis statement.

9.5.11. Brickwork and blockwork
All materials, workmanship and testing shall be in accordance with Oman standards. Bricks for the
construction of manholes, inspection chambers, catch-pits etc, shall be engineering bricks. Proposals for
testing shall be presented in the design basis statement.
9.5.12. Builders work
All materials and tests shall be in accordance with the relevant International Standards.
9.5.13. Fencing & gates
9.5.13.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall erect permanent boundary fencing for the site which shall be to agreement by the
Owner. Fencing shall also be provided to areas where it is necessary to restrict access, such as transformer
compounds. The fencing shall be of the un-climbable or security or anti intruder type consisting of chain link
mesh. The fencing and gates shall be designed and constructed in accordance with Royal Oman Police
standards and shall include fence monitoring using acoustic cabling, CCTV system to monitor the perimeter
The following fencing shall be provided:
The defined Plant area shall be fenced (style to be agreed) to secure the facility against intruders.
The substation will be fenced by others.
9.5.13.2. Concrete
Foundation to posts, struts, bases and anti-burrowing kerbs shall be in concrete or reinforced concrete.
9.5.14. Landscaping
The layout of hard landscaped areas shall be agreed with the Owner prior to commencement of work. The
landscaping scheme shall incorporate protection measures to all slopes to prevent erosion or instability
including, but not limited to: suitable slope angles, bench heights and widths, rock bolting, gabion baskets,
rip rap, shotcrete etc. Use of each methods suitability for different areas to be demonstrated through
calculation..
Soft landscaping shall consist of low maintenance open grassed areas.
The landscaping scheme shall ensure that the Site is efficiently drained.
9.5.15. Laydown area
Laydown areas shall be established by the EPC Contractor and shall be subject to agreement by the Owner.
The EPC Contractor shall allow for any necessary traffic management measures which are required to
satisfy the Oman highway regulations. On Provisional Acceptance, laydown areas shall be cleared of all
debris, graded and laid to level and left in a tidy condition to the agreement of the Owner.
9.6. Auxiliary transformer compounds
Transformer compounds for oil-filled transformers shall be constructed with blast walls between transformers
and a bund wall at the entrance to each compound. The transformer support substructures shall be
designed to contain any escaping oil. The oil retaining structures shall be filled with fire quenching graded

round stones providing an air void capacity at least 120 % of the transformer total oil volume. Segregated
ducts shall be provided for any cables installed within the substructures.
Each compound shall be provided oil/water separators with water outlets drains and oil retaining chambers
with pumping out facilities. Each compound shall be provided witha blast / fire resistant walls to sides and
rear to prevent fire spreading from one compound to another. Firewalls shall be designed for a minimum
4 hour fire resistance. The dimensions of each compound shall be adequate for installation, operation and
removal, and to allow for sufficient cooling of the transformers.
Compounds shall each be provided with suitable chain link or palisade fencing and a lockable access gate.
Each transformer compound shall be equipped with skid rails and demountable or fixed hauling bollards /eye
to allow the easy installation and removal of transformers and ancillary equipment.

10. Provisional Acceptance
10.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for pre-commissioning, commissioning, functional testing, and the
successful completion of Acceptance Tests in relation to the Plant. The test sequence shall follow a
structured programme with logical progression for each sub-system and system until the completed Works is
ready for the Acceptance Testing.
Performance Tests shall be performed in accordance with agreed standards according to American Society
of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), International Organisation for Standarisation (ISO), Deutsches Institut
fr Normung (DIN), British Standards (BS), International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and such
other standards that may be reasonably requested by the Buyer.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for providing all the necessary permanent and temporary
equipment, materials, consumables (excluding fuel) and services to meet his commitments with regard to
this phase of the Work.
The EPC Contractor shall provide all test equipment and instrumentation which, prior to use on Site, shall be
calibrated at the EPC Contractor's expense. All test and valid, current calibration certificates shall be
submitted by the EPC Contractor before the use of any such equipment on Site.
To the maximum extent possible, the tests shall make use of the permanently installed instrumentation.
Where possible this same instrumentation shall be suitable for use for the Performance Tests. The installed
instrumentation shall have accuracy levels to meet the requirements of the relevant performance Codes and
Standards. The EPC Contractor shall facilitate and operate permit-to-run and permit-to-work procedures for
site contractors during commissioning.
All tests and such activities may be witnessed by the Owner. Third parties may also witness some or all of
the tests.
The Owner will provide operation and maintenance staff to gain familiarity with the installation and assist with
operations during testing and commissioning but the EPC Contractor shall remain fully responsible for the
safe operation and testing of all equipment throughout the commissioning period and up to Handover.
The EPC Contractor shall supply and top up all chemicals, lubricants and grease and other consumables
during the commissioning period until Handover. The EPC Contractor shall also charge up all lubricant and
chemical supplies to full capacity immediately prior to Handover.
The EPC Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to obtain and record all test data as may be
required while the Owner may take check data as desired.
All checks, inspections and test activities and results shall be recorded by the EPC Contractor and shall be
available for inspection by the Owner at all times during the course of the Works.
The EPC Contractor shall submit three hard copies and one soft copy of the EPC Contractors
documentation on Provisional Acceptance.
10.2. Commissioning plans, procedures and programme
The EPC Contractor shall produce a Quality Plan to detail all pre-commissioning, commissioning and testing
requirements of the Works.

Fully detailed written commissioning procedures shall be submitted to the Owner for all commissioning
activities and tests. Unless otherwise noted, the procedures shall be finalised and submitted at least three
weeks prior to the programmed start of any particular activity.
All procedures shall include marked-up P&IDs, wiring diagrams etc showing valve positions (open or closed),
sequence of operations with valve numbers and location of temporary strainers, fittings and pipe runs etc.
The procedures shall cover all necessary inspections, adjustments and tests including clean out of vessels
and temporary strainers to achieve progress through operation from no load to full load capacity.
The acceptance criteria for the test parameters shall be clearly indicated in the commissioning and testing
procedures. All safety procedures to be adhered to shall also be included.
The procedures shall be divided into sections for each item of plant or system and shall include:
Diagrammatic arrangement drawings of the item or system showing the major components with
references to the relevant instrumentation and interlocks;
A description in the form of a list, table or similar or the design operating conditions with details of all
restrictions, precautions and limits on plant operation applicable to that section of the plant during the
pre-commissioning and commissioning periods and then to subsequent operation;
A list of all of the required settings of all protective devices and alarms for that section of the Plant;
A detailed programme for the activities to be carried out from the completion of erection of each section
of the Plant to the finish of its commissioning and performance trials. This programme is to identify all
links with the work of other EPC Contractors and of the Owner, especially those which must be
completed before the EPC Contractor is able to proceed with pre-commissioning of that plant section;
Copies of the EPC Contractor's check sheets for the pre-commissioning, commissioning and testing of
each plant item or system. These sheets shall provide a means for recording:
the plant set-up dimensions, measurements and/or calibration
the name of the person who checked the above
details of the operational testing carried out, the results of the tests and of any adjustments
necessary to enable the equipment to meet its specified requirements.
Procedures for Acceptance Tests shall be submitted for agreement no later than six months prior to the
planned date for the Acceptance Tests.
The EPC Contractor shall provide a commissioning programme at least three months prior to the planned
commissioning start date. The programme shall show the planned sequence of testing and include all
activities from functional testing/pre-commissioning through to successful completion of the Acceptance
Tests. Once commissioning activities begin, the programme shall be updated weekly.
10.3. Commissioning coordinating group
No later than six months prior to the planned commencement of commissioning, a commissioning
coordinating group shall be established to coordinate and facilitate commissioning activities. The group shall
include representatives of the Owner and EPC Contractor. Third parties may be invited to attend as
required, such as transmission line/sub-station and gas facility contractors. The group shall be chaired by the
Owner and shall meet weekly to perform this role.

10.4. Commissioning
10.4.1. Functional tests/pre-commissioning
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for performing mechanical testing and functional testing of all plant
to confirm compliance with design basis and operating criteria. During this period the EPC Contractor shall
undertake all installation checks, preliminary mechanical and electrical checks, pressure testing, flushing and
cleaning of equipment and pipework, proving the integrity of all connections (mechanical and electrical),
safety systems and verification that all Plant is functionally complete.
These tests shall include, but are not limited to, open and short circuit testing of the generator, verification
and checking of all protection settings, checking of plant inter-tripping circuits (including engine trips and
shutdown) and inter-tripping circuits between the plant and grid equipment.
Where plant components form part of a system, each component comprising that system shall be similarly
inspected and tested prior to placing the system into service. Static tests to demonstrate interactive
operation of components within the system shall also be completed prior to charging or energizing the
system for the first time.
10.4.2. Commissioning
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all the commissioning work associated with
bringing the plant to a condition where it is ready to undergo its reliability and performance tests.
Prior to the start of commissioning, the EPC Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has been provided with
the latest edition of all relevant documents and drawings.
Once the component or system is charged, energized or otherwise made live, the EPC Contractor shall
conduct further tests to demonstrate that the system and its constituent components function collectively as
designed, that individual components operate at varying loads under steady state conditions within their
stated operating parameters, and that the components and system respond correctly to transient conditions.
The EPC Contractor shall undertake whatever adjustments are necessary to achieve the optimal level of
plant reliability, capacity and performance. Base line operational data including vibration, temperature,
voltage, current, pressure etc. shall be recorded for all equipment and systems.
All fuel supply systems shall be tested to demonstrate satisfactory fuel pressure/flow control under all
operating conditions including start-up and shutdown.
When the EPC Contractor has completed all commissioning of all the local and remote/supervisory control
functions, every function shall be demonstrated to have been commissioned, calibrated and loop tested.
Tests to verify the correct and safe operation of the plant shall also be conducted to a protocol agreed
between EPC Contractor and Owner.
10.5. Testing
The Owners operations and maintenance group shall have completed the classroom and operational
portions of the training programme required by the Contract prior to starting the tests. The Plant shall be
operated by the Owners O&M staff under the direction and supervision of the EPC Contractor. The EPC
Contractor shall remain responsible for the satisfactory conduct of each test.
The testing of the Works shall comprise:

2. Tests on completion and
22) Acceptance Tests comprising:
Start up tests
Trial run
Pre-reliability run tests
Reliability run tests
Initial performance tests
Fuel switching tests
Environmental testing (noise, emissions and effluent water quality)
Grid compliance testing.
Black start and energising of the 132 kV transmission line
Full load rejection test (one unit must remain connected to supply house and local loads)
The Tests on Completion shall be satisfactorily passed prior to commencement of the Acceptance Tests.
The Reliability Run shall be satisfactorily passed prior to commencement of the Performance Tests.
Elements of the noise tests may be undertaken in conjunction with the Performance Tests. All noise tests
shall be completed before the commencement of the Reliability Run. Emissions tests shall be performed in
conjunction with the Performance Tests. Grid compliance testing may be undertaken when convenient, prior
to Plant Provisional Acceptance.
10.6. Tests on completion
The object of these tests is to demonstrate the fitness for purpose of the plant and systems prior to
commercial operation and Plant Provisional Acceptance. The scope of tests shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
Testing of the Gas Connection Facilities, Gas Metering Facilities and Metering Systems;
performance of the governing system and protective devices;
demonstration of capability of each engine to operate at normal base load rating on stand-by fuel for 6-
hours;
demonstration of capability of each engine to operate at normal base load rating on Natural Gas for 6-
hours;
fuel change-over tests of each engine at full load (gas to oil to gas)
plant ramp-rate test;
demineralised water treatment plant capacity and purity tests;
demonstration of adequacy of building services (HVAC systems performance, lighting levels (normal
and emergency)) etc;
demonstration of capacity, capability and functionality of all other balance of plant systems (e.g.
compressed air supply, fire protection systems etc);
demonstration of the starting reliability of the Works;
The start up performance (ramping rate) of each engine and of the Plant shall be demonstrated by recording
the megawatts of electrical power from the unit at the initiation of synchronisation and the time elapsed to
achieve base load.

The intent of some of the tests on the balance of plant systems may have been demonstrated during earlier
commissioning tests and, subject to the agreement of the Owner, acting reasonably, further demonstrations
or testing may not be required.
10.7. Acceptance Tests
In conducting the tests, the performance of each of the Power Unit Blocks and, thereafter, the plant shall be
evaluated. The Owner recognises that the RAEC System has limitations and cannot accept loads at GCPC
or GCPFC for the Acceptance Tests. Depending on the period in the year, it is expected that the RAEC
System will be able to accept one or more power units configured as a Power Unit Block. Accordingly, the
Acceptance Test shall be conducted for one Power Unit Block at a time. On successful completion of each
such Acceptance Test, the Demonstrated Power Capacity and associated Electrical Energy of the Power
Unit Block shall be made available to the Owner. On successful completion of the Acceptance Test of the
final Power Unit Block, the Plant Acceptance Test shall be conducted within the constraints of the RAEC
System.
10.7.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall perform output and heat rate performance tests of each dual fuel engine fired on
Natural Gas and Fuel Oil to demonstrate that the Works complies with the contractual performance
guarantees.
The whole of the Plant shall be tested in accordance with the standards of the agreed quality plans and
testing procedures. The Owner and nominated third parties shall be invited to witness all tests.
Due to RAEC System limitations the Plant shall be designed and constructed so that, for the purpose of
testing the Plant, each Power unit block will be independently tested.
Power output and heat rate of the overall Plant shall be determined in accordance with ISO 3046 and ISO
8528.
The EPC Contractor shall formulate the testing procedure for carrying out performance tests on the plant
with regard to identifying scope of tests, references and definitions, guiding principles, preparation for tests,
operating conditions for tests, instruments and methods of measurements, computation of results and test
report.
The precise nature of the tests together with testing procedures and programmes, accuracy of
measurement, expected measurement uncertainty etc shall be provided by the EPC Contractor and shall be
agreed between EPC Contractor and Owner prior to execution of the tests.
10.7.1.1. Conditions of test
During the contractual guarantee performance tests the plant mode of operation shall be as follows:
the engine shall be operated at full load and part load (75% and 50%);
all standby auxiliaries shall be operational; and
variations exceeding steady state conditions shall invalidate the test run and shall be repeated.
The Plant shall be operated in a normal mode which is representative of a long term operating configuration
with all equipment operating as designed and within specification and alarm limits consistent with good
power generation industry practice. No normally operating systems should be taken out of service including
jumpering or suppressing of alarms unless specifically allowed in the test procedure.

Sufficient data shall be collected during the tests to demonstrate that no item of plant or equipment is
operating beyond its maximum continuous rating (MCR). If equipment that is found to have been operating
beyond its MCR at the time of these tests is changed or replaced in such a way as to affect its auxiliary
consumption or such that the results of the tests could have been different, then the test results shall be
amended to take account of this or the tests shall be repeated. Every effort shall be made to run the test
under the reference operating conditions, or as close to the reference conditions as possible, in order to
reduce the application of corrections to the test results.
10.7.1.2. Guaranteed Performance Levels
There shall be no tolerances applied to the fully corrected measured values for the purpose of comparison
with the Guaranteed Performance Levels. All margins required for instrument uncertainties and for all other
reasons shall be deemed to be included in the guarantee figures.
No corrections for degradation shall be applied except for any hours the Owner has required the plant to
operate commercially for any reason.
During testing and for the purpose of guarantees GCPC, GCPFC, GCPUC, GCPUFC and heat rates shall be
based on the following Reference Site Conditions.
Reference Site Conditions
Ambient air temperature (dry bulb) 50C
Relative humidity 30%
Ambient barometric pressure 1013 mbar
Expected LHV of Natural Gas 882 Btu/Scf
Lower calorific value for Fuel Oil 42.6 MJ/kg
Frequency 50Hz within RAEC Code limits
Generator power factor 0.8 lag to 0.95 lead.
10.7.1.3. Correction to guarantee basis conditions
The tests results recorded during the Performance Test shall be corrected, as applicable, to those which
would have been achieved had the test been carried out at the guarantee basis conditions by using agreed
correction curves and/or formulae to be supported by data provided by the main power island OEM .
These correction curves and/or formulae shall include, but may not necessarily be limited to:
correction for ambient temperature;
correct for humidity;
correction for barometric pressure;
correction for fuel calorific value;
correction for power factor; and
correction for gas composition range provided in Appendix A.
The correction curves and formulae shall be provided in the Performance Test Procedures. The polynomial
equation for each correction curve shall be provided.
10.7.1.4. Metering
The EPC Contractor shall supply main and backup Metering Systems to measure electrical energy imported
and exported by the Plant. One set of meters shall be used to separately measure the Electrical Energy

imported and exported by the Plant. The second set of the meters measuring in the same manner as the first
set, will be used for verification purposes. Each set of meters shall be connected to a separate set of current
transformers.
The electrical output of the generator shall be measured by test-standard kilowatt meters of Class 0.2 or
current transformers and voltage transformers Class 1, or better, installed in the appropriate feeders. All
electrical meters used in the test shall be calibration checked immediately prior to the test. The electrical
losses in transformers shall be calculated from the functional tests of the transformers, if applicable.
Should any auxiliary loads that would not normally be operating at the guaranteed point be operating due to
any reason, then the total of the absorbed powers (or nameplate rating if powers cannot be measured
individually) shall be added to the measured net capacity figure to give the net capacity that would have
resulted had these loads not been operating.
The Metering Systems provided shall be of suitable accuracy for performance testing according to the
appropriate test code.
Procedures for measurement of other parameters, such as ambient temperature, barometric pressure,
relative humidity etc, shall be fully detailed in the Performance Tests.
Fuel flowmeters shall be independently calibrated in an independent qualified test facility. Pressure
difference transducers measuring pressure drop across a fuel flowmeter shall be calibrated at line static
pressure. No test measuring orifice plates, nozzles or venturi tubes shall be installed without the agreement
of and witnessing by the Owner.
10.7.1.5. Fuel analysis
Samples of the fuel used during the Tests shall be taken just prior to and on completion of each Test run.
The EPC Contractor shall supply the necessary apparatus for taking and containing the fuel samples. Three
separate samples shall be taken at each of the two sampling periods. One of each set of three samples
shall be analysed by an independent authority and the costs of these analyses shall be borne by the EPC
Contractor. One sample of each set of three shall be properly labelled and handed over to the Owner. One
set shall be maintained by an independent party in case of dispute of the results.
The characteristics to be determined shall include:
density at standard reference conditions (mass per unit volume);
higher and lower calorific values;
mole percentage of gas constituents.
The EPC Contractor shall provide fuel flow measurement equipment. All Natural Gas flow rate calculations,
either manual or flow computer, shall be performed in accordance with gas properties determined from ISO
12213.
10.7.1.6. Instruments and tolerances
Just prior to the Performance Test, every test instrument required for the measurement of test data shall be
checked and recalibrated if necessary.
All instruments used in the Performance Tests shall be of the standard, quality and measurement accuracy
suitable for performance testing as specified in the Performance Test Code.

Instruments for primary measurements shall be calibrated using standard reference sources or shall have
been previously calibrated and certified by independent nationally or internationally agreed calibration
authorities. Instruments shall have been calibrated in an accredited facility subject to the agreement of the
Owner.
Calibration certificates shall be provided for the test instruments at the time of test. The costs involved in
preparation of calibration certificates shall be borne by the EPC Contractor.
10.7.2. Environmental tests
10.7.2.1. General
The EPC Contractor shall undertake noise and emission tests to prove that the plant meets all relevant noise
requirements and environmental planning consents. As a minimum, all environmental tests as required by
MECA for the Plant shall be carried out.
10.7.2.2. Emissions to air
Emissions compliance tests of each dual fuel engine when fired on Natural Gas and on Fuel Oil shall be
conducted by an agreed party experienced with such testing. Normal plant start up and operating
procedures should be used in operating the unit during the tests. All plant systems shall be in automatic
control.
The scope of testing shall include the following:
Point Pollutant
Main Stack NO
Main Stack NO
2

Main Stack Total NO
X

Main Stack UHC
Main Stack SO2
Main Stack CO
Main Stack Flue gas flow rate
Main Stack Oxygen content
Main Stack Temperature
10.7.2.3. Noise
The number of locations to be tested shall be agreed by the Owner and EPC Contractor.
Far field noise measurements shall be taken during a range of operating conditions, including start-up,
normal baseload operation, and shut down. Prior to testing a measure shall be made of the background
noise levels without plant operating. Measurements shall preferably be made at night in a period of low
background noise levels from other sources and minimum off-site vehicle movement.
The measurement equipment shall comply with ANSI S1.4 precision standards. For work area noise
acceptance tests, equivalent continuous levels shall be obtained at a minimum distance of 1 m from the
surface of equipment, acoustic enclosures, or room boundaries.
The results of the tests shall be fully reported together with operating conditions of the equipment,
meteorological conditions, noise measurements, instrument locations and instrument details.

Any increase in noise levels above that allowed in the Contract shall be investigated and should these be
shown to be as a result of noise emanating from new plant, then the EPC Contractor shall remedy same at
his own cost by the installation of sound attenuation measures. Repeat tests shall then be carried out to
demonstrate that the remedial works have been successful in eliminating the noise problem.
10.7.3. Gas Connection Facilities and Gas Metering Facilities Tests
The EPC Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of the proposed date of the commencement of the Gas
Connection Facilities and Gas Metering Facilities tests at least thirty five (35) days prior to such proposed
date. The Gas Connection Facilities and Gas Metering Facilities tests shall include but not be limited to the
following activities:
a) mechanical and electrical tests;
b) pre-energisation functional tests;
c) testing and calibration of control settings;
d) testing and calibration of protection systems;
e) installation of temporary flare unit and
f) gas supply to system.
Prior to the testing of the Power Units, the EPC Contractor shall test and commission the GCF. The testing
and commissioning will be done in accordance with generally accepted industry standards and shall include
the full load testing of the Gas Connection Facilities using a temporary flare system. Tests shall also include
tests to demonstrate automatic change-over of standby equipment of the Plants Natural Gas supply system.
Following completion of the tests of the Gas Connection Facilities and Gas Metering Facilities, the EPC
Contractor shall disconnect the temporary flare system. EPC Contractor shall also submit to the Owner a
report (the Gas Connection Facilities and Gas Metering Facilities Test Report) which shall contain all
supporting information and documentation required to substantiate the results of any Acceptance Test,
including proof of compliance with the acceptance requirements, prior to any Natural Gas supply to the first
Power Unit.
10.7.4. Power Unit Block Acceptance Tests
The Power Unit Block Acceptance Tests shall include but not be limited to the tests in this section. If a
Power Unit Block cannot be tested at the required load levels due to RAEC system limitations, then the tests
shall be carried out on a Power Unit basis together with necessary tests of the all the Power Units of the
Power Unit Block operating at part load to demonstrate the Power Unit Blocks ability to meet the
Acceptance Tests as set out below.
10.7.4.1. Start-up Tests
The EPC Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of the proposed date of the commencement of the
Start-up Test for each Power Unit Block at least thirty five (35) days prior to such proposed date. The Start-
up Test shall include but not be limited to the following activities:
c) testing and calibration of control settings of the step-up transformers, the Power Units, the Power Unit
Blocks and required parts of the Plant;
d) testing and calibration of protection systems;

e) simulation of test load rejections on the individual Power Units or the Power Unit Blocks due to a trip
condition at full load rating and at part loads to verify control systems and Power Unit governor operation
and the automatic voltage regulation system;
f) testing of the partial and full load rejection of each Power Unit and Power Unit Block to demonstrate for
example, step and emergency loading of Power Unit Block, island operation;
g) verification and checking of the operating stability and frequency response of the Power Units, or Power
Unit Block when operated within the technical limits with load variations;
h) part load and full load tests of the Power Units and the Power Unit Blocks;
i) testing automatic and manual fuel changeover including changeover fuel switch from Natural Gas to
Fuel Oil on a trip of the Gas Connection Facilities on low Natural Gas supply pressure and stable
operation on Fuel Oil, fuel switch from Fuel Oil to Natural Gas, checking of automatic change-over of
standby facilities on Natural Gas and Fuel Oil;
j) testing automatic and manual fuel changeover including changeover from Natural Gas to Fuel Oil on a
fall in the Natural Gas supply pressure at the gas delivery point and stable operation on Fuel Oil, fuel
switch from Fuel Oil to Natural Gas, checking of automatic change-over of standby facilities on Natural
Gas and Fuel Oil;
k) verification of start-up times and loading rates of Power Units, Power Unit Blocks and after various
shutdown periods including tests when Power Units are on hot standby with both Natural Gas and Fuel
Oil;
l) demonstration of load setting/control from main control room and of the data exchange to main control
room and the load dispatch centre for Electrical Energy;
m) verification by the EPC Contractor of completeness of the Power Unit Block and of all ancillary
equipment, compliance with the Law and of no known defects or outstanding works that would affect the
safe and reliable operation of the Plant;
n) other tests required to demonstrate the safety and security of the Plant and trip systems.
10.7.4.2. Trial Run
After the Start-up Tests have been duly completed, each Power Unit, including its associated auxiliaries,
shall be operated for a minimum twenty four (24) hour trial run at load settings and operating conditions
agreed by the parties (the Trial Run). A Power Unit on Trial Run will be isolated from all other Power Units
on Acceptance Tests and or operation prior to Plant Provisional Acceptance. Starts and stops and switch-
overs to standby equipment shall be included in the Trial Run. The EPC Contractor shall be permitted to
undertake such work during the Trial Run as is necessary to optimise the running of the Power Unit. The
EPC Contractor may extend the duration of the Trial Run to evaluate whether the Power Unit will be able to
achieve the quality and stability of operation which would be required for the Reliability Run and the
Performance Tests.
After the Trial Runs of each Power Unit of the Power Unit Block have been Duly Completed, each Power
Unit Block, including its associated auxiliaries, shall be operated for a minimum twenty four (24) hour trial run
at load settings and operating conditions agreed by the parties (the Trial Run). A Power Unit Block on Trial
Run will be isolated from all other Power Units on Acceptance Tests and or operation prior to Plant
Provisional Acceptance. Starts and stops and switch-overs to standby equipment shall be included in the
Trial Run. The EPC Contractor shall be permitted to undertake such work during the Trial Run as is
necessary to optimise the running of the Power Unit Block. The EPC Contractor may extend the duration of
the Trial Run to evaluate whether the Power Unit Block will be able to achieve the quality and stability of
operation which would be required for the Reliability Run and the Performance Tests.

10.7.4.3. Pre-reliability Run Tests
After the Trial Run has been duly completed, the EPC Contractor shall prior to undertaking the Reliability
Run demonstrate that the Power Unit Block has the following operational capabilities:
a) the Power Unit Block is fully dispatchable between [ten] per cent ([10]%) and one hundred per cent
(100%) of its Demonstrated Power Capacity when running on Natural Gas;
b) the Power Unit Block is fully dispatchable between [twenty] per cent ([20]%) and one hundred per cent
(100%) of its Demonstrated Power Capacity when running on Fuel Oil;
c) the Power Unit Block is fully dispatchable at one hundred per cent (100%) of its Demonstrated Power
Capacity when running on Natural Gas; and
d) the Power Unit Block is fully dispatchable at one hundred per cent (100%) of its Demonstrated Power
Capacity when running on Fuel Oil.
These tests will require to be carried out with part and all the Power Units of a Power Unit Block subject to
the load availability of the RAEC System.
10.7.4.4. Reliability Run Tests
The Reliability Run shall be carried out for each Power Unit together with the associated auxiliaries. The
Power Unit to be tested shall be operated as if it had achieved commercial operation for a period as agreed
by the Parties but which shall be no shorter than three (3) consecutive days for each Power Unit (each the
Reliability Run).
On completion of the Reliability Run of all the Power Units of a Power Unit Block, the Reliability Run shall be
carried out for each Power Unit Block together with the associated auxiliaries. The Power Unit Block to be
tested shall be operated as if it had achieved commercial operation for a period as agreed by the Parties but
which shall be no shorter than four (4) consecutive days for each Power Unit Block (each the Reliability
Run). If a single Power Unit is connected to a step-up transformer to form a Power Unit Block, it shall be
operated as if it had achieved commercial operation for a period as agreed by the Parties but which shall be
no shorter than seven (7) consecutive days.
In the event of loss or reduction of generating capacity or a failure to meet dispatch instructions
(Interruption) during any Reliability Run, part or all of the Reliability Run shall be repeated in accordance
with the following schedule:
a) For each Power Unit
Day of Reliability Run on
which Interruption occurs
Maximum number of
permitted Interruptions
within permitted period
Maximum permitted
period of aggregate
Interruption and re-start
requirement if period
exceeded.
Day 0 1 1 3 hours. Re-start on Day 0
b) For each Power Unit Block

Maximum number of
permitted Interruptions
within permitted period
Maximum permitted period
of aggregate Interruption
and re-start requirement if
period exceeded.
The Reliability Run shall be re-started if either the maximum aggregate period of Interruption is exceeded or
the maximum number of permitted Interruptions is exceeded.
Where the Interruption does not require the whole or part of the Reliability Run to be re-run, the length of the
Reliability Run shall be extended by the period of any Interruption.
10.7.4.5. Initial Performance Tests
After a Power Unit Blocks Reliability Run has been Duly Completed, the Demonstrated Power Capacity of
that Power Unit Block and the Gross Power Capacity of that Power Unit Block and Gross Power Capacity at
generator terminal of each Power Unit of the relevant Power Unit Block shall be demonstrated by
Performance Tests (each the Initial Performance Test).
During the Initial Performance Test of the, Power Unit Block, the heat rate at Demonstrated Power Capacity
of the Power Unit Block and each Power Unit of the relevant Power Unit Block on Natural Gas and Fuel Oil
shall be tested in accordance with agreed Performance Test procedure and Performance Test codes. The
achievement of the required Performance parameters shall be evidenced. In the event that the RAEC
System load is inadequate for the Initial Performance Test of the Power Unit Block, the tests shall be carried
out an individual Power Unit basis and the auxiliary power consumption corrected as applicable for the
Power Unit Block case. Auxiliary power consumption and auxiliary power losses which require to be
corrected for the Initial Performance Test of the Power Unit Block, shall be recorded separately. All the
requirements of Initial Performance Test of the Power Unit Block shall be applicable for the Initial
Performance Test of the Power Unit.
During the Tests, the EPC Contractor shall, unless the Owner agrees otherwise in writing, operate the Power
Units in normal mode, i.e. not in peaking or overload mode.
If at any time during a Test of the Power Unit Block, the RAEC System frequency is outside the limits defined
by the RAEC Code, the Test shall be stopped and, after co-ordination with the Licensed Transmission
System Operator, shall be repeated by the EPC Contractor.
Power Unit Block Initial Performance Tests shall be conducted under normal auxiliary power loading
conditions. The Demonstrated Power Capacity shall be reduced to reflect the shortfall in auxiliary power
loading between the maximum auxiliary power loading and the auxiliary power loading conditions at the time
of such Power Unit Block Performance Tests.
The Initial Performance Tests of the Power Unit Block shall have been satisfactorily completed only if the
following conditions are met:
a) achievement of not less than ninety per cent (90%) of the block GCPC on Natural Gas;

b) achievement of not more than one hundred and ten per cent (110%) of the heat rate of the Power Unit
Blocks in operation on Natural Gas;
c) achievement of the guaranteed emission levels and qualities of the Power Unit Block; and
d) during Performance Tests, environmental emissions tests shall be carried out and environmental
emissions shall be demonstrated to be within levels authorised by the Ministry for Environment and
Climate Affairs of the Government or any other Competent Authority which is from time to time
responsible for environmental matters and the monitoring of environmental emissions in the Sultanate of
Oman.
10.7.4.6. Acceptance Requirements
The EPC Contractor shall provide notification in writing (together with all supporting documentation) that the
following requirements (Acceptance Requirements) of the Power Unit Block have been satisfied as part of
the Acceptance Test:
a) all permits and other approvals required for the operation of the Power Unit Block shall be in full force
and effect;
b) the Royal Oman Police shall have inspected and approved (in writing) the fire detection and protection
systems of the Power Unit Block;
c) all required environmental tests shall have been completed and emissions demonstrated to be within
levels required by Law;
d) communications between the plant and the Owner/Licensed Transmission System Operator and the
plant and MOG shall have been tested and shall be fully operational; and
e) the Fuel Oil storage tanks contain sufficient Fuel Oil to operate the Power Unit Block for a continuous
period of at least ten (10) days at GCPFC.
10.7.4.7. Acceptance Test Report
Following completion of the Acceptance Test of the Power Unit Block, the EPC Contractor shall submit to the
Owner a report (the Acceptance Test Report) which shall contain all supporting information and
documentation required to substantiate the results of any Acceptance Test, including proof of compliance
with the Acceptance Requirements.
10.7.5. Plant Acceptance Tests
Once all the Power Unit Block Tests have been completed and the relevant Tests have been passed, further
Tests will be undertaken to demonstrate the plants ability to meet the minimum acceptance requirements
and the overall performance parameters required. Given the load constraints on the RAEC system, it will not
be possible to undertake Performance Tests to demonstrate, inter alia, GCPC, GCPFC and contracted heat
rates at high plant loads. The testing procedures at the plant level should therefore focus on demonstrating
the performance of any elements of the Plant that have not been tested as part of the Power Unit Block
Acceptance Tests and the ability of the Plant to integrate the operation of the Power Unit Blocks under
normal operation.
The EPC Contractor shall conduct Plant Acceptance Tests as below:

10.7.5.1. Start-up Tests
Start Up Tests will be required for equipment not previously tested during the Power Unit Block Acceptance
Tests. The Start-up Tests of the Plant as per this Section require to be completed prior to the Trial Run of the
Plant.
The Start-up Test shall include but not be limited to the following activities (to be collectively referred to as
the Start-up Test):
c) testing and calibration of control settings of the remaining plant systems;
d) testing and calibration of remaining protection systems;
e) simulation of Test load rejections on the Plant due to a trip condition at part loads to verify control
systems and Power Unit governor operation and the automatic voltage regulation system. Due to RAEC
System limitations this may require to be done on groups of Power Units at a time and repeated to cover
all remaining Power Units;
f) testing of the partial load rejection of the Plant to demonstrate for example, step and emergency loading
of Plant on loss of a step-up transformer at low loads and higher loads and island operation of Plant;
g) verification and checking of the operating stability and frequency response of the Plant when operated
within the technical limits with load variations. The EPC Contractor should note that there could be
potential limitations due to RAEC System limitations for entire Plant Tests and the EPC Contractor shall
demonstrate the Plant capabilities within these limitations;
h) Part load testing of the Plant. The EPC Contractor should note that full load testing of the Plant is not
possible due to RAEC System limitations;
i) testing automatic and manual fuel changeover including changeover fuel switch from Natural Gas to
Fuel Oil on a trip of the Gas Connection Facilities on low Natural Gas supply pressure and stable
operation on Fuel Oil, fuel switch from Fuel Oil to Natural Gas, checking of automatic change-over of
standby facilities on Natural Gas and Fuel Oil;
j) testing automatic and manual fuel changeover including changeover fuel switch from Natural Gas to
Fuel Oil on a fall in the Natural Gas supply pressure at the Gas Delivery Point and stable operation on
Fuel Oil, fuel switch from Fuel Oil to Natural Gas, checking of automatic change-over of standby
facilities on Natural Gas and Fuel Oil;
k) verification of start-up times and loading rates of plant and after various shutdown periods including
Tests when Power Units of Plant are on hot standby with both Natural Gas and Fuel Oil;
l) demonstration of load setting/control from main control room and of the data exchange to main control
room and the load dispatch centre for Electrical Energy;
m) verification by the EPC Contractor of completeness of the plant and of all ancillary equipment,
compliance with the Law and of no known defects or outstanding works that would affect the safe and
reliable operation of the Plant;
n) other tests required to demonstrate the safety and security of the plant and trip systems and to
demonstrate compliance with requirements and of the RAEC Code.
10.7.5.2. Trial Run
After the Start-up Tests of Plant have been duly completed and the Acceptance Tests have been duly
completed for all Power Unit Blocks, the Plant shall be operated for a minimum twenty four (24) hour trial run

at load settings and operating conditions agreed by the parties (the Trial Run). The EPC Contractor should
note that inadequate capacity in the RAEC System will prevent the Plant from achieving its full load. Starts
and stops and switch-overs to standby equipment shall be included in the Trial Run. The EPC Contractor
shall be permitted to undertake such work during the Trial Run as is necessary to optimise the running of the
Plant. The EPC Contractor may extend the duration of the Trial Run to evaluate whether the Plant will be
able to achieve the quality and stability of operation which would be required for the Reliability Run and the
Performance Tests.
10.7.5.3. Pre-reliability Run Tests
After the Trial Run has been duly completed, the EPC Contractor shall prior to undertaking the Reliability
Run demonstrate that the Plant has the following operational capabilities:
a) each Power Unit Block is fully dispatchable between [] per cent ([]%) and one hundred per cent
(100%) of its Demonstrated Power Capacity when running on Fuel Oil;
b) each Power Unit Block is fully dispatchable at one hundred per cent (100%) of its Demonstrated Power
Capacity when running on Fuel Oil.
c) is fully dispatchable between [] per cent ([]%) and one hundred per cent (100%) of its Demonstrated
Power Capacity when running on Natural Gas, and between [] per cent ([]%) and one hundred per
cent (100%) of its Demonstrated Power Fuel Oil Capacity when running on Fuel Oil. However, if the
RAEC System is not able to accept up to 100% of the Plants Demonstrated Capacity, the parties shall
consult and agree that the running of the Plant at maximum available part loads on Natural Gas and
Fuel Oil is satisfactory; and
d) is fully dispatchable at one hundred per cent (100%) of the Plants Demonstrated Power Capacity when
running on Natural Gas and at one hundred per cent (100%) of the Plants Demonstrated Power
Capacity when running on Fuel Oil. As the RAEC System is not able to accept up to 100% of the
Plants GCPC or GCPFC, the EPC Contractor shall demonstrate by computation, on the basis of the
Demonstrated Power Capacities of all the Power Unit Blocks when operating on Natural Gas, that one
hundred per cent (100%) of the Plants Demonstrated Power Capacity adjusted for Plant Auxiliary
Power when running on Natural Gas is achievable, and demonstrate by computation that, on the basis
of all the Power Unit Blocks Demonstrated Power Capacities when operating on Fuel Oil, one hundred
per cent (100%) of the Plant Demonstrated Power Capacity adjusted for Plant Auxiliary Power when
running on Fuel Oil is achievable.
10.7.5.4. Reliability Run
The Plant shall be operated as if it had achieved commercial operation for a period as agreed by the parties
but which shall be no shorter than seven (7) consecutive days for the entire Plant (the Reliability Run).
In the event of loss or reduction of generating capacity or a failure to meet Dispatch Instructions
(Interruption) during any Reliability Run, part or all of the Reliability Run shall be repeated in accordance
with the following schedule:
Maximum number of
permitted
Interruptions within
permitted period
Maximum permitted period
of aggregate Interruption
and re-start requirement if
period exceeded.

The Reliability Run shall be re-started if either the maximum aggregate period of Interruption is exceeded or
the maximum number of permitted Interruptions is exceeded.
Where the Interruption does not require the whole or part of the Reliability Run to be re-run, the length of the
Reliability Run shall be extended by the period of any Interruption.
10.7.5.5. Initial Performance Tests
After the Plant Reliability Run has been duly completed, the Demonstrated Power Capacity of Plant requires
to be demonstrated by Performance Tests (an Initial Performance Test), and the Contracted Heat Rate of
the Plant requires to be tested as per agreed Test codes.
As the Plant cannot be tested at its Demonstrated Power Capacity due to RAEC System limitations, the
following methodology shall be adopted for both Natural Gas and Fuel Oil;
a) the individual Power Unit Blocks Initial Performance Tests shall be completed as required.
b) the auxiliary power of the Plant equipment/system normally in operation and not included in the
consumption of the Power Unit Block auxiliaries shall be demonstrated by Performance Tests for the
Plant Auxiliary Power on respective fuels as required. The Performance Tests for the Plant Auxiliary
Power may require to be carried out in parts, due to RAEC System limitations.
c) Results of portions of the Plant Auxiliary Power Tests that form part of Plant Auxiliary Power and were
demonstrated as part of the individual Demonstrated Power Capacity of each Power Unit Block need not
be repeated.
d) The Demonstrated Power Capacity of the Plant on Natural Gas will be sum of the Power Unit Blocks
Demonstrated Power Capacities when running on Natural Gas corrected for Plant Auxiliary Power on
Natural Gas.
e) The Demonstrated Power Capacity of the Plant on Fuel Oil will be sum of the Power Unit Blocks
Demonstrated Power Capacities when running on Fuel Oil corrected for Plant Auxiliary Power on Fuel
Oil.
f) The sum of the fuel consumptions on each fuel for all the Initial Performance Tests of all Power Unit
Blocks, together with the Demonstrated Power Capacity of the Plant on respective fuels, shall be used
to determine the Contracted Heat Rate on each fuel for the Plant.
During the Initial Performance Test of the Plant, the Demonstrated Power Capacity and heat rate at
Demonstrated Power Capacity of the Plant on Natural Gas and Fuel Oil shall be tested in accordance with
agreed Performance Test procedure and Performance Test codes.
During the Tests, the EPC Contractor shall, unless the Owner agrees otherwise in writing, operate the Power
Units in normal mode, i.e. not in peaking or overload mode.
If at any time during a Test of the Plant, the RAEC System frequency is outside the limits defined by the
RAEC Code, the Test shall be stopped and, after co-ordination with the Licensed Transmission System
Operator, shall be repeated by the EPC Contractor.

Plant Performance Tests shall be conducted under normal auxiliary power loading conditions. The
Demonstrated Power Capacity shall be reduced to reflect the shortfall in auxiliary power loading between the
maximum auxiliary power loading and the auxiliary power loading conditions at the time of such Plant
Performance Tests.
The Initial Performance Tests of the Plant shall have been satisfactorily completed only if the following
conditions are met:
a) achievement of not less than ninety five per cent (95%) of GCPC and GCPFC;
b) achievement of not more than one hundred and five per cent (105%) of the Contracted Heat Rate of the
Plant at GCPC on Natural Gas and 105% at GCPFC on Fuel Oil;
c) during Performance Tests, environmental emissions tests and waste water discharge tests shall be
carried out and environmental emissions and waste water discharges shall be demonstrated to be within
levels authorised by the Ministry for Environment and Climate Affairs of the Government or any other
Competent Authority which is from time to time responsible for environmental matters and the
monitoring of environmental emissions and waste water discharge levels in the Sultanate of Oman; and
d) achievement of the guaranteed emission levels and qualities.
10.7.5.6. Acceptance Requirements
The EPC Contractor shall provide notification in writing (together with all supporting documentation) that the
following requirements (Acceptance Requirements) of the Plant have been satisfied as part of the
Acceptance Test:
a) all Permits and other approvals required for the operation of the Plant shall be in full force and effect;
b) the Royal Oman Police shall have inspected and approved (in writing) the fire detection and protection
systems of the Plant;
c) all required environmental tests shall have been completed and emissions demonstrated to be within
levels required by Law;
d) communications between the Plant and the Owner/Licensed Transmission System Operator and the
Plant and MOG shall have been tested and shall be fully operational; and
e) the Fuel Oil storage tanks contain sufficient Fuel Oil to operate the Plant for a continuous period of at
least ten (10) Days at GCPFC.
10.7.5.7. Acceptance Test Report
Following completion of the Acceptance Test of the Plant, the EPC Contractor shall submit to the Owner a
report (the Acceptance Test Report) which shall contain all supporting information and documentation
required to substantiate the results of any Acceptance Test, including proof of compliance with the
Acceptance Requirements.
10.7.6. Fuel switching tests
The EPC Contractor shall be required to undertake tests to test the ability of each Power Unit to switch
between Natural Gas and Fuel Oil without interruption (Fuel Switching Tests). The test shall demonstrate an
automatic and immediate on-load change-over from Natural Gas to Fuel Oil in the event of a Gas Operation
Failure, trip of Gas Connection Facilities or the pressure of Natural Gas at the Gas Delivery Point falling
below the minimum gas pressure specified in the NGSA;.

Each Power Unit shall pass a Fuel Switching Test if it runs in a continuous and reliable manner in
accordance with the Dispatch Instructions for a minimum period of fifteen (15) minutes once the switch from
Natural Gas to Fuel Oil has been completed and the Power Unit has demonstrated its ability to transfer back
from Fuel Oil to Natural Gas after a minimum period of fifteen (15) minutes of Fuel Oil running. After
switching back from Fuel Oil it shall continue to run on Natural Gas for a further fifteen (15) minutes. Where a
Fuel Switching Test is not Duly Completed, the Owner shall be entitled to require the EPC Contractor to
repeat the Test until it is duly completed.
10.7.7. Primary Response Tests
The EPC Contractor shall be required to undertake tests to test the demonstrate the primary response of
generating units when the plant is subject to the forced outage of the largest power infeed including where
required the rapid switching of fuel in order to meet the response requirement. Primary response shall be
demonstrated at plant outputs of 15%, 30% 70% and 100% of firm capacity.
10.7.8. Testing of Black Start Facilities
The EPC Contractor shall be required to:
a) test the Black Start Facilities to establish that such Black Start Facilities are capable of providing
sufficient power to start one Power Unit in the event of the Plant being isolated from the RAEC System;
b) demonstrate to the Owner that the Black Start Facilities are being and, as appropriate, have been tested
in accordance with Plant operating procedures; and
c) give the Owner reasonable prior notice of the testing of the Black Start Facilities and afford the Owner
the right and opportunity to witness such tests.
10.8. Test records
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for supplying to the Owner copies of all test documentation
(including pre-commissioning and commissioning tests, tests on completion and acceptance tests) for the
complete plant. All original data sheets shall become the property of the Owner and shall be handed to the
Owner immediately following each test. The EPC Contractor shall retain copies for his records and
preparation of the test reports.
Unless noted otherwise, the EPC Contractor shall promptly prepare and submit a detailed test report to the
Owner within 5 business days of completion of any test. The test report shall include the test procedure,
description of any deviations from the test procedure of unusual event(s), which occurred during the test,
copies of test data sheets, calculated results, copies of lab analyses, and copies of instrument calibration
records.
10.9. Changes after completion of Acceptance Tests
After completion of any of the Acceptance Tests, the EPC Contractor shall not in any way adjust the plant, its
control system or any equipment in any way which, in the opinion of the Owner, could:
Reduce output or increase heat rate from that tested during the Acceptance Tests; and/or
Increase emissions, noise or any other parameter guaranteed or subject to an environmental condition
such that the Works shall not comply with the guarantees or conditions of consent.
If, after the completion of any Acceptance Tests, the EPC Contractor makes any such adjustment which, in
the opinion of the Owner, could impact negatively on the results of the Tests already completed, then the

Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner. The results of the repeated Tests shall be
considered as the results of the particular Acceptance Test.

Appendix A Fuel Specifications
NATURAL GAS SPECIFICATION
1. NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
The Seller shall deliver Natural Gas to the Generator at the Gas Delivery Point at all times in compliance with
Natural Gas specifications and Lower Heating Value set out in Table 2-1
Subject to the following provisions of this Schedule A, the Seller shall from the First Gas Delivery Date,
deliver Natural Gas to the Generator in compliance with Table 2-1and Section 2.2 through to Section 2.5.
2. NATURAL GAS SPECIFICATION

2.1 Natural Gas delivered at the Gas Delivery Point shall have the Natural Gas specifications and Lower
Heating Values set out in Table 2-1 below. The sample gas composition shall be used as the basis for
determining plant performance and guarantee parameters.

TABLE 2-1
Component Sample Gas
Composition
Mole Vol % -
where applicable
Minimum
Composition
Mole Vol % -
where
applicable
Maximum Composition
Mole Vol % - where
applicable
Methane 78.0 78.0 82.5
Ethane 6.6 6.6 7.4
Propane 2.7 2.7 3.3
i-Butane 0.0643 0.12
n-Butane 0.0418 0.12
i-Pentane 0.0030 0.003 0.0056
n-Pentane 0.0030 0.003 0.0056
C6 + 0.0000 0.0000 Trace
N2 9.0864 10
CO2 3.5 3.5
H2S 0.0015 0.0015
Mercaptan Sulphide 50 ppm (vol)
Total Sulphur 150ppm (vol)
Oxygen 5ppm (vol)
Mercury 5.5 micrograms/ Sm (at 15C
and 101.325 kP)

Component Sample Gas
Composition
Mole Vol % -
where applicable
Minimum
Composition
Mole Vol % -
where
applicable
Maximum Composition
Mole Vol % - where
applicable
Calorific Value LHV
(MJ/sm3)
32.93
Calorific Value LHV
(BTU/Scf)
882.07 845 1044
Wobbe Index (BTU/Scf) 1100 1400

Conversion method: 1 megajoule = 947.817 BTUs (Reference ISO 31/IV: 1992, Annex A)
standard cubic metre = 35.383 standard cubic feet.
2.2 Natural Gas delivered at the Gas Delivery Point shall be free from dust, oils, and any other substances
which may interfere with the transmission or industrial use of Natural Gas.
2.3 Natural Gas delivered at the Gas Delivery Point shall have a minimum temperature which is at least
10 degrees Celsius above the hydrocarbon dewpoint at the Natural Gas delivery pressure.
2.4 Natural Gas delivered at the Gas Delivery Point shall have a maximum pressure of
30 bar(g) and a minimum pressure of 20 bar(g).
2.5 Natural Gas delivered at the Gas Delivery Point shall have a water content not higher than 160
mg/Sm
3
, except for occasional deviations therefrom which may occur during the months of May, June,
July, August and September, when the water content shall not be higher than 270 mg/Sm
3
.

FUEL OIL SPECIFICATION
(Typical quality of Fuel Oil on the Oman Market)

Property Units Limits ASTM/IP Test Method
Appearance B-Bright
C-Clear
Report
Density at 15C kg/l Min
Max
0.820
0.870
D4052
Colour ASTM Colour Max 2.5 D1500
Kinematic Viscosity at 40C CSt Min 1.6 D445

Property Units Limits ASTM/IP Test Method
Max 5.3
Cloud Point C Max Report D2500
Pour Point C Max 0 D97
Sulphur % wt Max 1.0 IP-242/
D4294
Copper Corrosion
(3 hrs at 100C)
Max 1.0 D130
Carbon Residue (Ramsbottom) % wt Max 0.1 D524
Water % Vol Max 0.05 D95
Ash % wt Max 0.01 D482
Sediment % wt Max 0.01 D473
Flash Point, PM Closed up C Min 62 D93
Total Acid No mg KOH/g Max 0.5 D974
Strong Acid No mg KOH/g Max Nil D974
Distillation Rec at 250C % Max 64 D86
Distillation Rec at 350C % Min 85 D86
Cetane Index Min 47 D976


Appendix B Data Sheets for Guaranteed Data,
Performance Data, Design Data and Inputs into the Bid
Evaluation Tool





2
Means (i) the aggregate of the Accepted Power Unit Block GCPCs from time to time prior to Plant Provisional Acceptance; and thereafter (ii) the total Electrical Energy generating capacity of the Plant, (expressed in MW) and which is
available at the Electrical Delivery Point and which the EPC Contractor commits to provide when the Power Unit Blocks or the Plant (as applicable) are operating on Natural Gas on a continuous and reliable basis in conformity with the
Operating Parameters and by reference to the Reference Conditions.
3
Electrical Delivery Point (EDP)
4
For the plant, referred to as Contracted Heat Rate
Natural Gas RE operation (including Performance Guarantees as per Appendix C of the EPC Contract)
Unit No. Capacity (Not Guaranteed)
Guaranteed Capacity
for Power Unit
Guaranteed Capacity
for Block and Plant
(GCPC)
2

Heat Rate
(Not Guaranteed) including pilot fuel

Guaranteed Heat Rate including pilot fuel
Gross
Capacity at
ISO
MW at gen
terminals
Declared Net
Capacity at
ISO
MW at EDP
3

Gross Capacity at
RSC
MW at gen terminals
(Guaranteed)

Declared Net
Capacity at RSC
MW at EDP
LHV (Gross)
Heat Rate at
ISO
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
LHV (Net) Heat
Rate at ISO
kJ/kWh at EDP
LHV (Net) Heat
Rate (100% Load)
at RSC
kJ/kWh
4

LHV (Gross)
Heat Rate at
RSC (100%
load)
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
(Guaranteed)

LHV (Gross) Heat
Rate (75% Load)
at RSC
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
(Guaranteed)

LHV (Gross) Heat
Rate (50% Load)
at RSC
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
(Guaranteed)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X
Power Block 1
Power Block 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Plant


5
Means (i) the aggregate of the Accepted Power Unit Block GCPCs from time to time prior to Plant Provisional Acceptance; and thereafter (ii) the total Electrical Energy generating capacity of the Plant, (expressed in MW) and which is
available at the Electrical Delivery Point and which the EPC Contractor commits to provide when the Power Unit Blocks or the Plant (as applicable) are operating on Natural Gas on a continuous and reliable basis in conformity with the
Operating Parameters and by reference to the Reference Conditions.
6
Electrical Delivery Point (EDP)
7
For the plant, referred to as Contracted Heat Rate
Fuel Oil RE operation (including Performance Guarantees as per Appendix C of the EPC Contract)
Unit No. Capacity (Not Guaranteed)
Guaranteed Capacity
for Power Unit
Guaranteed Capacity
for Block and Plant
(GCPFC)
5

Heat Rate
(Not Guaranteed) including pilot fuel

Guaranteed Heat Rate
Gross
Capacity at
ISO
MW at gen
terminals
Declared Net
Capacity at
ISO
MW at EDP
6

Gross Capacity at
RSC
MW at gen terminals
(Guaranteed)

Declared Net
Capacity at RSC
MW at EDP
LHV (Gross)
Heat Rate at
ISO
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
LHV (Net) Heat
Rate at ISO
kJ/kWh at EDP
LHV (Net) Heat
Rate (100% Load)
at RSC
kJ/kWh
7

LHV (Gross)
Heat Rate at
RSC (100%
load)
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
(Guaranteed)

LHV (Gross) Heat
Rate (75% Load)
at RSC
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
(Guaranteed)

LHV (Gross) Heat
Rate (50% Load)
at RSC
kJ/kWh at gen
terminals
(Guaranteed)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X
Power Block 1
Power Block 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Plant


Plant Performance Data
The EPC Contractor shall include specific data sheets to support the data provided under this
Appendix and provide additional data relevant to the project specification
Description Unit
Data
Natural Gas Fuel Oil
Part I - 1 PERFORMANCE OF PLANTS (USE
ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF REQUIRED)

1. ISO reference conditions (as per relevant ISO
standard):

1.1 inlet air temperature (dry bulb)
C
1.2 ambient pressure
mbar
1.3 relative humidity
%
1.4 charge air coolant temperature, if applicable
C
1.5 gross output at generator terminals for one
Power Unit at ISO reference conditions
MW
1.6 gross heat rate (fuel + pilot fuel, if applicable)
at ISO reference conditions
kJ/kWh
2. Reference Site Conditions (RSC):
2.1 inlet air temperature (dry bulb) C 50 50
2.2 altitude AMSL
2.3 ambient pressure mbar 1013 1013
2.4 relative humidity % 30 30
2.5 charge air coolant temperature C
2.6 frequency Hz 50 50
2.7 Minimum generator power factor 0.8 lag 0.8 lag
2.8 generator power factor (at insulation class B,
amb. temperature 50C)
- 0.8 lag 0.8 lag

Description
Unit
Data
2.9 fuel - Natural Gas Fuel Oil
2.10 Natural Gas LHV for performance and
guarantee tests
BTU/Scf 882
2.11 Natural Gas LHV range BTU/Scf 845 to 1100
2.12 LHV for Fuel Oil kJ/kg 42,600
2.13 Wobbe Index (WI) BTU/Scf 1100 to 1400
2.14 supply gas pressure range at interface to Gas
Delivery Point
Bar(g) 20 to 30 N/A
2.15 Power Unit load Full load
base
Full load
base
2.16 equipment condition On
completion of
trial run and
reliability run
On
completion of
trial run and
reliability run
2.17 mode of operation Base load Base load
3. Performance Values on Power Unit at RSC
Condition in 2 above (Use additional sheets if
Power Units have different ratings).

3.1 Guaranteed gross output at generator
terminals
MW
3.2 Power Unit auxiliary power consumption MW
3.3 gross heat rate including pilot oil consumption,
if applicable
kJ/kWh
3.4 inlet air pressure loss m bar
3.5 inlet air flow kg/s
3.6 Inlet air cooling Status On / off On / off
3.7 Air temperature after inlet air cooling C
3.8 Relative humidity after inlet air cooling C

Description
Unit
Data
3.9 exhaust pressure loss with or without
environmental pollution control equipment as
applicable
m bar
3.10 exhaust gas flow kg/s
cu.m/h

3.11 exhaust gas temperature C
3.12 Guaranteed 75% Power Unit load gross heat rate
at RSC (LHV basis) including pilot oil injection
kJ/kWh
3.13 Guaranteed 50% Power Unit load gross heat rate
at RSC (LHV basis) including pilot oil injection
kJ/kWh
3.14 expected 30% Power Unit load gross heat rate at
RSC (LHV basis) including pilot oil injection
kJ/kWh
3.15 Guaranteed lube oil consumption limit for each
Power Unit
grams/
kWh

4 Performance Values for each Power Unit
Block (when one or more Power Units are
connected to a step-up transformer) at RSC in
2 above at GCPC/GCPFC.

4.1 number of Power Units connected to a step
up transformer identifying the number for
each rating if units of different sizes are
connected
No.
4.2 gross output at generator terminals for all
Power Units connected to the step-up
transformer, (3.1 [use appropriate details if
multiple unit sizes] as applicable x 4.1[use
appropriate details if multiple unit sizes])
MW
4.3 auxiliary power consumption of all normal
running auxiliaries required for Power Unit
Block operation
MW
4.4 other Plant auxiliary power consumption not
included above
MW
4.5 total auxiliary power consumption, (4.3 + 4.4) MW

Description
Unit
Data
4.6 Guaranteed net output at electrical delivery
point for a Power Unit Block (Block GCPC),
(4.2 - 4.5)
MW
4.6 Guaranteed Net Heat Rate (LHV) including
pilot Fuel Oil consumption, if applicable
kJ/kWh
Block which has a different number of Power
Units or different output (from sl. no. 4 above)
at RSC in 2 above. [use additional sheets if
more power block unit sizes are proposed]

connected
No.
multiple unit sizes] as applicable x 5.1[use
MW
Block operation
MW
included above
MW
point for a Power Unit Block (Block GCPC),
(5.2 - 5.5)
MW
5.6 Guaranteed net heat rate including pilot oil
consumption, if required
kJ/kWh
6 Performance Values for Entire Plant at RSC at
GCPC/GCPFC:

6.1 number of Power Units for the Plant No.
6.2 number of Power Unit Blocks with
configuration as in 4 above
No.
No.
Power Units in Plant, (4.2 [use appropriate
MW

Description
Unit
Data
details if multiple unit sizes] x 6.2) + (5.2 [use
appropriate details if multiple unit sizes] x 6.3)
[use appropriate details if more multiple block
unit sizes]
running auxiliaries required for Plant
operation, (4.3 x 6.2) + (5.3 x 6.3) [use
appropriate details if more power unit block
sizes]
MW
included in 6.5 above
MW
point of Plant (GCPC), (6.4 - 6.7)
MW
6.9 Not used
6.10 Guaranteed net heat rate (Contract Heat
Rate), {(4.6 x 4.8 x 6.2) + (5.6 x 5.8 x 6.3)
[use appropriate details if more power unit
block sizes]}/6.8
kJ/kWh
6.11 minimum plant load net heat rate excluding
pilot fuel (LHV)
kJ/kWh
MW

6.12 minimum plant load net heat rate (LHV)
including pilot oil consumption, if applicable
kJ/kWh
7 Not used
7.1 Not used
7.2 Not used
7.3 Not used
8 Black Start Unit
8.1 rated capacity adequate to meet the start-up
requirement of any Power Unit together with
the shutdown load on trip of all Power Units
and other Plant requirements
kW
9 Power Unit correction curves together with
equations


Description
Unit
Data
9.1 Gross power output versus ambient air
temperature
Curve no.
9.2 Gross power output versus relative humidity Curve no.
9.3 Gross power output versus ambient pressure Curve no.
9.4 Gross heat rate versus ambient air
temperature
Curve no.
9.5 Gross heat rate versus relative humidity Curve no.
9.6 Gross heat rate versus ambient pressure Curve no.
9.7 Gross heat rate versus LHV Curve no.
9.8 Any other Curve no.
9.9 Any other Curve no.
10 Other Power Unit curves
10.1 Reciprocating engine generator gross heat
rate degradation (recoverable and non
recoverable) versus operating hours for the
PPA period

Curve no.
10.2 Gross heat rate versus engine load from
minimum load to 100% load

Curve no.
10.3 Power Unit auxiliary power consumption from
minimum load to 100% load
Curve no.
10.4 Power Unit maximum step load versus load
from minimum load to 100% load
Curve no.
11 Other Power Unit data
11.1 Plant is designed to provide the power output
(capacity) as is technically possible over the
entire range of Site ambient
Yes/No Yes/No
11.2


Net Firm Capacity Performance Data

Description Unit
Data
Part I - 1 PERFORMANCE OF PLANT AT NET FIRM
POWER LOAD (USE ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF REQUIRED)

1. Not used
2. Reference Site Conditions:
2.1 inlet air temperature (dry bulb) C 50 50
2.2 altitude AMSL
2.3 ambient pressure mbar 1013 1013
2.4 relative humidity % 30 30
2.5 seawater temperature (if required) C 36 36
2.6 frequency Hz 50 50
Minimum generator power factor 0.8 lag 0.8 lag
2.7 generator power factor (at insulation class B,
amb. temperature 50C)
- 0.8 lag 0.8 lag
2.8 fuel - Natural Gas Fuel Oil
2.9 Natural Gas LHV for performance and
guarantee tests
BTU/Scf 882
2.10 Natural Gas LHV range BTU/Scf 845 to 1100
2.11 LHV for Fuel Oil kJ/kg 42,600
2.12 Wobbe Index (WI) BTU/Scf 1100 to 1400
2.13 supply gas pressure range at interface to Gas
Delivery Point
Bar(g) 20 - 30 -N/A
2.14 Power Unit load Full load
base
Full load
base
2.15 equipment condition On
completion of
On
completio

Description
Unit
Data
trial run and
reliability run
n of trial
run and
reliability
run
2.16 mode of operation Base load Base load
2.17 water injection flow (NOx reduction) Kg/s
3. Performance Values on Power Unit at RSC in
2 above at Net Firm Power load (Use
additional sheets if Power Units have
different ratings).

3.1 Gross output at generator terminals MW
3.2 Power Unit auxiliary power consumption MW
3.3 Gross heat rate LHV basis kJ/kWh
3.4 inlet air pressure loss m bar
3.5 inlet air flow kg/s
3.6 Inlet air cooling Status On / off On / off
3.7 Air temperature after inlet air cooling C
3.8 Relative humidity after inlet air cooling C
3.9 exhaust pressure loss with or without
environmental pollution control equipment as
applicable
m bar
3.10 exhaust gas flow kg/s
cu.m/h

3.11 exhaust gas temperature C
Block at Net Firm Power Load (when one or


Description
Unit
Data
more Power Units are connected to a step-up
transformer) at RSC Condition in 2 above.
connected
No.
multiple unit sizes]as applicable x 4.1 [use
MW
Block operation
MW
included above
MW
4.6 Net output at electrical delivery point for a
Power Unit Block (Block GCPC), (4.2 - 4.5)
MW
4.7 Net heat rate

kJ/kWh
Block which has a different number of Power
Units or different output (from sl. no. 4 above)
at RSC in 2 above at Net Firm Power Load.
(Use additional sheets if there are more
Power Units Blocks with different ratings)

up transformer
No.
multiple unit sizes] as applicable x 5.1 [use
MW
Block operation
MW
included above
MW

Description
Unit
Data
5.6 Net output at electrical delivery point for a
Power Unit Block (Block GCPC), (5.2 - 5.5)
MW
5.7 Net heat rate

kJ/kWh
6 Performance Values for Entire Plant at RSC at
Net Firm Power Load:

6.1 number of Power Units for the Plant No.
No.
No.
Power Units in Plant, (4.2 [use appropriate
details if multiple unit sizes] x 6.2) + (5.2 [use
appropriate details if multiple unit sizes] x 6.3)
[use appropriate details if more power unit
block sizes]
MW
running auxiliaries required for Plant
operation, (4.3 x 6.2) + (5.3 x 6.3) [use
appropriate details if more power unit block
sizes]
MW
included above in 6.5 above
MW
6.8 Net output at electrical delivery point of Plant
(GCPC), (6.4 - 6.7)
MW
6.9 Net heat rate, {(4.6 x 4.8 x 6.2) + (5.6 x 5.8 x
6.3) [use appropriate details if more power
unit block sizes]}/6.8
kJkWh

Description Unit Data
PART I - 2 OPERATING
CHARACTERISTICS

Minimum time to synchronise the
Power Units from instruction to start
(notice to synchronize)
min
Minimum time to synchronise the
Power Units from instruction to start
when Power Unit is on hot standby
(notice to synchronize)
Min
Loading time from synchronisation to
base load
min
Confirm that in Natural Gas mode the
engines are capable of stable
operation from 10% load.
Y/N
Confirm that in diesel oil mode the
engines are capable of stable
operation from 20% load.
Y/N

10.9.1. Maximum loading rate of
Power Unit to 100% load

0% - min. load

min. load 100%


emergency loading rates
M
maximum step load rise acceptable
for Natural Gas and diesel oil
M

Maximum deloading rate of Power
Unit from 100% load

100% - min. load
MW/min
min. load no-load
MW/min

Electrical interconnection operating
characteristics

(refer to the RAEC Code)
primary response index
-
secondary response index
-
five minute reserve
-
MVAr capability
-
Total harmonic distortion (injected
at interconnection point)
%

Regular Testing of Fuel Change-
Over (Natural Gas to/from Fuel Oil)

number of regular tests per year
per Power Unit
No
duration of test per Power Unit
h
total duration of tests per year for
entire plant
h

Confirm that in Natural Gas mode
engines are capable of automatic
and instant changeover to Fuel Oil
mode in alarm situations (eg. low
gas pressure) without any loss of
power.

Confirm that in Natural Gas mode
the engines are capable of
changeover to Fuel Oil mode at
any load without any loss of power.

Confirm that in Fuel Oil mode the
engines are capable of changeover
to Natural Gas mode at any load
without any loss of power.


Load (Point)
Minimum Net Firm
Capacity
MW

Impact on Net Heat Rate at LHV at RC
Instantaneous
Response
Capability
Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 - -
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31


Load (Point)
Minimum Net Firm
Capacity
MW

Instantaneous
Response
Capability
32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62


Load (Point)
Minimum Net Firm
Capacity
MW

Instantaneous
Response
Capability
63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93


Load (Point)
Minimum Net Firm
Capacity
MW

Instantaneous
Response
Capability
94

95

96

97

98

99

100


Temperature
Impact on Declared Net Capacity
at LHV at RC
Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3
-
Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3
-
10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40


Temperature
Impact on Declared Net Capacity
at LHV at RC
41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

Description (for all units) Unit Data
Average Annual Capacity Degradation
of each Power Unit/Power Unit
Block/Plant
Based on information provided by the
main power island OEM
%
Capacity Not Recovered at Major
Maintenance of each Power
Unit/Power Unit Block/Plant (to be
consistence with OEM/ LTSA
proposal)
%
Average Annual Heat Rate
Degradation of each Power
Unit/Power Unit (to be consistence
with OEM/ LTSA proposal)Block/Plant
%
Heat Rate Not Recovered at Major
Maintenance of each Power
Unit/Power Unit Block/Plant(to be
%

consistence with LTSA proposal)
Major Maintenance Interval of each
Power Unit/Power Unit Block/Plant (to
be consistence with LTSA proposal)
years
Length of Major Maintenance of each
days
Length of Normal Maintenance of
each Power Unit/Power Unit
Block/Plant (to be consistence with
LTSA proposal)
days
Expected Forced Outage Rate of each
%

Part I -3 Guaranteed Air Emissions Rates & Concentrations at the
Stack Discharge
Parameter

Units

30% MCR
Operation
50% MCR
Operation
100% MCR
Operation
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Stack Height (above
ground level) m
Stack Height (above sea
level) m
No of engines/engine type
Exit Diameter of one
individual stack m
Equivalent Stack Diameter
(cluster 1 no units) m
Equivalent Stack Diameter
(cluster 2 no. units, if
applicable for engine type) m
Exit gas temperature)
o
C


Stack Discharge
Parameter

Units

30% MCR
Operation
50% MCR
Operation
100% MCR
Operation
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Exit gas temperature K

Exhaust gas volume flow
from one engine (wet,
actual temp and pressure m
3
/s

Flue gas oxygen content
(wet) %

Flue gas oxygen content
(dry) %

Flue gas water content %

Guarantee Emissions
Rates

NO
2
g/s

NO
x
(as NO
2
)
g/s

CO
2

g/s

CO
g/s

SO
2

g/s

Total Unburnt
Hydrocarbons (as C
3
H
8
)
g/s

NMHC (as C
3
H
8
)
g/s

VOC ( as NMNEHC (as
C
3
H
8
))
g/s

Particulates (PM10)
g/s

Guarantee Emissions
Concentrations

NO
2

mg/N
m
3

NO
x
(as NO
2
)
mg/N
m
3


Stack Discharge
Parameter

Units

30% MCR
Operation
50% MCR
Operation
100% MCR
Operation
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
Natural
Gas
Liquid
fuel
CO
2

g/Nm
3

CO
mg/N
m
3

SO
2

mg/N
m
3

Total Unburnt
Hydrocarbons (as C
3
H
8
)
mg/N
m
3

NMHC (as C
3
H
8
)
mg/N
m
3

VOC ( as NMNEHC (as
C
3
H
8
))
mg/N
m
3

Particulates (PM10)
mg/N
m
3

Notes:
1. One 1 form to be filled for each engine type/capacity proposed
2. Emissions of pollutants to be based on the worse case Natural Gas and Liquid Fuel
Specifications
3. For Natural Gas, for the purposes of calculating unburnt hydrocarbons, the concentration of
propane may be assumed at max 3.03 mol %, butane & higher hydrocarbons at max 0.11 mol%
and silcon and aromatic hydrocarbons absent
4. For liquid fuel the max Sulphur content should be taken as 0.5 wt %
5. All emissions rates to be based on site reference conditions (50
o
C, 30% RH, 1013 mbar) for
stable engine load.
6. All emission concentrations expressed as Nm
3
@15% O
2
, dry, 0 deg C, 1 atm
7. In addition to the specific data below Bidders to provide curves for the entire load range from min.
to max. stable load of each engine for NO
x
, CO, NMNEHC, NMHC, Total UHC, SO
2
and PM10



Part I -3a NOISE EMISSIONS
Max. noise pressure level:
at one (1) metre outside the Plant boundary fence,
when all equipment is in operation
dB(A)
at 1 metre distance of each gas engine generator
dB(A)
within central control room
dB(A)
within engine hall (outside operational areas)
dB(A)
within machine rooms and workshops
dB(A)



Part I-4 Bid Form for security and response
Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Columns to match number of proposed
generators N
Case 1 15
MW
Demonstrate dispatch configuration to meet largest in-feed loss
Air temperature 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C
Unit load as
dispatched
(MW)

% Load of MCR
Max In-feed
loss
(highest loaded
Generator

Step load
available
(exclude highest
loaded
generator)

Is sum Step
load > In-feed
loss
State excess MW for step load
Case 2 100
MW
Demonstrate dispatch configuration to meet largest in-feed loss
Air temperature
50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C
Unit load as
dispatched
(MW)

% Load of MCR

Max In-feed
loss
(highest loaded
Generator

Step load
available
(exclude highest
loaded
generator)

Is sum Step
load > In-feed
loss
Case 3 When first unit of all blocks is dispatched and second unit of first block or a bus

Transition
points
section is dispatched, demonstrate dispatch configuration before and after to meet
largest in-feed loss.
Air temperature
Unit load as
dispatched
(MW)

% Load of MCR
Max In-feed
loss
(highest loaded
Generator

Step load
available
(exclude highest
loaded
generator)

Is sum Step
load > In-feed
loss

Note to bid form for security and response
Case 1 - Low Load Conditions
During the early years of operation the Plant will be required to meet loads that are small relative to
the overall Plant capacity.
Bidder must propose a Low Load Configuration that meets Low Demand Conditions and
demonstrate that following a loss of the largest power in-feed, the primary response of the
remaining generating units shall increase power output to restore the generation/demand power
balance without the system frequency falling below 45.0Hz.
Fuel Oil operation is permissible to meet primary response requirements provided the generating
units change back to gas once stable operation is achieved. The maximum recovery time for a step
load increase shall be 5 seconds. Change to Fuel Oil operation and return to gas operation shall be
automatic, immediate and with no interruption to load.
Generating units shall not be dispatched at levels below the minimum output necessary for stable
operation and with no restrictions on subsequent loadings within the permissible step loading.
Where dispatch loads are below 50% MCR, this should be clearly highlighted
Case 2 - High Load Conditions

Similar to the low load conditions but at high load, sufficient surplus capacity shall be provided to
ensure that in the event of a Main Equipment failure the largest power in-feed loss does not result
in loss of load demand, subject to the following:-
The largest power in-feed loss shall be the greater of the output of the largest operating
generating unit or the sum of the outputs of generating units connected to the same busbar
section.
That at all times the maximum step load applied to generating units that remain in service
after the loss of the largest power in-feed does not exceed the maximum permissible step
loading available.
No units shall be dispatched below 50% MCR.
Case 3 All block transition
The total installed capacity of the Plant and the number of generating units will depend on the size
and type of units deployed within the Plant to meet the net firm capacity requirement. Plant
configurations may comprise a large number of small units, a small number of large units or a
hybrid arrangement with a combination of large and small units. The design shall ensure sufficient
surplus capacity is provided to ensure that in the event of a Main Equipment failure the largest
power in-feed loss does not result in loss of load demand, subject to the following:-.
The worst case scenario with respect to meeting the power in-feed loss and the maximum
step load constraints is likely to occur with a hybrid arrangement. This is when all of the
smaller units have been despatched to individual power blocks and the load increases to a
point it is necessary to despatch the next unit which would be one of the larger units,
resulting in a significant increase in the power in-feed loss in the event of a Main Plant
failure. Depending of the number of power blocks this will be either the output of the largest
operating generating unit or the sum of the outputs of generating units connected to the
same busbar section.
That at all times the maximum step load applied to generating units that remain in service
after the loss of the largest power in-feed does not exceed the maximum permissible step
loading available.
No units shall be dispatched below 50% MCR.
The Bidder must demonstrate a configuration in this state which meets all security needs and
emissions limits. There may be other case points showing transition points of note which the bidder
should highlight and demonstrate compliance with security needs.
In demonstrating compliance with the above requirements, plant capacity, response times and
emissions levels should be based on guaranteed data provided in the Bid Forms to be provided as
attachments to the Owners Technical Specification. Where data is relied on to demonstrate the
above requirements and this data is not provided in the specified Forms, the Bidder will provide an
appropriate Form guaranteeing the relevant data.




Note on Use of Design Data Sheets
If the appended data sheets do not apply to the proposed technical configuration, the Bidder shall
prepare its own data sheets, taking the appended data sheets as a model with the same scope of
information and data. The data sheets are to be filled separately for each type of technology if both
technologies are used.
Description

Unit Data
Part II-1 DESIGN DATA

Engine Generator Package

Part II-1.1 Engine and Auxiliaries

Manufacturer/License -
License -
Model No.
Design Code
Test Code
Rated speed
engine rpm
generator rpm
Number of cylinders Nos.
Cylinder bore mm
Piston stroke mm
Mean effective pressure bar
Method of starting

Description

Unit Data
Method of automatic change-over from gaseous fuel to liquid fuel
at base load

Type of cooling system
Type of air inlet filter system -
Governor type and model
Turbocharger manufacturer
Radiator manufacturer
Radiator design temperature C
Gas pressure required at engine inlet bar
Gas temperature required at engine inlet C
Fuel Oil pressure required at engine inlet bar
Fuel Oil temperature required at engine inlet C
List of engine mounted auxiliaries provided
List of off base auxiliaries with redundancies for: -
Fuel gas system
Fuel Oil system
Lube oil system
Starting air and compressed air system
Cooling system
Intake air system
Exhaust gas system

Description

Unit Data
Type of NOx -reduction measures -
Height of exhaust gas stack above ground level m
Configuration of exhaust gas stack -
Exhaust gas temperature
At engine outlet C
At stack C
Engine-generator set mounted on springs Yes/No
Dimensions of DG set m x m x m
Weight of DG Kg.
Type of lube oil recommended
Type of cooling water additives recommended
Inspection/Maintenance intervals (enclose details of running hours
for same)
Doc. No.
Duration of inspection/maintenance and unavailability of each
gas engine.
Days
Anticipated annual forced outage hours Hours

Part II-1.2 Generator and Associated Equipment
Manufacturer -
License -
Type -

Description

Unit Data
Design Code
Rated apparent power at RSC MVA
Rated apparent power at design temperature MVA
Rated power factor lagging cos
Rated power factor leading
Rated voltage at generator terminals at rated speed kV
Voltage regulation range
Rated current A
Rated speed rpm
Efficiency at rated MW output and power factors %
Type of cooling
Number of coolers
Power output with one cooler out of operation and class F
temperature rise.

Insulation Class
Short circuit ratio -
Turbo-generator inertia constant MWs/MVA
Direct axis synchronous reactance; xd per unit
Direct axis transient reactance; xd per unit
Direct axis subtransient reactance; xd per unit
Direct axis transient short-circuit time constant; Td s

Description

Unit Data
Negative sequence reactance x2 per unit
Zero sequence reactance x0 per unit
Unbalanced load to be carried continuously %
Winding insulation class -
Temperature rise limiting insulation class -
Rated field current at rated voltage, MW and MVAr A
Field current (A) open circuit saturation curve for generator unit
terminal voltages (kV) ranging from 50% to 120%
A / kV
8 points

Generator Performance Chart MW/MVAr

Excitation System and AVR

Manufacturer -
Type -
Rated field voltage V
No-load field voltage V
Excitation system on-load ceiling voltage V
Excitation system no-load ceiling voltage V
Ceiling current A
Details of AVR/Excitation system (described in block diagram
form showing transfer functions of individual elements)
-
Power system stabilizer fitted yes/no

Description

Unit Data
Voltage setting/regulation range of AVR %
Setting range of reactive load MVAr

Part II-1.3 Prime Mover and Governor
Power-/speed setter range and speed % and %/s
Adjustable speed droop range %
Receive set points from DCS yes/no

Part II-1.4 Generator Circuit Breaker
Manufacturer -
Type -
Rated highest system voltages kV
Rated current A
Rated current at site ambient A
Making current A
Rated short-circuit breaking current kA
Type of driving mechanism -

Part II-1.5 Generator Bus Duct
Manufacturer -
Type -

Description

Unit Data
Insulation medium
Single phase / Three phase
Nominal voltage kV
Nominal design current (main/branch) A/A
Current at RSC (main/branch) A/A
Short circuit current (main/branch) kA
Conductor material -
Conductor cross section mm

Part II-1.6 Generator Step-up Transformer
Manufacturer -
Rated MVA at RSC. MVA
Rated MVA at design temperature MVA
Rated primary voltage kV
Rated secondary voltage kV
Impedance voltage at 75 C and nominal rating %
No-load losses kW
Short circuit losses kW
No-load current referred to nominal current %
Tap changer step size/additional voltage per step %

Description

Unit Data
Minimum tap position -
Maximum tap position -
Tap changer type: on load/off load -
Zero sequence impedance voltage %


Description

Unit Data
Zero sequence resistance voltage %
High voltage side to neutral reactance Ohm
High voltage side to neutral resistance Ohm
High voltage side vector group Y/YN/D
Low voltage side vector group Y/YN/D
Type of cooling -
Maximum admissible over voltage % U
p

Short circuit currents (3 sec) at primary/secondary kA

Part II-1.7 Unit Auxiliary Transformer
Manufacturer
Rated MVA at RSC. MVA
Rated MVA at design temperature MVA
Rated primary voltage kV
Rated secondary voltage kV
Impedance voltage at 75 C and nominal rating %
No-load losses kW
No-load current referred to nominal current %
Tap changer step size/additional voltage per step %

Description

Unit Data
Minimum tap position -
Maximum tap position -
Tap changer type: on load/off load -
Zero sequence impedance voltage %
Zero sequence resistance voltage %
High voltage side to neutral reactance Ohm
High voltage side to neutral resistance Ohm
High voltage side vector group Y/YN/D
Low voltage side vector group Y/YN/D
Type of cooling -
Maximum admissible over voltage % U
p

Short circuit currents (3 sec) at primary/secondary kA

Part II-1.8 High-Voltage Cables (132 kV Cables)
Type of insulation -
Manufacturer -
Highest system voltage kV
Rated voltage (U) kV
Voltage to earth (U0) kV
Continuous Current carrying capacity at actual laying condition A
Material of core -

Description

Unit Data
Section of core mm
2

Max. temperature at rated and short circuit conditions C / C
Losses (conductor, sheath, dielectric) kW/km
Conductor short circuit current (1sec, 3sec) kA/kA
Sheath short circuit current (1sec, 3sec) kA/kA
Total losses kW/km

Part II-1.9 Transformer / Cable Protection
Number Nos.
Manufacturer -
Type - digital

Part II-1.10 Generator Protection
Manufacturer -
Type - digital
Rated current of analogue inputs A
Rated voltage of analogue inputs V
Burdens per phase current inputs VA
Auxiliary DC voltage V
Operating time ms
Operating time to trip ms

Description

Unit Data
Relay functions included (to be given separately)
Fault recording
Communication bus system
Local configuration via PC and -
Remote configuration via communication bus system and PC

Part II-1.11 Automatic synchronizing equipment
Manufacturer -
Type - digital
Power supply voltage V
Input voltage V
Voltage range from to V
Frequency range from to Hz

Part II-1.12 Auxiliary Systems


Description

Unit Data


Description

Unit Data

%


Description

Unit Data

Part II-1.12.2 Gas Connection Facilities and Metering Facilities
Flow Diagram of gas system Drawing
No.

Design flow rate Sft
3
/h
BTU/scf

Maximum Daily Quantity of fuel gas required Sft
3
/Day
Maximum flow rate required during start-up (shutdown to full
speed and no load)
Sft
3
/h
Minimum fuel gas flow rate at ignition Sft
3
/h

Maximum and Minimum gas pressure at Gas Delivery Point bar(a)/
bar(a)

Maximum and Minimum gas temperature at Gas Delivery Point bar(a)/
bar(a)

Emergency shutdown system (2 x 100%) including emergency
shutdown valves at Gas Delivery Point
Yes/No
Metering facilities included Yes/No
Type of gas chromatograph provided
Allowable percentage variation in fuel gas supply pressure
downstream of Gas Connection Facilities
bar(a)
Steady state
bar(a)
Load changing
bar(a)

Description

Unit Data

Allowable temperature range for fuel gas supply to Power Units
downstream of fuel gas heaters of Gas Connection Facilities
bar(a)
Number and capacity of filter separators -/%
Number and capacity fuel gas heaters -/%

Type of fuel gas heaters
Number and capacity pressure reduction stations -/%
Number and capacity of low load pressure reduction stations -/%
Operating gas supply pressure range after pressure reduction
station
bar(a)
Description of vent system provided
Description of drain collection system provided

Part II-1.12.3 Fuel Oil System
Flow Diagram of Fuel Oil system Drawing
No.

Design flow rate kg/s
Type of Fuel Oil -
Number Fuel Oil road tanker unloading points
Unloading pumps
Number / capacity each pump Nos / m
3
/h

Description

Unit Data
Storage tanks
Total storage capacity equivalent to normal consumption of
plant (full load)+pilot oil
days
number of tanks / capacity each tank Nos/ m
3

Type of cathodic protection system
Fuel Oil transfer pumps (in pumping station)
number / capacity Nos / m
3
/h
Pilot oil transfer pumps (in pumping station)
number / capacity Nos / m
3
/h
Fiscal Metering System provided for:

unloading system
Fuel Oil supply for each Power Unit
Fuel Oil return/recirculation line for each Power Unit
pilot oil to each Power Unit
Type of fiscal meters included

Part II-1.12.4 Fire Fighting System
Type/source of water used -
Fire fighting water storage tank
Number / capacity of each tank Nos/ m
3

Type of cathodic protection system

Description

Unit Data
Type of fire fighting systems and/or facilities provided for:
fire fighting water main ring system
Fuel Oil tank area
Fuel Oil unloading and forwarding pump skids
Fuel Oil tanks
Fuel Oil tanks cooling
gas pressure reduction station
generator transformers
auxiliary transformers
cable cellar/trenches/ducts/trays
lubricating oil storage tanks
other buildings ( list each building)

Description

Unit Data
Part II-1.12.5 Desalination Plant for Plant Water
Number/capacity of trains Nos./m
3
/h
Type of Plant

Description

Unit Data
Source of water used for desalination
Type of pretreatment process
Plant output at design conditions m
3
/h
Dealinated Water Storage Tank
Number / Capacity Nos/ m
3

Part II-1.12.6 Hazardous Gas Detection System
Hazardous gas detectors at air intakes of Power Units Included / Not
included
Type of gas detectors
Hazardous gas detectors at Plant boundary Included / Not
included
Type of gas detectors

Part II-1.12.7 Demineralized Water Treatment Plant
Source/type of water used for demineralization (make-up water
production)
-
Number/capacity of trains Nos./m
3
/h
m
3
/cycle
Volume/type of exchangers per train l/-
Demineralized water storage tank capacity, each tank m
3

Number of tanks -

Description

Unit Data
Demineralized water
Conductivity S/cm
Silica less than ppm
Used chemicals for regeneration: kg HCl
100%

kg NaOH
100%

Waste water neutralization
Capacity t/d
Net volume of basin m
Make-up water (demineralized water) requirement:
Maximum per hour m
3
/h
Daily Average m
3
/d
Annual Average m
3
/a
Storage tanks (Buffer tanks for internal consumers)
Number -
Nominal capacity m
3

No. of continuous chlorine dosing pumps No.
No. of shock chlorine dosing pumps


Description

Unit Data
Part II-1.12.8 Potable Water Storage Tanks
Number of tanks Nos.
Material quality of sheet steel -
Working capacity of each tank m
Storage capacity hours
Diameter m
Cylindrical height m
Part II-1.12.9 Distillate Water Storage Tanks
Diameter m
Part II-1.12.10 Services Water Storage Tanks
Diameter m

Description

Unit Data

Part II-1.12.11 Wastewater Systems

Part II-1.12.11.1 Sewage collection system
Number of sump pumps Nos.
Number of intermediate storage tanks Nos.
Type of treatment system

Part II-1.12.11.2 Chemical drains treatment
Number of intermediate storage tank Nos.
Waste water treatment
Type of treatment -
Plant capacity m/h
Process description:

Part II-1.12.11.3 Oily drains treatment
Number of intermediate storage tank Nos.

Description

Unit Data
Number of separators Nos.
Separator capacity m3/h

Part II-1.12.11.4 Other waste water of effluent treatment
system e.g. pre-treatment plant waste (if necessary)

Type of treatment -
Plant capacity m/h


Description

Unit Data
Part II-1.13.0 Balance Electrical Equipment

Part II-1.13.1 MV - Switchgear
Number Nos.
Switching scheme arrangement (single line diagram) -
Type of switchgear (vacuum, SF6) -
Rated system voltage kV
Max. system voltage kV
Circuit breaker withdrawable (yes/no) -
Rated short-circuit breaking current (3 sec) kA
Rated busbar current A
Rated short time current (3 sec) for busbar A
Mechanical protection class IP

Part II-1.13.2 LV Switchgear
Number Nos.
Switching scheme arrangement (single line diagram) -
Type of switchgear -
Type of circuit breakers -
Rated system voltage kV

Description

Unit Data
Rated current
main buses , sub-buses A
main circuit breakers A
Rated short time current (1 sec) for main / sub-busbars A
Mechanical protection class IP

Part II-1.13.3 LV transformers (to be filled out for each
size of transformer)

Type -
Total number -
Number of phases Nos.
Number of windings Nos.
Rated power at site ambient MVA
Type of tap changer -
Rated voltage (primary / secondary) kV / kV
Type of cooling -
Vector group -
Impedance voltage %
No-load losses kW
Short circuit current on primary / secondary kA

Description

Unit Data

Part II-1.13.4 Black Start Diesel Unit
Manufacturer -
Type -
Number of units Nos.
Rated capacity at site conditions MVAMW
Rated voltage V
Rated power factor -
Rated speed rpm
Winding insulation class -
Temperature rise limited to Class
Unbalanced load carried continuously %
Reactances Generator reactances Xd, Xd, Xd %
Start-up time to full load s

Part II-1.13.5 Uninterruptible power supply
Number of power sources -
Type of power sources -
Power rating kVA
Rated voltage kV

Description

Unit Data

Part II-1.13.6 DC Equipment
Voltage levels of distribution system V

Battery Chargers -
Rated voltage DC V
Rated current DC A
Rated capacity kVA
Rated input voltage V

Batteries
Rated voltage DC V
Rated capacity/discharge current for
10 hours Ah/A
1 hour Ah/A



Description

Unit Data
Part II-1.14.0 Instrumentation and Control

Distributed Control System (DCS)
Manufacturer -
Type -
Redundancy of process stations yes/no
Redundancy of data highway yes/no
Number of operator stations in CCR
Number of monitors per operator station
Large Screen Display unit in CCR yes/no
Size of Large Screen Display unit M (W x H)
Scanning period
analog values ms
binary values ms
slow modulating controls ms
fast modulating controls ms
Reaction time from issuing command and monitoring
command execution ms
execution of check back signal from individual control
level to monitor of operator station
ms

Number of local control rooms -

Description

Unit Data

Control system
Make -
Type -
Manufacturer -

Control system architecture
No. of control stations and plant allocation of the control
stations
Nos.

Plant condition monitoring system as per the
Specification

Plant condition monitoring system integrated with DCS
included as per the Specification
yes/no

Plant performance monitoring system as per the
Specification

Plant performance monitoring system integrated with DCS
included as per the Specification
yes/no

Plant historian as per the Specification
Plant historian integrated with DCS included as per the
Specification
yes/no

Fuel demand model system
Fuel demand model with interfaces with DCS included yes/no

Description

Unit Data

Load Dispatch Model
Load dispatch model which interfaces with DCS, RDC and
automatically provides load control set point to individual
Power Units based on economic dispatch included
yes/no

Control System for Packaged Units
Controlled by PLC yes/no
Manufacturer -
Type -

Continuous Emission Monitoring System
Manufacturer
Type

Control system for switchgear
Make -
Type -
Manufacturer -

Field equipment
Type of actuators for isolating valves

Description

Unit Data
Type of actuators for control valves
SMART transmitters provided (yes/no)

Part II-1.15.0 Custody Transfer Natural Gas
Fiscal Metering System as per Appendix D of the
Specification

Ultrasonic Fiscal Flow Meter System
Number and capacity Nos./% 2 x 100%
Manufacturer - SICK MAIHAK,
INSTROMET or
DANIEL
Type - Multi-Path (4
paths or more)
Ultrasonic Fiscal
Flow meter with
meter run
Assembly
Ultrasonic Fiscal Flow Meter as per Appendix D of the
Specification included
yes/no
Pressure transmitter as per Appendix D of the Specification
included
yes/no
Confirmation that 0.1% accuracy of span of pressure
transmitter is adequate to meet the overall accuracy of the
Fiscal flow metering system
yes/no
Temperature transmitter as per Appendix D of the
yes/no
Confirmation that 0.1C accuracy of temperature t ransmitter
is adequate to meet the overall accuracy of the Fiscal flow
yes/no

Description

Unit Data
metering system
Flow computer to compute density, Corrected Metric standard
volumetric flow, energy values in BTU and Joules at Standard
conditions as per Appendix D of the Specification included
yes/no
Flow computer in redundant configuration yes/no
On line proving of one meter against other shall be possible
on command from supervisory PC included
yes/no
HART protocol mode to be confirmed
Flow computers of each stream connected to rack mounted
industrial grade PC based monitoring and operating station
as per Appendix D of the Specification included
yes/no
Gas Chromatographic Analyser to provide gas composition
analysis up to C6+, specific gravity, density and heating
(calorific) value input and calculated hydrocarbon dew
pointing analysis and result to custody transfer metering
system as per Appendix D of the Specification included
yes/no
Sample conditioning system as per Appendix D of the
yes/no
Gas metering system interface with DCS and MOG included yes/no

Part III Not used


Legal Form of Bidder, Eligibility and Qualification of EPC
Contractor
Part IV-3: References of Main Equipment
Part IV-3.1: List of Manufacturers of Main Equipment

Equipment Name of Manufacturer
Address of
Manufacturer

Reciprocating Gas
Engines

Inlet air chilling
system,
if applicable

Generator


Step up Transformer

Power Unit Control
System and Plant
Control System.
Indicate separately,
if different. If
different furnish
references where
integrated similar to
the Specification
requirements.

Note:
A reference list must be attached for each type of
main equipment, which should include the
following information:
* Name of plant / client
* Type, size and main
parameters
* Year of commissioning
* Relevant operational parameters (hours of
operation, starts, etc.)

Part V - Additionally Required Project Information
Part V-1 Operation and Control Philosophy
Bidders shall provide a description of the operation and control philosophy proposed.
The description shall include the Plant and its component parts, station utility and
auxiliary systems under start-up, shutdown, normal and emergency operation and
how the Plant will use such philosophy to match daily and seasonal load profiles.
Bidders are required to address the following items:
Scope of communications between Plant, 132 kV Sub-station and Load Dispatch
Centre
Required attendance levels
Routine local manual operations and visual checking
Remote control system
Remote monitoring systems
Proposed Plant operation principles
Power load control with loading, load shedding and load rejection
Detailed description of the automatic switching process from Natural Gas to Fuel
Oil and vice versa - Immediate on-load change over to ensure GCPFC without
interruption in the event of a Gas Operation Failure, trip of Gas Connection
Facilities or the pressure of Natural Gas at the Gas Delivery Point falling below the
minimum gas pressure specified in the NGSA or the pressure at the Gas
Connection Facilities falling below the minimum gas pressure required by the
Power Units Block(s), and thereafter prompt changeover from Fuel Oil to Natural
Gas when pressure is reinstated or Natural Gas supply interruption is corrected
Emission quality control
Utility systems operation and control principles including fuels, chemicals, raw feed
water, water treatment and air systems.

Part V-2 Project Execution Plan
Bidders shall provide the following information:
Evidence of the Bidders thorough understanding of the Omani construction
industry.
Evidence of the Bidders ability to use innovative and flexible approaches in the
implementation of the Project.
A description of how the Bidder plans to perform the various functions (eg detailed
design, procurement including purchasing, expediting and inspection, construction,
commissioning, testing and training) and the offices where the various portions of
the work will be performed.
A description of how all of the work will be co-ordinated and managed.
Organisation charts showing the Bidders proposed Project organisation both at its
home office(s) and at the Project site. The charts shall show how sub-contractors
and suppliers will interface and be controlled by the Bidders management team,
lines of authority and communication.
A Project Level 1 programme detailing engineering, procurement and construction.
A description of the procedures to be used by the Bidder to control and monitor the
Project and a description of how and what extent those procedures will be used to
control the work of sub-contractors and suppliers. The description should
demonstrate how the Project should be controlled.
Total number of staff to be employed at the Plant and their job titles.
Maintenance philosophy and maintenance schedule for the Plant.
Number of shifts for operation and maintenance.

Part V-3 Quality Assurance Related Information
Bidders shall provide:
statement of intent for the adoption of a documented quality system and the
acceptance of the requirements laid down in Section 7 of the Minimum Functional
Specification for the Plant;
copy of the Quality Assurance Manual; and
details of any recent external assessments of the proposed quality system through
second party or third party assessment. The results of such assessments should
be listed in a schedule together with details of any accreditation of the quality
system.


Part V-4 Health and Safety Policy
Bidders shall provide construction, health and safety organisation and safety procedures and
describe how they will be used on this Project, including:

(a) proposed field health and safety organisation for this Project, including a
description of how the Bidder normally implements construction safety at the
work site;
(b) details of the Bidders field health and safety programme including
induction and training programmes, safety meetings, publicity, safety
motivation and incentive plans, safety inspection, medical facilities, site
security and sanitation;
(c) methods the Bidder will use to maintain open communications with
sub-contractors on health and safety matters;
(d) bidders procedures for recording site safety statistics including those of its
sub-contractors, details of its site safety record for the previous three years
and the method used to compile this information; and
(e) details of the Bidders knowledge and experience of health and safety
legislation in Oman.


Part V-5 Services, Procedures, Documents
Bidders shall confirm that all necessary surveys and investigations are
included and shall list those currently proposed.
Bidders shall define their proposals and timing in respect of:
Fault level and stability studies for the electrical generation export
distribution system, including reactive power adjustment
(voltage control) and generator short circuit rating
Operational Safety (HAZOP) Study for all areas/systems.
Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA) study for all systems and
equipment.
Bidders shall define their standard procedures/current proposals and methods
of evaluation in as full detail as possible in respect of:
Testing to be carried out pursuant to the Power Purchase Agreement
(Appendix A) including in relation to:
(a) Pre-commissioning
(b) Start-up Tests
(c) Reliability run
(d) Acceptance requirements
(e) Performance Tests
Bidders shall submit a draft documentation schedule detailing their proposals
for submission of drawings, specifications, procedures, manuals, etc. to
MHEW for review/information together with the timing of the listed
submissions from the Effective Date.
Bidders shall provide the proposed content (index) and submission date for
the following manuals:
(a) Design Manual(s)
(b) Procurement Manual
(c) Construction Manual

(d) Operations Manual(s)
(e) Operating and Maintenance Manual(s)
(f) Spare Parts Manual
(g) Certification-Manual

Part V-6
Not used
Part V - 7 Other information
Plant Concept
The Bidder shall submit as part of its Proposal the following technical information:
a) Completed data sheets as set out in Form of this Appendix B.
b) Description of main features of the proposed Plant such as:
general description and main features of the Plant and use of
the Plot including laydown areas;
detailed time schedule;
construction approach, phases of construction, commissioning
and operation of plants constructed at the various phases;
operational philosophy of Power Units and steam generation
units (start-up, shutdown and failure of individual units);
maintenance philosophy, maintenance schedule activities
including major plant overhauls;
details of operation, maintenance and training.
c) Standards, codes and regulations: Listing of major standards, codes
and regulations (international, suppliers own county) which will be
applied for the design and construction of plant equipment and
facilities, for civil works and for testing of Plant equipment;
d) Description of major equipment and systems including their
auxiliaries;
e) Main mechanical equipment and systems for Power Unit including
auxiliary systems, electrical equipment and systems, such as:
generators, generator protection, electrical power system
philosophy, main electrical equipment including auxiliary systems,
etc.
I&C systems, such as: general control system philosophy,
description of central room, local control rooms, Plant control
system and control of common plant and auxiliary systems, etc.

emission control measures;
civil works, including site development, buildings, structures etc;
f) Project drawings and diagrams, such as:
plant location map with areas temporarily used during
construction;
Site plan, general lay-out and arrangement drawings for on-
and offsite facilities, indication of fenced areas;
equipment configuration in the area of the Plant, seawater
pumping station, central control room, water treatment plant,
etc;
P&I diagrams for main systems;
single line diagrams for:
Plant main electrical systems;
Plant electrical auxiliary systems;
protection diagrams;
heat balance diagrams for the Plant for various operating points
as per the RFP;
correction curves for part loads, deviating ambient conditions
and gas composition range;
start-up and loading diagrams () of Units and total Plant;
generator performance chart;
fuel changeover data.
Environmental Aspects and Data
The Bidder shall submit as part of its Proposal the description and details of the
following:
a) Guaranteed air pollution emission rates and type of emission
control and monitoring measures;
b) Nature and estimated quantities of waste water, waste water
treatment and disposal methods;

c) Ambient noise levels.
Contractors, Supplies
a) The Bidder shall submit as part of its Proposal details and
references of the nominated and/or proposed contractors and
suppliers/manufacturers (where applicable) as specified in
Appendix 7 of the RFP.
b) Bidders shall submit a schedule of all major proposed
subcontractors and supplies defining the type of work or service to
be subcontracted and the country of origin.


Part VI Project Implementation Schedule
Milestones Date
Effective Date
Financial Closing date
Start of site mobilization
Site preparation

Milestones Date

Mechanical Completion Date of Plant
Completion of GCF and Metering Facilities
Completion of fuel gas system
Completion of back-up fuel system
Completion (end of erection) of Power Units
Power Unit 1
Power Unit 2
Power Unit 3
Power Unit 4 etc.,
Completion (end of erection) of Power Unit Blocks
Power Unit Block 1
Power Unit Block 2
Power Unit Block 3 etc.
Completion of Connection to related Facilities
New 132 kV GIS


Milestones Date
Connection of GCF and Metering Facilities to MOG gas
supply system


Commissioning of Power Units
Power Unit Block 1
Energisation of block step-up transformer
Initial synchronisation
Trial run
Reliability test run
Performance test
Scheduled Pre-Commercial Operation Date
Power Unit Block 2
Trial run
Performance test
Power Unit Block 3
Trial run
Performance test
Power Unit Block 4 etc.
Trial run
Performance test


Commissioning of the entire Plant
Trial run
Start of Reliability Test Run
Performance test including Net Dependable Capacity Tests
Scheduled Commercial Operation Date

NOTE :
The Implementation Schedule shall be adjusted by the Bidder depending on the
number of Power Units proposed.

Appendix C Drawings and Documentation


DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION
All drawings shall be to scale and fully detailed. All important dimensions shall be given and the
material of which each principal part is to be constructed shall be indicated. Drawings shall not
exceed A0 standard dimensions and shall bear the contract references.
Drawings for review shall be submitted as paper prints.

1. Extent of documentation
In general the EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and issue of the following
documentation:
a) Initial design drawings and related specifications.
b) Design revisions and modifications drawings.
c) Time schedule showing information on: design and engineering work, order dates and time of
delivery of major Plant equipment and systems, Site surveys, Site preparation, factory tests for
major Plant equipment, civil/structural works, erection and installation, commissioning; and
Site tests.
d) Project procedures.
e) Equipment lists.
f) Piping and valve standards and codes.
g) Electrical and instrument schedules.
h) Detailed specifications for equipment and bulk materials including equipment sizing
calculations and protection studies.
i) Manufacturers recommended spare parts inventory for: Testing and commissioning,
performance and reliability testing, two years commercial operation of the Works.
j) Enquiry packages for plant, equipment and bulk materials.
k) Subcontract packages.
l) Certification of all pressure systems, cranes and lifting equipment, where applicable in
accordance with specified standards and regulations.
m) Expediting and inspection reports.
n) Material audits.
o) Project photographs.
p) Quality assurance plans.
q) Procedures and audits.
r) Quality reports.
s) Reporting.
t) Operation and maintenance manual.

u) As-built drawings.
v) Commissioning procedures.
w) Acceptance test procedures.
x) Acceptance test records.
y) Equipment commissioning records.
z) Equipment system safety test results and records.
aa) Project dossier (lifetime records).
2. General
Control
For all work to be performed under the Contract, the EPC Contractor shall establish and maintain a
comprehensive computer based document control system ensuring that the identification, revision,
status and location, at all phases of the Work, can be determined. The EPC Contractors system
shall include all subcontractors and vendors documents.
Organization of documentation
All documentation shall be organized in a logical manner and all contents shall be properly
indexed. A revision status record sheet at the front of each document shall facilitate recording of
amendments in a logical manner. Revision indication and issue dates shall also appear on each
amended sheet. The cover shall identify the contents.
3. During contract
Construction procurement records
The EPC Contractor shall generate records as required by the Contract and the Quality
Requirements, Quality Plan.
All records, including those generated by Subcontractors or suppliers, shall be concisely compiled,
indexed and uniquely identified with the Contract reference number and where relevant, Sub-
contract or order numbers. They shall clearly identify the individual parts or assemblies to which
they refer.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure that all Site and Works documentation is maintained and stored,
on a daily basis, in accordance with the Quality Requirements, the Quality Procedures and
applicable Quality Plans.
For items of plant or equipment that are being delivery to Site, the EPC Contractor shall ensure that
all records required for safe installation and commissioning, pertaining to such equipment, arrive on
Site with the plant or equipment. Such records shall include reports and certification in respect of
pressure containing components together with all traceability records.

The compilation and storage of records during the Contract shall be controlled to ensure adequate
security, verification and traceability prior to Takeover. The storage conditions shall provide
resistance to damage and deterioration.
The EPC Contractor shall submit a monthly Drawing and Documentation Schedule for review by
the Owner and shall maintain the schedule throughout the Contract to show the status and revision
of each document. The transfer of this information should be achieved by electronic transfer (disk)
from the EPC Contractors computer system(s).
Codes and standards
The EPC Contractor shall be required to provide a current certification schedule for all items of
plant and equipment requiring inspection/testing in accordance with applicable codes and
standards (e.g. pressure vessels, rigging and lifting appliances, pressurized systems etc).
Method statement
The EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit comprehensive method statements for all major
construction and erection activities.
Commissioning document
Within five months of the Contract Effective Date, the EPC Contractor shall submit for review a site
commissioning record system that provides for all commissioning procedures and activities that
shall be performed during the works to be identified and readily traceable.
Each commissioning procedure shall include the following information as a minimum:
a) Objective and procedure
a) Scope of procedure
b) Reference documents, P&IDs and drawings
c) Prerequisites to the commissioning
d) List of relevant check sheets with date completed and signing off procedure
e) Check sheets with sections for signing off by construction, commissioning and Owner
personnel.
Where check sheets include items such as checking of alignment, vibration etc then the reference
documents shall clearly indicate the criteria against which these parameters can be accepted.
Vendors documentation is acceptable for this purpose but must be adequately referenced on the
check sheet and available.
A specific check sheet shall be provided for each component to be commissioned.
Packages of documentation shall be issued for each system of the work as they become
mechanically complete.

The records shall be sufficiently detailed to show all checks performed on systems, items of plant,
instrumentation and controls, and protection. It is envisaged they will cover all check carried out
prior to equipment and systems being put into service and all functionality test thereafter.
The EPC Contractor shall prepare maintain and update a Punch list of all items which are
incomplete or defective and which require remedial action.
The EPC Contractor shall prepare a detailed, test and commissioning programme for issue to
appropriate parties on a regular basis to illustrate commissioning progress against planned
completion dates.
The EPC Contractor shall establish a safety and permit-to-work system for the Site to ensure that
the plant is placed in to and taken out of service in a safe and controlled manner so that the
integrity of adjacent construction work can be undertaken in a safe manner.
4. Submission of final documentation
Final drawing documentation
The EPC Contractor shall submit to the Owner, a reproducible and one print of all drawings, and a
microfilm of key drawings (including all as-built drawings).
5. Document schedule
The following list is intended to summarize the key dates when documents are to be submitted
under the Contract. The list is not exhaustive and does not prevent the Owner from requesting
additional documents as and when required.
Document Submission period
Progress
Overall Contract Programme Within 28 days of after letter of acceptance
Thereafter monthly no later than 7 days from
effective date
Erection and Commissioning Programme Construction programme within 42 days of
approval of the contract programme.
Commissioning programme 6 months prior to
start of any commissioning activities
Progress Reports Monthly
Quality Assurance
Project Quality Plan Within 30 days of Contract Award
Site Quality Plan 30 days before commencing work on site

Works inspection and Test Records As required by the Quality Plan
Site inspection and Test Records As required by the Quality Plan
Commissioning Documentation 6 months before commencing commissioning
Method Statements for Construction 14 days before commencement of relevant task
Developed Health & Safety Plan Prior to commencing work on site
Formal Performance Test Procedure and
Records
8 months after Contract Award
Design Information
Document Schedule Within 30 days of Contract Award
Design Calculations As and when required to substantiate drawing
information
Studies and calculations to demonstrate that the
Specified fuel changeover is achievable
within two (2) months of the Effective Date
Drawings for review In accordance with Document Schedule and
Project Programme
Arrangement and layout drawings of offsite
facilities
within two (2) months of the Effective Date
As Built Drawings Within 60 days of take-over date
Operation and Maintenance
Draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals 2 months prior to take over date
Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals 2 months after take over date

6. Drawings to be submitted for review
The Owner shall have review of all major design calculations and construction drawings associated
with the following.
1) Engine and generator foundations, including analysis for dynamic effects.
1) Arrangement and detailed drawings of engine and generator sets and auxiliary equipment.
2) Building layouts, structures and foundations.
3) Arrangement and details of pumps, pipework, valves, and auxiliary systems.
4) General arrangement and sections of cooling systems.
5) Equipment and pipe rack foundations.

6) Roads, architectural details of buildings and fencing.
7) Drainage systems and outfalls.
8) Underground piping, ducts and cable arrangement drawings (mechanical, electrical and
civil
9) General arrangements and sections of compressed air system.
10) General arrangement and sections of generators.
11) Generator excitation control diagrams, general arrangement of equipment and interfaces
with site monitoring and control equipment.
12) Fire fighting equipment specification. (To be submitted for review during the course of the
contract).
13) Characteristic curves for generator.
14) Capability curve for generator.
15) Schematic diagram of generator excitation system.
16) General arrangement of unit transformers.
17) General arrangement of auxiliary transformers.
18) General arrangement of earthing transformer.
19) General arrangement of MV switchboards.
20) General arrangement of LV switchboards.
21) Descriptive technical information on protective relays.
22) Single line diagrams for all ac and dc systems.
23) Protection single line diagrams for all main circuits.
24) Schematic diagram of synchronising scheme.
25) Conceptual design of cabling system.
26) Cable calculations.
27) Conceptual design of earthing and lightning protection systems.
28) Earthing system design calculations.
29) System studies to demonstrate that the Plant performs according to the specified
requirements in the RAEC Code
30) Short circuit and voltage drop calculations.
31) Phasing diagram including transformer vector groups.
32) Control and interlocking logic for MV and LV switchgear.
33) Protective relaying co-ordination reports.
34) Conceptual design of lighting and small power installations.
35) Test and inspection procedures.
36) Site testing proposals and test schedules.

37) Main plant electrical auxiliaries, motors, actuators, etc, specifications, operating and
maintenance instructions.
38) Recommended spares lists.
39) Details of security fencing and guardhouse.
40) Operation and control philosophy for the plant.
41) Functional System Description for the DCS.
42) Instrument and alarm schedules.
43) Loop diagrams.
44) Logic and tripping diagrams.
45) Description of all sequences in a structured step-by-step format.
46) Brief description of any hardware back-up features.
47) Process parameter values under normal operating regimes.
48) Instructions for changeover from remote to local control and vice versa.
49) Description of links or interface hardware between vendor control packages and the DCS.
50) Communications network management software.
51) Hardware list and systems diagrams.
52) Commissioning programmes and test procedures
53) Test reports
7. Drawings and information to be submitted with tender
The Tenderer shall submit, with its offer, sufficient narrative, arrangement drawings and piping and
instrumentation diagrams to fully describe its proposals for the design and construction of the
Works and enable the proposal to be evaluated by the Owner. The information to be submitted
shall include but shall not be limited to the following:-
General
1)
2) A description of main features of the proposed Plant such including:
- A general description of the Plant and use of the Site and temporary Areas;
- A detailed time schedule;
- A narrative describing the construction approach, sequence of construction,
commissioning and operation of Power Units, Power Unit Blocks and the Plant;
- A narrative describing operational philosophy of Power Units (start-up, shutdown,
on load operation and plant reliability);

- Details of black start and emergency power capability;
- Details of assumed maintenance philosophy and maintenance schedule activities
including major Plant overhauls;
- Details of proposed operation and maintenance training and safety management
systems
3) Standards, codes and regulations: listing of major standards, codes and regulations which
will be applied for the design and construction of Plant equipment and facilities, for civil
works and for testing of Plant equipment.
4) Descriptions of major equipment and systems including their auxiliaries for:
- The main mechanical equipment and systems;
- Electrical equipment and systems, such as: generators, generator protection,
electrical power system philosophy, main electrical equipment including auxiliary
systems, etc;
- 132 kV grid substation connection (switchgear, protection, metering and control
interface);
- I&C systems, such as: general control system philosophy, description of central
room, local control rooms, Plant control system and control of common plant and
auxiliary systems, etc;
- Emission control measures; and
- Civil works, including site development, buildings, etc.
5) Project drawings and diagrams, to include:
- Plant location map;
- Site layout drawing showing the location of all major buildings, drainage and
items of plant.
- General plant arrangement drawings including arrangement drawings for on- and
offsite facilities and indication of fenced areas;
- General arrangement of gas turbine, generator and exciters with dimensions,
weights.
- Method for removing and inserting generator rotor with illustrations and space
required.
- Equipment configuration drawings in the area of the Plant, central control room,
water treatment plant, etc;
- P&I diagrams for main systems;

- Performance correction curves for Natural Gas and Fuel Oil for full and part
loads;
- Performance correction curves of dual fuel engine output and efficiency for gas
composition range provided in Appendix A.
- Start-up and loading diagrams (from cold, warm, hot condition) of Power Units
and total Plant;
- description fuel changeover from Natural Gas to Fuel Oil and vice versa, buffer
storage of Natural Gas provided to allow changeover from Natural Gas to Fuel Oil
on Natural Gas supply system trip on low Natural Gas pressure with all engines in
Plant in operation.
Electrical equipment
The following information shall be provided to describe the electrical system.
1) General arrangement drawing of generator and exciter.
2) Characteristic curves for generator.
3) Capability curve for generator.
4) Arrangement of generator internal cooling system.
5) Generator rotor withdrawal and insertion procedures.
6) Detailed descriptions of generator stator and rotor insulation systems.
7) Schematic diagram of generator excitation system
8) Descriptive technical information on generator switchgear including information to
demonstrate suitability for application.
9) Descriptive technical information on unit, auxiliary and earthing transformers.
10) Schedule of protective relaying proposed for generator, auxiliary, unit transformers and
other main items of plant and equipment.
11) Descriptive technical information on motors.
12) Schedule of cables proposed for power and other interconnections including voltage
grade and type.
13) Main single line diagrams for ac and dc systems.
14) Protection single line diagrams for generator and other main circuits.
15) Descriptive technical information on synchronising equipment and synchronising
schemes.
Control and instrumentation
1) Proposed DCS scheme showing various levels of system and CCR equipment, engine
generator nodes and balance of plant nodes with any DCS interfaces with other control
systems.
2) Station C&I tripping philosophy.

Buildings
1) General arrangement of all buildings.
2) Architectural presentation of buildings.
3) Building internal arrangements.
Performance
1) Dual fuel engine power output and efficiency curve vs. ambient temperature.
2) Dual fuel engine power output and efficiency degradation curve vs. operating hours.
3) Dual fuel engine output and efficiency correction curves.
4) Dual fuel engine output and efficiency correction curves vs gas composition range as
provided in Appendix A.
Operation and maintenance
1) Schedule of maintenance requirements over the life of the plant.
2) Schedule of annual maintenance costs including annual cost of consumables.
Environmental aspects and data
The Tenderer shall submit as part of its proposal a description and details of the following:
- guaranteed air pollution emission rates, continuous emission monitoring systems,
type of emission control devices and measures, emission curve of Power Unit
over entire load range for all ambient conditions;
- nature and estimated quantities of waste water, waste water treatment and
disposal methods; and
- ambient noise levels in Plant and at boundary

Subcontractors and suppliers
The Tenderer shall submit as part of its proposal details and references of proposed
subcontractors and suppliers/manufacturers (where applicable) as specified. The Tenderer shall
submit the life cycle cost evaluation of the selected major equipment supplier for each major
equipment.
The Tenderer shall submit also a schedule of all major proposed subcontractors and suppliers
defining the type of work or service to be subcontracted and the country of origin.
8. Documentation to be retained at Site
Additional to the submission of the documentation as mentioned above, the following
documentation (including electronic files) shall be retained on the Site:

operation and maintenance manuals;
Copies of all test results for tests performed according to the EPC Contract, to the extent as
normally retained in accordance with Good Practice;
as-built drawings for the Plant, including the civil and architectural works; and
all further technical documentation normally retained on site in accordance with Good Practice.


Appendix D Specification for Metering Systems

SPECIFICATION FOR METERING INSTRUMENTATION

1 INTRODUCTION
This specification describes the requirements for the design, manufacture, assembly, inspection,
testing, training, certification, delivery and commissioning of Flow Metering Systems for fiscal flow
measurement. Metering system uncertainty shall be less than 0.5% for Natural Gas flow and 1%
for energy flow rate measurement.

2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 General
This specification supplements the applicable standards, codes and the relevant requirements. In
cases where more than one code, regulation or standard applies to the same condition, the most
stringent shall be followed. All conflicts between the requirements of this specification, related
specifications, or other documents shall be referred to Company for clarification in writing before
proceeding with the manufacture of the affected parts.
A list of specifications and standards referred to in this document is included below. The applicable
editions shall be the revisions in force at the date of the enquiry requisition.
All works specified shall be in accordance with all applicable sections of the latest edition of
international codes and standards listed in each project specification.
In addition, the fiscal flow metering system for natural gas shall comply with the requirements of the
Oman local regulations for the engineering, manufacturing, delivery, certification and installation.
References
The following SP/PDO documents shall be used for reference:
SP-1085 Instruments for Measurement and Control
SP-1090 Instrument Signal Lines
SP-1171 Quality Assurance Specifications for Eng. Works
SP-1246 Painting & Finish requirements

SP-2047 Specification for Preparation and Content of
Engineering Drawings
International Standards

AGA 9 Measurement of Gas by Multipath Ultrasonic
Meters
ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plants & Petroleum Refining Piping
API MPMS Chapter 14 Natural Gas Fluids Measurement
ASME B16.5 Piping Flanges & Fittings
IEC 60529 Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided
by Enclosures
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
IEC 60751 Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometers
and Platinum Temperature Sensors
ISO 6976 Natural Gas Calculation of Calorific Value,
Density, Relative Density and Wobbe Index
from Composition
ISO 5168 Measurement of Fluid Flow, Estimation of
Uncertainties of a Flow Rate Measurement
ISO 15156 Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries Material
for Use in H2S-containing Environments in Oil
and Gas Production
ISO 6551 Petroleum Liquids and Gases Fidelity and
Security of Dynamic Measurement Cabled
Transmission of Electric and/or Electronic
Pulsed Data
NACE MR 01-75 Sulphide Stress Cracking Resistant Metallic
Material for Oil Field Equipment

2.2 Deviation to Specifications

The Vendor shall acquaint fully with the requirements of the regulations, codes, procedures,
guidelines and standards and shall acknowledge compliance with these specifications.
Latest editions of all codes and standards, as of the date of issue of the contract, shall apply. All
deviations from this document and the codes and standards shall be subject to prior written
approval from the Consortium.

3 UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS
For details of measurement units for this project, refer to Attachment B to this Appendix D

4 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
The equipment shall be designed, selected, engineered and configured so as to provide the
highest possible standards of safety, protection of the assets and environment, and ergonomics.
For detail environmental conditions and ambient data, refer to Attachment A to this Appendix D.
The flow computer, supervisory PC, etc. are to be located in the. Central Control Room (CCR),
which is treated as an unclassified area.
The flow computer, supervisory PC and equipment supplied under this specification shall be
suitable for normal operation in the event of failure of the HVAC system

5 SCOPE OF WORK
5.1 General
The Vendor shall be responsible for the design and supply of fiscal flow metering system
comprising of primary flow device (multipath ultrasonic flowmeter), on/off valves, pressure
transmitters, temperature transmitters, flow computer with calculation and sequence programs,
Gas Chromatograph, PC with human interface graphics for control and monitoring of the metering
equipment, printer for on-demand report printing, redundant serial communication link for interface
with control equipment and any other associated hardware and software required to provide an
accurate and reliable fiscal flow metering system to be installed at MIPP.
The Bidder is to note that the entire fiscal flow metering system shall be skid mounted, except the
flow computers, HMI/supervisory PC and printer. HMI/supervisory PC and printer shall be installed
on furniture provided by Bidder in the Control Building.
Any work shown on the reference drawings or document and not particularly given in the
specification of any items essential for the correct functioning of any part of the specified equipment
shall be brought to the attention of the Consortium. Failure to do this shall not absolve the Bidder

from the supply and commissioning of any equipment, software or services required to achieve the
full functioning of the system to the intent of this specification.
5.2. Extent of supply
The flow metering system shall be supplied as a fully assembled skid structure. Skids shall be
designed with necessary piping, straight runs for the flowmeter and isolation/piping valves as
required, structural steel for base plate supports, platforms/walkways on the skid etc. The Bidder
shall provide the skid inlet and outlet connection according to the pipeline requirements. The skids
shall be supplied in a fully assembled condition, with all necessary instruments. All instruments
shall be wired to skid junction boxes located at the skid battery limit. Proper segregation of signals
shall be undertaken and separate junction boxes shall be installed for analogue, digital input, digital
output, potential free contacts and etc. The Bidder shall install all cabling and cable trays within the
skid up to the junction box and shall install the multi-core cables from junction box to the Control
Room.
The Vendor to supply two identical fiscal flow metering systems (one duty/one standby, each sized
for 100% capacity) on the flow metering skid.
The metering skid shall be ready to install inclusive of structural steel, piping/fittings/pipe supports,
local access platforms on skid, lifting lugs, earthing boss and stainless steel nameplates.
The following items/services shall be included in the quotation:
Field instruments:-
Two (one operating and one standby) multipath ultrasonic flowmeters per stream, for flow
measurement.
Two pressure transmitters (one per stream).
Two temperature transmitters (one per stream).
Pneumatic operated on-off valves (Inlet Isolation Valve, Outlet Valve & Changeover Valve)
between streams.
Manual on-off valves.
Two (one operating and one standby) on-line Gas Chromatograph (C9+) analyzers, two
sampling probes, two sample handling/conditioning systems and all essential accessories
for independent full functionality of GCs. Both sample points shall be located at the
common header upstream of streams.
All electronic instruments shall be tropicalized and protected with sunshades. In addition,
Vendor shall consider the use of sunshade for the complete metering skid in order to meet
the specified metering skid accuracy.

Any other items not specified here but required to make the system capable to meet the
functional requirements.
Field cable up to the skid mounted junction boxes.
All the conventional SMART instruments shall be interfaced via HART multiplexers (TV
approved) in the cabinets provided by the Vendor and the necessary diagnostic information
shall be extracted and relayed for integration into the control system.
Cabinet with fully wired flow computers per stream (in redundant configuration) and
associated hardware including hardware for implementing switchover logic.
Supply of supervisory computer with 21 LCD display with HMI graphics to monitor and
control the metering skid and a printer for on demand report printing.
Supply of furniture (one table and one chair as minimum), for installation of the desktop
computer and printer. Both furnitures and printer shall be of the same maker, design and
model to the one supplied by MIV
The flow computers shall have redundant communication link with the supervisory PCs as
a minimum.
Supply of the hardware and software at the metering control system end, for redundant
serial communication with the control system, to transfer all measured and calculated data.
Supply of all software required for the full functionality of the complete system shall be
provided as part of equipment/system supply. The software is to be provided on CD with all
applicable licenses. Licenses shall be valid for 25 years.
Ex-proof junction boxes, sealing fitting, cable glands etc.
Supply of cabling from field instrument up to the skid junction boxes.
Supply of cabling required inside the control building for interface between fiscal metering
cabinet, supervisory PCs and printer.
Supply of all software/hardware required for collection of Gas Chromatograph (2 numbers)
analysis data and utilize for further calculation in flow computers.
Factory Acceptance Test (FAT), System Integrated Test (SIT) and Site Acceptance Test
(SAT).
Wet calibration at approved testing facilities and certification for two (2) numbers of
multipath ultrasonic flowmeters.

Fiscal metering validation procedure including software e.g. Kelton Flocalc software for
offline calculation including compressibility factor, ISO 6976 calculation, etc. or Velocity of
Sound Calculation software. Both software and validation procedure with check sheets
shall be loaded in standalone laptop to be supplied and included in Vendors scope of
work.
Supply of hardware, software engineering and design for full functionality of the fiscal flow
metering system and accessories.
Documentation.
Spare parts (commissioning, start-up and 2 years operation spare parts) including two sets
of sensors, sensor cables.
Tools including online retractable tool for the removal of ultrasonic flowmeter sensors
Training for Companys personnel.
Packing and transportation.
Pre-commissioning, commissioning of the complete system and establishing data transfer
between the control room and the flow metering system.
20% wired spare for each type of signal shall be provided along with 20% spare space in
the cabinets and I/O racks for future requirement. Processor and communication bus shall
not be loaded more than 50%. 20% spare cores/pairs shall be provided in the multipair
homerun cables. Redundancy shall be maintained in processor, power supply and
communication modules.
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Instruments
6.1.1. Ultrasonic Fiscal Flowmeter
Description : Multipath (4 paths or more) Ultrasonic Fiscal Flowmeter
with meter run assembly
Principle of operation : Leading edge (transit time)
Transducer/Housing MOC On-line retractable type / AISI 316/316L
Wetted parts material : SS 316 with NACE STD MR-01-75/ISO 15156 (latest)
End connection : Flanged, RF, Smooth finish

Transmitter : Integral to meter.
Electrical connection : M20 ISO Female threads
Electrical safety : Ex-proof to Zone 1, Gas group IIB, Temperature Class T4
Hazardous area certification ATEX/CENELEC approved
Enclosure class : IP 65 as per IEC 60529
Ambient temperature limit 0 to 85 C
Output : Vendor to specify according to flow computer and accuracy
requirements.
Power supply : 24 VDC from flow computer
Instrument range : Suitable for process data
Make : As per approved vendor list
Model no : Vendor to specify
Notes:
i) Accuracy required is 0.15% of reading.
ii) Meter shall provide a speed of sound estimate. Electromagnetic compatibility of the
instrument shall be in accordance with IEC 61000.
iii) The Vendor shall confirm that even if one path is removed, the flowmeter shall function
with its remaining paths. Vendor shall state the impact of such scenario on the
functionality and accuracy of the offered system. Meter fault diagnostic capability shall
be available as minimum.
iv) The Vendor shall elaborate on the self-diagnostic features available with the flowmeter
and provide the required hardware/software.
6.1.2. Pressure Transmitter
Type of transmitter: Gauge pressure type
Output: 4-20 mA SMART (HART), 2-wire
Power supply : 24 VDC loop powered (from flow computer)
Accuracy : 0.1% of span (Note-1)
Transmitter process conn.: NPT (F)

Meter range : Suitable for process data
Overpressure limit : Maximum 100 bar
Wetted parts material : SS 316 with NACE STD MR-01-75/ISO 15156 (latest)
Enclosure material : Low copper aluminium
Hazardous area certification: ATEX/CENELEC approved
Ambient temperature limit: 0 to 85 C
Manifold for isolation/vent: SS 316, NACE STD MR-01-75/ISO 15156 (latest).
Manifold mounting : 2 pipe mounting bracket required
Configuration : Complete configuration shall be possible using remote
configuration
Local display : Required
Sunshade or enclosure box: Required
Notes:
i) Vendor shall check and confirm to meet the overall accuracy of the fiscal
flow metering system.
ii) Vendor shall clarify HART protocol mode.
6.1.3. Temperature Transmitter
Type of transmitter : Head mounted
Output : 4-20 mA SMART (HART), 2-wire (linear with temperature)
Power supply : 24 VDC from flow computer
Accuracy : 0.1 C (Note-1)

Calibration requirement : As per IEC 60751
Instrument range : Suitable to Process Data
Enclosure material : Low copper aluminium
Hazardous area certification: ATEX/CENELEC approved
Ambient temperature limit: 0 to 85 C
Element : RTD (Pt 100)
Configuration : Complete configuration shall be possible using remote
configuration
Local display : Required
Sunshade or enclosure box: Required
Notes:
i) Vendor shall check and confirm to meet the overall accuracy of the fiscal
flow metering system.
ii) Vendor shall clarify HART protocol mode.

6.2. Flow Computer
Description : The Flow computer shall compute density corrected metric standard
volumetric flow, energy values in Joules. Standard conditions are 15C and 1.01325 bar(a). The
automatic stream changeover sequence in case of fault in one stream shall be implemented in the
flow computer. The automatic stream changeover sequence shall consider the flowmeter fault
status, flow computer fault status, on-off valve status as minimum. The automatic stream
changeover sequence implemented in the flow computer shall ensure that one valve is always
open at any given time in view of 100% availability. Vendor to review the air/signal fail action of
stream change over valves in view of 100% availability criteria of the metering skid. The logic shall
not cause in any case an interruption of gas supply to the customer. On line proving of one meter

against other shall be possible on command from supervisory PC. The accumulated flow
calculation shall be based on single flowmeter only and a separate report shall be generated after
each meter proving cycle. The flow computers shall be in redundant configuration.
The algorithm should give an alarm, if indicating gas is off-spec.
Power supply : 240 VAC Redundant (UPS, 30 minute back up)
Inputs (indicative) :
a) Flow: Vendor to specify.
b) Temperature (on skid + off-skid): 4 20 mA DC (HART).
c) Pressure (on skid + off-skid): 4 20 mA DC (HART).
d) Composition: Serial data.
e) Calorific values: Serial data
f) Specific gravity: Serial data
g) Valve status: Potential free contact
h) Digital input (from outside skid): Potential free contact
Outputs :
a) Digital output for stream changeover sequence and outside skid on-off valve.
b) Serial interface to HMI/supervisory PC via the data bus.
Output to the control system (as minimum) on real time basis:
a) Flow (uncompensated/compensated)
b) Pressure
c) Temperature
d) Specific gravity and density
e) Wobbe index
f) Calorific value (LHV/GHV)
g) Gas composition.
h) Hydrocarbon dew-point
All process data and instrumentation shall be available in the control system for operation,
monitoring and alarm. Data transferred to the control system shall have accuracy of two (2) decimal
places (e.g. 32 bit floating point).

Mounting : Vendor to specify
Model : Vendor to specify
6.3 HMI / Supervisory PC
The flow computers of each stream shall be connected to industrial grade PC based monitoring
and operating station via the databus. The purpose of this PC is to monitor the metering equipment
parameters, to operate in meter proving configuration and to display gas composition obtained from
both GCs. A printer with necessary software and drivers will be connected with this PC for on
demand printing of hourly/daily/weekly/monthly accumulated report on metering skid parameters.
The PC shall be provided with MS operating systems and application software. PC specification
shall be in accordance with the Consortiums specifications.
Vendor shall be requested to comply with the following PC specification:
1) The PC should generate these hourly/daily/weekly/monthly reports automatically. These
reports are mandatory requirement of this project.
2) A report shall be provided after proof testing of the ultrasonic flowmeters.
3) The PC should be capable of creating a history file of all reports. The PC shall be capable
of storing these reports for a minimum of 3 years.
4) The PC can be used for generating analysis reports.
5) It shall be possible to store the report in a removable media for company internal use.
6) The supervisory PC shall on demand generate report on uncertainty calculations for flow
and energy.
The above reports shall include the following as a minimum (in a specific format given by the
purchaser):
a) Hourly gas delivery report must show the hourly accumulated volumes, Wobbe index peak
instantaneous flow rate and min/max heating values.
b) Daily gas delivery reports must show the accumulated volume, Wobbe index peak
instantaneous flow rate and min/max heating values.
c) Monthly gas delivery reports shall show the daily-accumulated volume, Wobbe index, peak
day volumes /energy and min/max heating values. This could be just one page summary
for the entire month.
6.4. Gas Chromatographic Analyser
6.4.1. General

Two (1 working + 1 standby) on line Gas Chromatographs shall be installed upstream of the flow
metering skid for analysis of the gas composition, heating (calorific) values and the calculation of
specific gravity. The Gas Chromatograph enclosure shall be explosion proof and shall be certified
for use in Zone 1, Gas Group IIB, Temp class T4 area. The electronics of the Chromatograph shall
be tropicalized and shall be fit for continuous functioning within the range of ambient atmospheres
experienced at site. The analyser chamber will consist of a temperature controlled heat sink oven,
working over an ambient range of 0-82C. The oven s hall contain three packed columns, thermal
conductivity type of micro detector and sample injection and column switching valves. Carrier gas
shall preferably be Helium, which shall push the sample gas from the sample conditioning system
into the columns in a pre-determined sequence. The operation shall allow initial purging with carrier
gas and then sequential analysis of all components. Total time to complete one cycle of analysis
shall be not greater than 360 seconds.
The vent connection on the Gas Chromatographs shall preferably be OD and shall preferably
be piped into a plant flare system. Venting rate shall not exceed 100 cc/min. at 1.4 bar(g). If no
flare system is available, the Bidder shall propose an alternate and safe venting system
The Gas Chromatograph shall be able to carry out automatic re-calibration at pre-defined intervals.
The Gas Chromatograph is to provide gas composition analyses up to C9+, specific gravity, density
and heating (calorific) value input to custody transfer metering system, with an overall uncertainty
within 1%. The Bidder shall supply the GC analyzer with the highest accuracy to meet the overall
custody transfer metering systems objectives. The GC shall also provide hydrocarbon dew-point
analysis and result.
Vendor shall supply the mapping details for the configuration of serial interface database to be
communicated and displayed on the control system.
Gas calibration and carrier gas cylinders shall be supplied by the Contractor for pre-commissioning,
commissioning and the initial period of the project.
6.4.2. Sample conditioning system
The fast loop sample conditioning system shall be designed to handle one sample gas stream and
one calibration gas stream. The system shall draw sample from the pipeline through a take-off
point. Sampling tubes shall be heat traced. The take-off shall be installed approximately 5 meters
from the Gas Chromatograph. The conditioning system shall have integral heat traced pressure
regulator and relief valve. The conditioning system shall be dedicated to each GC; i.e. two
independent sample conditioning system with sample probe shall be provided for two GCs.
The Contractor shall design and supply the sample conditioning system according to the process
condition. Typically the sample conditioning system shall consist of the following as minimum:
Double block and bleed type isolation valve shall be used to isolate the sampling line from the
pipeline. The sample conditioning system shall consist of in-line filter, sample flow controller, flow

indicator, solenoid valves, etc. All components shall be of SS316 body and the tubing
interconnection shall be made from SS316 L. The analyser wetted parts material shall conform to
the requirements of NACE MR-01-75/ISO 15156 (Latest). The sample conditioning system shall be
mounted on a SS316 plate with suitable hood; the plate shall have mounting holes for field stand
mounting. All external connections shall be OD connection.
6.4.3. Calibration and carrier gas
The carrier gas shall be high purity helium. The calibration gas shall be specified by the Contractor.
The Bidder shall supply the cylinders for both the carrier gas and calibration gas. Since the
cylinders need to be replaced, the Contractor shall advise the source of the calibration gas/carrier
gas in Oman, to enable the Consortium to replace the cylinder. The Bidder shall provide a
sunshade and mounting supports for installation of cylinders.
Two sets of regulators for carrier gas cylinders and two sets of regulators for the calibration gas
cylinder with a common connection between them shall be supplied. The cylinders shall be
installed and connected with OD tube for connecting to the Gas Chromatograph or Sample
Conditioning System. Suitable SS316 adapters (Swagelok make), if required shall be supplied.
Cylinder holding bracket for 6 cylinders shall be provided for mounting both carrier and calibration
gas cylinders.
Two helium cylinders shall be connected in such a way that one cylinder can be replaced without
interrupting the operation of the Gas Chromatograph.
Low pressure alarm shall be generated and displayed on the control system from carrier gas as
well as calibration gas mixture cylinders.
6.4.4. Chromatograph controller
The Chromatograph controller shall be mounted in explosion proof enclosure in the field. It shall be
located in Gas Chromatograph unit cabinet suitable to mount in hazardous area in ambient
atmosphere. The cabinet shall have lifting lugs at the top. All cable entries shall be at the bottom of
cabinet. Supply voltage of 240VAC UPS will be provided to cabinet for Chromatograph controller.
The cabinet shall accommodate the following;
One microprocessor based analyser controller controlling the analyser operation, data from the
Chromatograph, producing Chromatograms and reports and for transmitting data to the flow
computers and supervisory computer.
Power supply units, terminals, power distribution system, cable trunking, etc.
Terminal blocks for marshalling and other interfacing signals.
Cabinet wiring shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the relevant standards. Cabinet shall
have the following grounding buses;

Dirty Earth
Clean Earth
All the equipment in the cabinet shall have RFI immunity as per IEC 61000 and transient protection
as per IEEE 473.
The microprocessor based Chromatograph controller shall feature;
Memory with 45 days battery backup to protect the programme in case of power outage.
Programming through front of panel keypad for configuration and calibration.
Front of panel display for operator prompting.
Remote programming option via serial link/fibre optic cable link.
Gas composition outputs to the control system via redundant serial links.
Volt free contact output for analyser fault and controller fault.
Changeover to the standby GC in case of fault in duty GC.
Energy value computational repeatability of 1/2 Joules per 1000 over 0-50C.
6.4.5. Chromatograms and Reports
The analyser controller shall have the option of generating any or all of the following
reports/diagnosis through serial link,
Analysis report providing complete compositional analysis plus MW and heating values at an
interval of one hour.
24 hour average report providing up to 15 separate data average over 24 hours.
Calibration report providing the report of calibrating the analyser with certified calibration gas.
In addition, following fault/alarm messages shall be provided;
Maximum of 15 HI/LO alarms on the measured variables
Analyser common fault
Controller common fault
Chromatogram of the gas analysis shall be available in Gas Chromatograph controller as well as in
control system with supporting software supplied by the GC Vendor.
The chromatogram shall be produced with clear identification of each component. Each peak shall
represent one component. The area under the peak shall represent components concentration.
6.4.6. Interface with other System
GCs are interfaced with the supervisory control system to hand-off analysis data and calculated
data on the control system.
6.4.7. Sample probe

The sampling system shall be defined by the Vendor. Tapping for manual sample probe shall be
provided. The sampling probe shall be on line retractable type to facilitate on line maintenance
activities without stopping the process. Individual sample probe for each GC shall be provided.
6.5. POWER SUPPLY
6.5.1 Power Supply Facilities
6.5.1.1. Each cabinet shall receive 240 VAC 5%, 50 Hz 2% from 2 UPS feeders, with 30
minute back up via redundant feeder cables from UPS distribution board and/or 24
VDC power supplies shall be used for the instrumentation systems.
6.5.1.2. Instruments (other than FF, 2 wire devices) requiring external power supply shall be
considered for 24V DC power supply only.
6.5.1.3. The normal operation of AC powered instruments shall not be adversely affected by
power dips caused by load transfer operation of UPS system.
6.5.1.4. The Vendor shall supply the AC/DC power supply units/converters and provide 100%
fault tolerance (redundancy). Internal power supplies for CPUs and I/O shall be
separated.
6.5.1.5. Each power supply in a redundant set of power supplies shall be rated such that all
loads can be simultaneously energized.
6.5.1.6. Diagnostics and signalling facilities shall be provided to service/replace a faulty power
supply unit.
6.5.1.7. The power supply to the input and output circuits shall be floating (non-earthed).
Hardware shall be provided to automatically check and alarm in case the supply is
not floating. The related alarm shall be part of individual cabinet utility alarms.
6.5.1.8. It shall be possible to isolate, disconnect, remove and replace faulty power supplies
without loss of operation.
6.5.1.9. Main power interruptions of up to 10msec shall not affect operation.

6.5.2. Power Distribution
6.5.2.1. The Vendor shall provide all the necessary power, voltages, frequencies, etc. that
individual components and modules require with full fault tolerance (redundancy).

6.5.2.2. Isolation of power on per process unit basis by means of circuit breakers and
fusing shall be provided in the metering cabinets. Exceptions to this, if any, shall
be given in the specification.
6.5.2.3. It shall be possible to easily replace fuses.
7. METERING PANEL REQUIREMENT
7.1. Cabinets
7.1.1. System/marshalling cabinets shall preferably be Rittal TS 8000 Series, 800 mm wide,
800 mm deep and 2000 mm high (2100 mm with plinth), with RAL 7035. More than
two cabinets shall not be bolted together. Alternatively, Vendor standard cabinet of
similar quality may be offered in the tender for consideration by the Company. In this
event, individual differences from the Rittal standard specification shall be clearly
indicated in the tender.
7.1.2. The cabinets shall be of the free standing type, with doors.
7.1.3. Cabinets shall be provided with a heat extraction fan, louvers and dust filters. Each
cabinet shall have a temperature switch to alarm in case of high inside temperature.
This alarm shall be available in the plant control system.
7.1.4. A failure of a single heat extraction fan, if installed, shall not lead to such a high
temperature that the power has to be cut off. The Vendor shall supply in such cases
fault tolerant fans. Fan failure shall be included in the cabinet common utility alarm.
7.1.5. The cabinets shall have a facility to be connected together. The Vendor shall advise
on the use of side plates with regard to ventilation, heat dissipation and
interconnection of cabinets.
7.1.6. Cabinet layouts shall be of a standard design for the type of cabinet.
7.1.7. The cabinet shall have front access however if the Vendors hardware design requires
front and rear access for the cabinet, the Vendor shall specify the same for Company
approval. All doors shall be hinged opening, preferably 180 degrees, detachable.
Cabinets shall be lockable and the keys shall be identical for all cabinets under the
Vendors scope of supply.
7.1.8. Eye bolts shall be fitted on top of the cabinets for lifting purposes.
7.1.9. Anchor bolt holes shall be provided.
7.1.10. Unused card location shall be fitted with cover plates.
7.1.11. Cabinet fans & lights shall use non-UPS power supply.

7.1.12. Cabinet shall be provided with 240V AC, 50Hz utility socket.
7.2. Cabling / Wireways
7.2.1. All cabling shall be as per approved specifications for Instrument Cabling.
7.2.2. All cable entries shall be through bottom. Bottom plates shall have removable sealing
clamp plates for cable entries. Sufficient free space shall be made available for proper
accommodation and termination of the cables.
7.2.3. Cable clamps and support shall be provided for all incoming cables. Adequate cable
connection stress relief shall be provided.
7.2.4. If termipoint or wire wrap is applied, adequate terminating pins at the Elco boards
shall be connected. The Vendor shall specify how this is included in the proposed
design.
7.2.5. All internal wiring shall be laid in close-slotted trunking with a covering lid. Ducting
shall have 40% spare capacity.
7.2.6. Wiring carrying signal susceptible to electrical interference shall be adequately
screened.
7.2.7. All inter-section wiring shall pass through the normal cabinet entries.
7.2.8. Colour code and marking of wires shall be as per the standards indicated in the
specification. All power wiring shall be clearly marked with reference codes and/or tag
numbers.
7.2.9. Terminals shall be Weidmuller or Vendor recommended equivalent. If fused terminals
are required, they shall be equipped with blown indicators.
7.2.10. Terminal arrangements shall be such that all single cores, including spares, of the
multi-core cables can be connected in the same sequential order as the pattern and
layout of the cores in the cable.
7.2.11. Lightning protection devices shall be installed at the initial termination point in the
cabinet of all field devices.
7.2.12. Power cables and instrument cables shall be segregated.
7.3. Earthing
7.3.1. Two earths, instrument screen earth and plant safety earth shall be made available.
Electric ground and instrument ground shall be discontinuous.

7.3.2. All metallic equipment of and within the cabinets shall be connected to single
common cabinet plant safety earth point. Each cabinet shall be provided with an
M10 earth bolt for connection to the plant safety earthing system.
7.3.3. Screens for cable interconnecting cabinets shall be earthed at one end only to the
instrument screen earth. For this purposes the Vendor shall provide an insulated
instrument screen earth bar.
7.3.4. Screen earth for serial communication lines between the metering system and the
control system shall be connected at the control system side only.
7.3.5. The Vendor shall state in the quotation earthing requirements for the quoted system.
7.3.6. The Vendor shall provide on earth leakage monitor per cabinet unless otherwise
stated on the requisition. The related alarm shall be taken-up in the common cabinet
utility alarm.
7.4. Labelling
7.4.1. Terminals carrying voltages higher than 24 volts shall be protected against accidental
contact by having removable cover plates, and shall be labelled to indicate high
voltage.
7.4.2. Sockets, terminals and main wiring shall be clearly identified in strict accordance with
the system documentation. Earthing for screens, AC and DC systems shall be
segregated and identified.
7.4.3. Each cabinet and all major system components, card files and individual card
locations shall be clearly labelled and identified with a tag number. Nameplates shall
be in the English language. In addition all equipment shall be durably identified with
the Vendor type and serial number and with Vendor order number to facilitate future
reference. Cabinets shall be identified with tag number. The Vendors number shall be
complete and sufficient for ordering and identical component without further
clarification.
7.4.4. Separate cabinets or segregated section is within a cabinet that are provided for
intrinsic safety shall be labelled as such. Cables and ducting shall have a blue colour.
8. INSPECTION & TEST
8.1. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) shall be carried out at the Vendor's workshop.
The inspection shall be carried out in accordance with the approved FAT procedure.

NOTE: The FAT is performed to demonstrate that Vendor has already successfully performed
testing. It shall not be used as a substitute for the vendor's own tests. Vendor shall ensure that the
system is ready for customer tests and will be fully responsible for delays that result from the
system not being completely ready for such testing.
The Vendor shall provide adequate personnel, test facilities and test equipment for the FAT.
The Vendor shall provide FAT procedures. These shall include;
Timing of activities.
Vendor's personnel attending the FAT (with responsibilities).
Methods, by which deficiencies shall be identified, recorded and rectified.
The test procedures shall be made available 8 weeks prior to the FAT for Company approval.
The Vendor shall notify the Purchaser 4 weeks in advance of when the system will be ready for
FAT.
The FAT consists of a full functional test of flow metering system including full functional logic
testing of the automatic stream changeover sequence at the Vendor's works. This shall include
visual checks on workmanship, field instruments calibration, hydro test, material certificates
checking, panel wiring and insulation tests, etc.
Final documentation shall be available during this test.
After successful FAT and SIT, the system shall be released for shipment.
8.2. System Integrated Test (SIT)
This phase will take place at the control system suppliers works/site (as applicable). The location
shall be advised by the Company/Contractor. The fiscal metering vendor is responsible for sending
the equipment for SIT to the control system suppliers works/site (as applicable), perform the test
(including the redundancy test) and take back the equipment. Expenses for all necessary loading,
unloading, transportation and insurance coverage for the full period shall be borne by the fiscal
metering vendor.
This test includes;
Connection of the metering computers to the control system and testing of the serial
communication with the control system.
This will involve;
100% test of functionality
100% test of all analog and digital signals
Punch list items from FAT shall be tested during SIT.

8.3. Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
The Vendor shall complete a Site Acceptance Test (SAT) at site.
Punch list items from FAT and SIT shall be tested during SAT.
In addition to above tests, Vendor shall perform tests to prove that in case of parallel flow through
both duty and standby stream the total flow for billing the consumer shall be addition of flow
through both the flowmeters (duty and standby) and similarly during meter proving (series flow with
crossover valve open) the flow through duty flowmeter only is used for billing the consumer.
9 PAINTING AND COATING, PROTECTION AND SHIPPING
9.1. Painting and Coating
Painting and surface protection shall generally conform to accepted specifications for Painting &
Protective Coating and shall be suitable for the climatic conditions as detailed in Attachment-A of
this Appendix D.
The manufacturers painting standard can be considered as an alternative offer provided it meets
or exceeds the proceeding requirements.
9.2. Protection and Shipping
The system shall be delivered to the required location according to Purchasers purchase order
instructions.
Packing shall be in accordance with accepted Packing Procedures and transportation shall be in
accordance with accepted Transportation and Logistics Procedures.
The skid shall be designed rigid enough to withstand any forces and bending moments during sea
and road transportation. Any damage resulting from poor packing shall be on account of supplier
and shall be replaced within the agreed period
The Vendor shall be fully responsible for supplying all necessary documentation to enable customs
clearance of the equipment.
10. DOCUMENTATION AND DRAWINGS
10.1. General
The Vendor shall complete and submit with the tender the entire information essential to enable a
technical assessment of the bid to be made. Failure to supply the data may cause rejection of the
bid.
The information required as a minimum shall include:

Sizing calculations.
Vendor's standard guarantee/warranty of the complete unit.
Product catalogues
10.2. Documentation with Order
The engineering documentation required in the event of an order is specified in the Material
Requisition for Flow Metering System. Documentation shall be submitted for comment and
approval.
Following standard documents shall be provided.
Full technical specifications of Vendors hardware and software quoted.
Full details of guarantee offered both on the overall system and on (commissioning) spares.
Project specific documentation.
System block diagrams, e.g. a detailed system overview.
Functional system description.
Initial planning network.
Progress report showing progress made not less than every month.
All necessary drawings carrying title block with Vendors drawing number.
Instruction manuals of all equipment supplied:
a) Hardware maintenance manuals
b) Software reference manuals
c) Hardware reference manuals
d) System operating manuals
e) Engineering manuals
f) System installation manuals
Study report and recommendation for eliminating the ultrasonic noise if any.
Software point configuration data.
Installation manuals for all individual items of fiscal metering system.
All testing and commissioning procedures before the testing and commissioning activities.
10.3. Approval of drawings
a) All drawings and engineering documents shall be subject to comments and approval by the
Purchaser/detail engineering consultant.
b) Approval is for the purpose of ascertaining conformance to the specifications and standards
and does not relieve the Vendor of the responsibility to provide a fully operational system.
A period of two weeks shall be allowed for the Purchaser/detail engineering consultant to give
comments. The vendor shall not commence fabrication before approval of the relevant drawings
has been received.
11 TRAINING

The Vendor shall provide detailed information on the various training facilities that can be provided,
either at the works or on the site for instrument maintenance/design engineers, maintenance
technicians and operators.
For each training program, the following shall be provided:
Types of courses
Duration and periods of courses
Costs per course (at the Supplier's works or at site)
Training documentation provided
Prerequisite knowledge of participants
12. SPARE PARTS
12.1. General
The Vendor shall include with the quotation a price list of spare parts for start-up / commissioning
and two year of operation and maintenance / capital spares, together with the relevant cross
sectional drawings and spare parts list.
SPIR forms shall be completed by the Vendor in accordance with the instructions for use of SPIR
forms and submitted to the Purchaser not later than 8 weeks after the purchase order is placed.
12.2. Commissioning spares
The Vendor shall include spares for commissioning in the quotation. Quantities recommended shall
take into consideration of the Vendors experience regarding the failure rate of the components.
12.3. Guarantee period spares
Any spares used during the guarantee period shall be replenished at the Vendors expense. The
time and procedure for repair and/or replacement shall be clearly stated in the quotation.
12.4. Maintenance/Operation spares
The Vendor shall recommend for maintenance spares required for two (2) year of continuous
operation.
13. QUALITY CONTROL
Vendor shall exercise full and adequate quality control in accordance with the Project Quality Plan
and Procedures, which shall include the design verification, inspection and testing during
manufacture, construction and assembly.
14. WARRANTY

The Vendor shall warranty all works and material in his supply against defective materials,
workmanship, design, packaging and/or failure in normal use for a period of 24 months after the
final acceptance of package.

ATTACHMENT A: ENVIRONMENT CONDITION
Geographic Data:
Location: Musandam Peninsula
Field : West Bukha
Environmental / Meteorological Data:
Updated data shall be provided by Oman Meteorological department where applicable.

Ambient Air Temperature
Air Temp shade (Summer Max)

Notes 1 50 C

Summer Average 30C
Winter Minimum

5C
Winter Average 15C
Maximum black bulb temperature

82C
Maximum daily variation in
temperature
25C

Ground Temperature: Max (Summer) 35C @ 800 mm

Min (Winter) 20 C @ l000 mm


Relative Humidity: Max 98%

Min 60%

Soil Data:
Average Soil Thermal Resistivity

240 cmC/W

Barometric Pressure

Average 95.7 to 98.9 kPa(a)

Rainfall (Note 2)

Design Rainfall in 1 hour 25mm
Design Rainfall average

Nil

Wind: Prevailing wind directions
March/ April From North West
May/ June From South West
Remainder From South East

Design Wind Speed:


Basic Wind Speed (3 Sec. Gusts) 42.0 m/s

Solar Radiation:
Solar Radiation

120 mW/cm2

Sea water Temperature: Winter 25 C

Summer 30 C

Notes:
1. The ambient temperature may rise up to 60C for short periods but, as this temperature
occurs for short periods only, equipment shall be designed to achieve its rated capacity
with a shade temperature of 50C. Instruments shall be suitable for the black bulb
temperature of 82C.
2. Rainfall is infrequent, but when rainfall occurs, it is often combined with severe sand
storms.
3. All instruments, systems and related components shall comply with the environmental
conditions as specified in the Project specification.
Plant-mounted instruments shall be suitable for operation in industrial, humid, saline and corrosive
atmospheres and shall be adequately protected according to the electrical area classification.
For outdoor locations, the climatic conditions of location class D2 of IEC 60654-1 apply.
The minimum degree of protection of plant instruments shall be IP 65 as defined in IEC 60529.
For mechanical influence, classification in accordance with IEC 60654-3 shall apply.

For corrosive influence, classification in accordance with IEC 60654-4 shall apply. The corrosive
influence class shall comply with the requirements of Class 1 (Industrial clean air) or Class 2
(moderate contamination), as specified by the Company.
For tropical areas, further stringent requirements, such as anti-corrosion coatings or tropicalization
of printed circuit boards, may be applicable and advice shall be obtained from the Vendors. Special
attention shall be paid to factors relating to insects, animals, etc.
Special attention shall be paid to instruments and ancillary equipment which will be used in marine
(e.g. jetty) services and/or installed in coastal or offshore environments. In such cases hermetical
sealing of the electronic circuitry may be required.
Depending on site conditions, the contacts of switches/relays may require protection against traces
of H2S and SO2 in the indoor and outdoor atmospheres by gold coating (at least 10m) or by
locating them in hermetically sealed housings.
General Note:
Sandstorms: These are both frequent and severe and can last for days. The atmosphere is heavily
laden with dust particles, down to 2 microns.

ATTACHMENT B: UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
The project shall use the SI units for all calculations, drawings and in all project documentation. All
vendor documentation and equipment will also utilize the SI units.
In some cases it may be convenient to use oil/gas industry standard units for standard volume flow
and pressure. These are shown in parenthesis below:
Parameter Unit Symbol
Area square metres m2
Cathodic Current Density Amps per square metre A/m2
Conductivity Micro Siemens per centimetre S/cm
Current Amps A
Density kilograms per cubic metre kg/m3
Elevation metres m

Energy Joules J
Flow Velocity metres per second m/s
Force kilonewtons kN
Frequency Hertz s-1
Gas Volume Fraction mole percent mol %
Gas Volumetric Flow million std cubic metres per day

normal cubic metres per hour (at 0C, 1 atm)
MSm3/d

Nm3/hr
Heat Transfer Coefficient Watts per square metre per degree C W/(m2 C)
Heating Value megajoules per cubic metre

megajoules per kilogram
MJ/(Sm3)

MJ/kg
Length metres

millimetres
M

mm
Liquid Head metres m
Liquid Volume Fraction volume percent Vol %
Liquid Volumetric Flow barrel per day

cubic metres per day (actual)

cubic metres per day (standard)
bbl/d

Am3/d

Sm3/d
Mass kilogram Kg


tonne

t
Mass Concentration parts per million (mass)

mass percent
ppm wt

wt %
Mass Enthalpy kilojoules per kilogram kJ/kg
Mass Flow kilograms per hour

tonnes per day
kg/h

t/d
Molar Flow kilogram moles per hour kgmol/h
Moment kilonewton metres kNm
Potential Volts V
Power kilowatts kW
Pressure bar absolute

bar gauge

milibar gauge (for tanks)
Bara

Barg

mbarg
Resistance Ohm
Seawater resistivity Ohm metres m
Sound Pressure decibels dBA
Specific Heat kilojoules per kilogram per degree C kJ/kg C
Stress Newtons per square metre N/m2


Pascals

Pa
Temperature degrees Celsius C
Thermal Conductivity Watts per metre per deg. C W/(m C)
Viscosity centipoises (dynamic)
centistokes (kinematic)
cP

cSt
Volume Cubic metres m3
Wind Velocity metres per second m/s


Appendix E Plant System Categories for Spare
Parts
2 Years Consumables Operational Spare parts
& 5 Years BOP recommended Spare Parts
Including, but not limited to:
Reciprocating Engine
(a) Engine Hall, with ventilation system, lighting, gantry crane etc;
(b) Natural Gas system Gas regulating unit;
(c) Fuel Oil system- fuel pump and nozzle;
(d) Lubricating System - Oil mist separator, Oil tank, filter and pumps;
(e) Engine Cooling System - Radiators, water pumps, expansion vessel;
(f) Inlet air system - Air filters;
(g) Exhaust Gas system - Exhaust gas module (Stack, silencer);
(h) Fire protection system - Fire detection panel;
(i) Starting unit: Starting air unit (receiver), Starting air bottle;
(j) Instrument air system;
(k) Engine Control System - Control Fuel mode changes, Gas admission control,
(l) Pilot injection control, Air / fuel ratio control, Knocking control and Engine
(m) Safety;
(n) Generator control and protection systems;
(o) Excitation system and AVR;
(p) Neutral terminal Compartment;
(q) Neutral grounding equipment;
(r) Medium Voltage Switchgear Compartment, including generator circuit breaker;
(s) Unit Auxiliary Switchboard Compartment;
(t) Unit Backup Batteries, Chargers and DC Distribution Compartment; and
(u) Unit Building Services Switchboards (Normal and Emergency).

Part I - Owners Technical Specification - RE - Rev L - 22dec2013 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part I - Owners Technical Specification - RE - Rev L - 22dec2013 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Musandam Power Project

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION DUAL FUEL

You might also like